103146 3 Weg Variable Frequency Drive Programming Manual User

User Manual: Pump 103146 3 Weg Variable Frequency Drive Programming Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 254

Download103146 3 Weg Variable Frequency Drive Programming Manual User
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Summary
Chapter 0
Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms
Quick Parameter Reference................................................................................................................0-1
Quick Fault and Alarm Reference......................................................................................................0-26

Chapter 1
Safety Notices
1.1 Safety Notices in this Manual........................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Safety Notices on the Product.......................................................................................................1-1
1.3 Preliminary Recommendations......................................................................................................1-2

Chapter 2
General Information
2.1 About this Manual ......................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Terminology and Definitions.........................................................................................................2-1
2.2.1 Terms and Definitions Used in the Manual............................................................................2-1
2.2.2 Numerical Representation...................................................................................................2-3
2.2.3 Symbols for the Parameter Proprieties Description.................................................................2-3

Chapter 3
About the CFW-11
3.1 About the CFW-11 .....................................................................................................................3-1

Chapter 4
Keypad (HMI)
4.1 Keypad (HMI)..............................................................................................................................4-1

Chapter 5
Programming Basic Instructions
5.1 Parameter Structure......................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Groups Accessed in the Option Menu in the Monitoring Mode........................................................5-2
5.3 Password Setting in P0000...........................................................................................................5-2
5.4 HMI [30]....................................................................................................................................5-3
5.5 Date and Time Setting..................................................................................................................5-8
5.6 Display Indications in the Monitoring Mode Settings.......................................................................5-9
5.7 Incompatibility Between Parameters.............................................................................................5-11

Summary
Chapter 6
Inverter Model and Accessories Identification
6.1 Inverter Data [42]........................................................................................................................6-2

Chapter 7
Starting-Up and Settings
7.1 Backup Parameters [06]..............................................................................................................7-1

Chapter 8
Available Control Types
8.1 Control Types..............................................................................................................................8-1

Chapter 9
Scalar Control (V/f)
9.1 V/f Control [23]..........................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 Adjustable V/f Curve [24]............................................................................................................9-6
9.3 V/f Current Limitation [26]...........................................................................................................9-7
9.4 V/f DC Voltage Limitation [27]...................................................................................................9-10
9.5 Start-up in the V/f Control Mode.................................................................................................9-13

Chapter 10
VVW Control
10.1 VVW Control [25]....................................................................................................................10-3
10.2 Motor Data [43]......................................................................................................................10-3
10.3 VVW Control Mode Start-up.....................................................................................................10-4

Chapter 11
Vector Control
11.1 Sensorless Control and with Encoder........................................................................................11-1
11.2 I/f Mode (sensorless)...............................................................................................................11-5
11.3 Self-Tuning..............................................................................................................................11-5
11.4 Optimal Flux for Sensorless Vector Control (only for constant torque loads)..................................11-6
11.5 Torque Control........................................................................................................................11-7
11.6 Optimal Braking......................................................................................................................11-8
11.7 Motor Data [43]...................................................................................................................11-10
		 11.7.1 Adjustment of the Parameters P0409 to P0412 Based on the Motor Data Sheet..............11-14
11.8 Vector Control [29]................................................................................................................11-15
		 11.8.1 Speed Regulator [90].................................................................................................11-15
		 11.8.2 Current Regulator [91]...............................................................................................11-18
		 11.8.3 Flux Regulator [92]....................................................................................................11-18
		 11.8.4 I/f Control [93]..........................................................................................................11-21
		 11.8.5 Self-Tuning [05] and [94]...........................................................................................11-22

Summary
		 11.8.6 Torque Current Limitation [95]....................................................................................11-26
		 11.8.7 DC Link Regulator [96]...............................................................................................11-28
11.9 Start-up in the Vector Modes Sensorless and with Encoder........................................................11-30

Chapter 12
Functions Common to All the Control Modes
12.1 Ramps [20]............................................................................................................................12-1
12.2 Speed References [21].............................................................................................................12-3
12.3 Speed Limits [22]....................................................................................................................12-5
12.4 Multispeed [36]......................................................................................................................12-6
12.5 Electronic Potentiometer [37]....................................................................................................12-9
12.6 Zero Speed Logic [35].............................................................................................................12-9
12.7 Flying Start/Ride-Through [44]................................................................................................12-11
		 12.7.1 V/f Flying Start...........................................................................................................12-12
		 12.7.2 Vector Flying Start......................................................................................................12-12
				12.7.2.1 P0202=3.......................................................................................................12-12
				12.7.2.2 P0202=4.......................................................................................................12-13
		 12.7.3 V/f Ride-Through........................................................................................................12-13
		 12.7.4 Vector Ride-Through...................................................................................................12-15
12.8 DC Braking [47]..................................................................................................................12-18
12.9 Skip Speed [48]...................................................................................................................12-21
12.10 Search of Zero of the Encoder..............................................................................................12-22

Chapter 13
Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs
13.1 I/O Configuration [07]............................................................................................................13-1
		 13.1.1 Analog Inputs [38].......................................................................................................13-1
		 13.1.2 Analog Outputs [39]....................................................................................................13-6
		 13.1.3 Digital Inputs [40]......................................................................................................13-11
		 13.1.4 Digital Outputs / Relays [41]......................................................................................13-19
13.2 Local Command [31]............................................................................................................13-28
13.3 Remote Command [32].........................................................................................................13-28
13.4 3-Wire Command [33]..........................................................................................................13-33
13.5 Forward Run/Reverse Run Commands [34]..............................................................................13-33

Chapter 14
Dynamic Braking
14.1 Dynamic Braking [28]..............................................................................................................14-1

Chapter 15
Faults and Alarms
15.1 Motor Overload Protection.......................................................................................................15-1
15.2 Motor Overtemperature Protection............................................................................................15-2
15.3 Protections [45].......................................................................................................................15-4

Summary
Chapter 16
Read Only Parameters [09]
16.1 Fault History [08].....................................................................................................................16-8

Chapter 17
Communication [49]
17.1 RS-232 and RS-485 Serial Interface..........................................................................................17-1
17.2 CAN Interface – CANopen/DeviceNet.......................................................................................17-1
17.3 Anybus-CC Interface................................................................................................................17-2
17.4 Communication States and Commands.....................................................................................17-3

Chapter 18
SoftPLC [50]
18.1 SoftPLC . ................................................................................................................................18-1

Chapter 19
Trace Function [52]
19.1 Trace Function.........................................................................................................................19-1

Chapter 20
PID Regulator [46]
20.1 Description and Definitions......................................................................................................20-1
20.2 Commissioning.......................................................................................................................20-3
20.3 Sleep Mode............................................................................................................................20-7
20.4 Monitoring Mode Screens........................................................................................................20-7
20.5 Connection of a 2-Wire Transducer..........................................................................................20-8
20.6 Parameters..............................................................................................................................20-8
20.7 Academic PID.......................................................................................................................20-14

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

P0000

Access to Parameters

0 to 9999

0

-

-

5-2

P0001

Speed Reference

0 to 18000 rpm

-

RO

09

16-1

P0002

Motor Speed

0 to 18000 rpm

-

RO

09

16-1

P0003

Motor Current

0.0 to 4500.0 A

-

RO

09

16-2

P0004

DC Link Voltage (Ud)

0 to 2000 V

-

RO

09

16-2

P0005

Motor Frequency

0.0 to 300.0 Hz

-

RO

09

16-2

P0006

VFD Status

0 = Ready
1 = Run
2 = Undervoltage
3 = Fault
4 = Self-Tuning
5 = Configuration
6 = DC-Braking
7 = STO

-

RO

09

16-2

P0007

Motor Voltage

0 to 2000 V

-

RO

09

16-3

P0009

Motor Torque

-1000.0 to 1000.0 %

-

RO

09

16-3

P0010

Output Power

0.0 to 6553.5 kW

-

RO

09

16-4

P0012

DI8 to DI1 Status

Bit 0 = DI1
Bit 1 = DI2
Bit 2 = DI3
Bit 3 = DI4
Bit 4 = DI5
Bit 5 = DI6
Bit 6 = DI7
Bit 7 = DI8

-

RO

09, 40

13-11

P0013

DO5 to DO1 Status

Bit 0 = DO1
Bit 1 = DO2
Bit 2 = DO3
Bit 3 = DO4
Bit 4 = DO5

-

RO

09, 41

13-19

P0014

AO1 Value

0.00 to 100.00 %

-

RO

09, 39

13-6

P0015

AO2 Value

0.00 to 100.00 %

-

RO

09, 39

13-6

P0016

AO3 Value

-100.00 to 100.00 %

-

RO

09, 39

13-6

P0017

AO4 Value

-100.00 to 100.00 %

-

RO

09, 39

13-6

P0018

AI1 Value

-100.00 to 100.00 %

-

RO

09, 38, 95

13-1

P0019

AI2 Value

-100.00 to 100.00 %

-

RO

09, 38, 95

13-1

P0020

AI3 Value

-100.00 to 100.00 %

-

RO

09, 38, 95

13-1

P0021

AI4 Value

-100.00 to 100.00 %

-

RO

09, 38, 95

13-1

P0023

Software Version

0.00 to 655.35

-

RO

09, 42

6-2

P0027

Accessories Config. 1

0000h to FFFFh

-

RO

09, 42

6-2

P0028

Accessories Config. 2

0000h to FFFFh

-

RO

09, 42

6-2

P0029

Power Hardware Config

Bit 0 to 5 = Rated
Current
Bit 6 and 7 = Rated
Voltage
Bit 8 = EMC Filter
Bit 9 = Safety Relay
Bit 10 = (0)24V/(1)DC
Link
Bit 11 = (0)RST/(1)DC
Link
Bit 12 = Dyn.Brak. IGBT
Bit 13 = Special
Bit 14 and 15 = Reserved

-

RO

09, 42

6-4

P0030

IGBTs Temperature U

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

RO

09, 45

15-4

P0031

IGBTs Temperature V

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

RO

09, 45

15-4

P0032

IGBTs Temperature W

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

RO

09, 45

15-4

0-1

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

P0033

Rectifier Temperature

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

RO

09, 45

15-4

P0034

Internal Air Temp.

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

RO

09, 45

15-4

P0036

Fan Heatsink Speed

0 to 15000 rpm

-

RO

09

16-5

P0037

Motor Overload Status

0 to 100 %

-

RO

09

16-5

P0038

Encoder Speed

0 to 65535 rpm

-

RO

09

16-6

P0039

Encoder Pulses Count

0 to 40000

0

RO

09

16-6

P0040

PID Process Variable

0.0 to 100.0 %

-

RO

09, 46

20-8

P0041

PID Setpoint Value

0.0 to 100.0 %

-

RO

09, 46

20-8

P0042

Time Powered

0 to 65535 h

-

RO

09

16-6

P0043

Time Enabled

0.0 to 6553.5 h

-

RO

09

16-7

P0044

kWh Output Energy

0 to 65535 kWh

-

RO

09

16-7

P0045

Fan Enabled Time

0 to 65535 h

-

RO

09

16-7

P0048

Present Alarm

0 to 999

-

RO

09

16-8

P0049

Present Fault

0 to 999

-

RO

09

16-8

P0050

Last Fault

0 to 999

-

RO

08

16-8

P0051

Last Fault Day/Month

00/00 to 31/12

-

RO

08

16-9

P0052

Last Fault Year

00 to 99

-

RO

08

16-10

P0053

Last Fault Time

00:00 to 23:59

-

RO

08

16-10

P0054

Second Fault

0 to 999

-

RO

08

16-8

P0055

Second Flt. Day/Month

00/00 to 31/12

-

RO

08

16-9

P0056

Second Fault Year

00 to 99

-

RO

08

16-10

P0057

Second Fault Time

00:00 to 23:59

-

RO

08

16-10

P0058

Third Fault

0 to 999

-

RO

08

16-8

P0059

Third Fault Day/Month

00/00 to 31/12

-

RO

08

16-9

P0060

Third Fault Year

00 to 99

-

RO

08

16-10

P0061

Third Fault Time

00:00 to 23:59

-

RO

08

16-10

P0062

Fourth Fault

0 to 999

-

RO

08

16-8

P0063

Fourth Flt. Day/Month

00/00 to 31/12

-

RO

08

16-9

P0064

Fourth Fault Year

00 to 99

-

RO

08

16-10

P0065

Fourth Fault Time

00:00 to 23:59

-

RO

08

16-10

P0066

Fifth Fault

0 to 999

-

RO

08

16-8

P0067

Fifth Fault Day/Month

00/00 to 31/12

-

RO

08

16-9

P0068

Fifth Fault Year

00 to 99

-

RO

08

16-10

P0069

Fifth Fault Time

00:00 to 23:59

-

RO

08

16-10

P0070

Sixth Fault

0 to 999

-

RO

08

16-8

P0071

Sixth Fault Day/Month

00/00 to 31/12

-

RO

08

16-9

P0072

Sixth Fault Year

00 to 99

-

RO

08

16-10

P0073

Sixth Fault Time

00:00 to 23:59

-

RO

08

16-10

P0074

Seventh Fault

0 to 999

-

RO

08

16-8

P0075

Seventh Flt.Day/Month

00/00 to 31/12

-

RO

08

16-9

P0076

Seventh Fault Year

00 to 99

-

RO

08

16-10

P0077

Seventh Fault Time

00:00 to 23:59

-

RO

08

16-10

P0078

Eighth Fault

0 to 999

-

RO

08

16-8

P0079

Eighth Flt. Day/Month

00/00 to 31/12

-

RO

08

16-9

P0080

Eighth Fault Year

00 to 99

-

RO

08

16-10

P0081

Eighth Fault Time

00:00 to 23:59

-

RO

08

16-10

P0082

Ninth Fault

0 to 999

-

RO

08

16-9

P0083

Ninth Fault Day/Month

00/00 to 31/12

-

RO

08

16-9

0-2

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

P0084

Ninth Fault Year

00 to 99

-

RO

08

16-10

P0085

Ninth Fault Time

00:00 to 23:59

-

RO

08

16-10

P0086

Tenth Fault

0 to 999

-

RO

08

16-9

P0087

Tenth Fault Day/Month

00/00 to 31/12

-

RO

08

16-9

P0088

Tenth Fault Year

00 to 99

-

RO

08

16-10

P0089

Tenth Fault Time

00:00 to 23:59

-

RO

08

16-11

P0090

Current At Last Fault

0.0 to 4000.0 A

-

RO

08

16-11

P0091

DC Link At Last Fault

0 to 2000 V

-

RO

08

16-11

P0092

Speed At Last Fault

0 to 18000 rpm

-

RO

08

16-11

P0093

Reference Last Fault

0 to 18000 rpm

-

RO

08

16-12

P0094

Frequency Last Fault

0.0 to 300.0 Hz

-

RO

08

16-12

P0095

Motor Volt.Last Fault

0 to 2000 V

-

RO

08

16-12

P0096

DIx Status Last Fault

Bit 0 = DI1
Bit 1 = DI2
Bit 2 = DI3
Bit 3 = DI4
Bit 4 = DI5
Bit 5 = DI6
Bit 6 = DI7
Bit 7 = DI8

-

RO

08

16-12

P0097

DOx Status Last Fault

Bit 0 = DO1
Bit 1 = DO2
Bit 2 = DO3
Bit 3 = DO4
Bit 4 = DO5

-

RO

08

16-13

P0100

Acceleration Time

0.0 to 999.0 s

20.0 s

-

04, 20

12-1

P0101

Deceleration Time

0.0 to 999.0 s

20.0 s

-

04, 20

12-1

P0102

Acceleration Time 2

0.0 to 999.0 s

20.0 s

-

20

12-1

P0103

Deceleration Time 2

0.0 to 999.0 s

20.0 s

-

20

12-1

P0104

S Ramp

0 = Off
1 = 50%
2 = 100%

0 = Off

-

20

12-2

P0105

1st/2nd Ramp Select.

0 = 1st Ramp
1 = 2nd Ramp
2 = DIx
3 = Serial/USB
4 = Anybus-CC
5 = CANOpen/
DeviceNet
6 = SoftPLC
7 = PLC11

2 = DIx

CFG

20

12-3

P0120

Speed Ref. Backup

0 = Off
1 = On

1 = On

-

21

12-3

P0121

Keypad Reference

0 to 18000 rpm

90 rpm

-

21

12-4

P0122

JOG/JOG+ Reference

0 to 18000 rpm

150 (125) rpm

-

21

12-4

P0123

JOG- Reference

0 to 18000 rpm

150 (125) rpm

Vector

21

12-5

P0124

Multispeed Ref. 1

0 to 18000 rpm

90 (75) rpm

-

21, 36

12-7

P0125

Multispeed Ref. 2

0 to 18000 rpm

300 (250) rpm

-

21, 36

12-7

P0126

Multispeed Ref. 3

0 to 18000 rpm

600 (500) rpm

-

21, 36

12-7

P0127

Multispeed Ref. 4

0 to 18000 rpm

900 (750) rpm

-

21, 36

12-7

P0128

Multispeed Ref. 5

0 to 18000 rpm

1200 (1000) rpm

-

21, 36

12-7

P0129

Multispeed Ref. 6

0 to 18000 rpm

1500 (1250) rpm

-

21, 36

12-7

P0130

Multispeed Ref. 7

0 to 18000 rpm

1800 (1500) rpm

-

21, 36

12-7

P0131

Multispeed Ref. 8

0 to 18000 rpm

1650 (1375) rpm

-

21, 36

12-7

P0132

Max. Overspeed Level

0 to 100 %

10 %

CFG

22, 45

12-5

0-3

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

-

04, 22

12-6

P0133

Minimum Speed

0 to 18000 rpm

90 (75) rpm

P0134

Maximum Speed

0 to 18000 rpm

1800 (1500) rpm

-

04, 22

12-6

P0135

Max. Output Current

0.2 to 2xInom-HD

1.5xInom-HD

V/f and VVW

04, 26

9-7

P0136

Manual Torque Boost

0 to 9

1

V/f

04, 23

9-2

P0137

Autom. Torque Boost

0.00 to 1.00

0.00

V/f

23

9-2

P0138

Slip Compensation

-10.0 to 10.0 %

0.0 %

V/f

23

9-3

P0139

Output Current Filter

0.0 to 16.0 s

0.2 s

V/f and VVW

23, 25

9-4

P0140

Dwell Time At Start

0.0 to 10.0 s

0.0 s

V/f and VVW

23, 25

9-5

P0141

Dwell Speed At Start

0 to 300 rpm

90 rpm

V/f and VVW

23, 25

9-5

P0142

Max. Output Voltage

0.0 to 100.0 %

100.0 %

CFG and Adj

24

9-6

P0143

Interm.Output Voltage

0.0 to 100.0 %

50.0 %

CFG and Adj

24

9-6

P0144

3Hz Output Voltage

0.0 to 100.0 %

8.0 %

CFG and Adj

24

9-6

P0145

Field Weakening Speed

0 to 18000 rpm

1800 rpm

CFG and Adj

24

9-6

P0146

Intermediate Speed

0 to 18000 rpm

900 rpm

CFG and Adj

24

9-6

P0150

DC Regul. Type V/f

0 = Ramp Hold
1 = Ramp Accel.

0 = Ramp Hold

CFG, V/f
and VVW

27

9-12

P0151

DC Regul. Level V/f

339 to 400 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
809 to 1000 V
809 to 1000 V
924 to 1200 V
924 to 1200 V

400 V (P0296=0)
800 V (P0296=1)
800 V (P0296=2)
800 V (P0296=3)
800 V (P0296=4)
1000 V (P0296=5)
1000 V (P0296=6)
1000 V (P0296=7)
1200 V (P0296=8)

V/f and VVW

27

9-12

P0152

DC Link Regul. P Gain

0.00 to 9.99

1.50

V/f and VVW

27

9-13

P0153

Dyn. Braking Level

339 to 400 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
809 to 1000 V
809 to 1000 V
924 to 1200 V
924 to 1200 V

375 V (P0296=0)
618 V (P0296=1)
675 V (P0296=2)
748 V (P0296=3)
780 V (P0296=4)
893 V (P0296=5)
972 V (P0296=6)
972 V (P0296=7)
1174 V (P0296=8)

-

28

14-1

P0154

Dyn. Braking Resistor

0.0 to 500.0 ohm

0.0 ohm

-

28

14-2

P0155

Dyn. B. Resist. Power

0.02 to 650.00 kW

2.60 kW

-

28

14-3

P0156

Overl.Curr.100% Speed

0.1 to 1.5xInom-ND

1.05xInom-ND

-

45

15-4

P0157

Overl.Curr. 50% Speed

0.1 to 1.5xInom-ND

0.9xInom-ND

-

45

15-4

P0158

Overl.Curr. 5% Speed

0.1 to 1.5xInom-ND

0.5xInom-ND

-

45

15-5

P0159

Motor Thermal Class

0 = Class 5
1 = Class 10
2 = Class 15
3 = Class 20
4 = Class 25
5 = Class 30
6 = Class 35
7 = Class 40
8 = Class 45

1 = Class 10

CFG

45

15-6

P0160

Speed Regul. Optimiz.

0 = Normal
1 = Saturated

0 = Normal

CFG and
Vector

90

11-15

P0161

Speed Prop. Gain

0.0 to 63.9

7.4

Vector

90

11-16

P0162

Speed Integral Gain

0.000 to 9.999

0.023

Vector

90

11-16

P0163

LOC Reference Offset

-999 to 999

0

Vector

90

11-17

P0164

REM Reference Offset

-999 to 999

0

Vector

90

11-17

P0165

Speed Filter

0.012 to 1.000 s

0.012 s

Vector

90

11-17

0-4

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

0.00

Vector

90

11-17

P0166

Speed Diff. Gain

0.00 to 7.99

P0167

Current Prop. Gain

0.00 to 1.99

0.50

Vector

91

11-18

P0168

Current Integral Gain

0.000 to 1.999

0.010

Vector

91

11-18

P0169

Max. CW Torque Curr.

0.0 to 650.0 %

125.0 %

Vector

95

11-26

P0170

Max. CCW Torque Curr.

0.0 to 650.0 %

125.0 %

Vector

95

11-26

P0171

CW Torque Cur at Nmax

0.0 to 650.0 %

125.0 %

Vector

95

11-27

P0172

CCW TorqueCur at Nmax

0.0 to 650.0 %

125.0 %

Vector

95

11-27

P0173

Max Torque Curve Type

0 = Ramp
1 = Step

0 = Ramp

Vector

95

11-28

P0175

Flux Proport. Gain

0.0 to 31.9

2.0

Vector

92

11-18

P0176

Flux Integral Gain

0.000 to 9.999

0.020

Vector

92

11-19

P0178

Rated Flux

0 to 120 %

100 %

Vector

92

11-19

P0179

Maximum Flux

0 to 120 %

P0181

Magnetization Mode

0 = General Enable
1 = Run/Stop

P0182

Speed for I/F Activ.

0 to 90 rpm

P0183

Current in I/F Mode

0 to 9

P0184

DC Link Regul. Mode

0 = With losses
1 = Without losses
2 = Enab/Disab DIx

P0185

DC Link Regul. Level

339 to 400 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
809 to 1000 V
809 to 1000 V
924 to 1200 V
924 to 1200 V

P0186

DC Link Prop. Gain

P0187
P0188

120 %

Vector

92

11-19

0 = General
Enable

CFG and
Encoder

92

11-20

18 rpm

Sless

93

11-21

1

Sless

93

11-21

1 = Without losses

CFG and
Vector

96

11-28

400 V (P0296=0)
800 V (P0296=1)
800 V (P0296=2)
800 V (P0296=3)
800 V (P0296=4)
1000 V (P0296=5)
1000 V (P0296=6)
1000 V (P0296=7)
1200 V (P0296=8)

Vector

96

11-29

0.0 to 63.9

18.0

Vector

96

11-30

DC Link Integral Gain

0.000 to 9.999

0.002

Vector

96

11-30

Voltage Proport. Gain

0.000 to 7.999

0.200

Vector

92

11-20

P0189

Voltage Integral Gain

0.000 to 7.999

P0190

Max. Output Voltage

0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V

P0191

Encoder Zero Search

P0192

0.001

Vector

92

11-20

209 V (P0296=0)
361 V (P0296=1)
380 V (P0296=2)
418 V (P0296=3)
456 V (P0296=4)
499 V (P0296=5)
546 V (P0296=6)
570 V (P0296=7)
656 V (P0296=8)

Vector

92

11-20

0=Off
1=On

0=Off

-

12-22

Status Encoder Zero
Search

0=Off
1=Finished

0=Off

RO

12-22

P0193

Day of the Week

0 = Sunday
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday

P0194

Day

01 to 31

01

P0195

Month

01 to 12

01

P0196

Year

00 to 99

P0197

Hour

00 to 23

0 = Sunday

30

5-3

-

30

5-3

-

30

5-3

06

-

30

5-3

00

-

30

5-3

0-5

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

P0198

Minutes

00 to 59

00

-

30

5-3

P0199

Seconds

00 to 59

00

-

30

5-3

P0200

Password

0 = Off
1 = On
2 = Change Pass.

1 = On

-

30

5-4

P0201

Language

0 = Português
1 = English
2 = Español
3 = Deutsch

0 = Português

-

30

5-4

P0202

Type of Control

0 = V/f 60 Hz
1 = V/f 50 Hz
2 = V/f Adjustable
3 = Sensorless
4 = Encoder
5 = VVW

0 = V/f 60 Hz

CFG

05, 23, 24,
25, 90, 91,
92, 93, 94,
95, 96

9-5

P0203

Special Function Sel.

0 = None
1 = PID Regulator

0 = None

CFG

46

20-9

P0204

Load/Save Parameters

0 = Not Used
1 = Not Used
2 = Reset P0045
3 = Reset P0043
4 = Reset P0044
5 = Load 60Hz
6 = Load 50Hz
7 = Load User 1
8 = Load User 2
9 = Load User 3
10 = Save User 1
11 = Save User 2
12 = Save User 3

0 = Not Used

CFG

06

7-1

P0205

Read Parameter Sel. 1

0 = Not selected
1 = Speed Refer. #
2 = Motor Speed #
3 = MotorCurrent #
4 = DC Link Volt #
5 = Motor Freq. #
6 = MotorVoltage #
7 = Motor Torque #
8 = Output Power #
9 = Process Var. #
10 = Setpoint PID #
11 = Speed Refer. 12 = Motor Speed 13 = MotorCurrent 14 = DC Link Volt 15 = Motor Freq. 16 = MotorVoltage 17 = Motor Torque 18 = Output Power 19 = Process Var. 20 = Setpoint PID -

2 = Motor Speed #

-

30

5-4

P0206

Read Parameter Sel. 2

See options in P0205

3 = Motor Current #

-

30

5-4

P0207

Read Parameter Sel. 3

See options in P0205

5 = Motor Freq. #

-

30

5-4

P0208

Ref. Scale Factor

1 to 18000

1800 (1500)

-

30

5-5

P0209

Ref. Eng. Unit 1

32 to 127

114

-

30

5-6

P0210

Ref. Eng. Unit 2

32 to 127

112

-

30

5-6

P0211

Ref. Eng. Unit 3

32 to 127

109

-

30

5-6

P0212

Ref. Decimal Point

0 = wxyz
1 = wxy.z
2 = wx.yz
3 = w.xyz

0 = wxyz

-

30

5-5

P0213

Full Scale Read 1

0.0 to 200.0 %

100.0 %

CFG

30

5-7

P0214

Full Scale Read 2

0.0 to 200.0 %

100.0 %

CFG

30

5-7

P0215

Full Scale Read 3

0.0 to 200.0 %

100.0 %

CFG

30

5-7

P0216

HMI Display Contrast

0 to 37

27

-

30

5-7

0-6

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

P0217

Zero Speed Disable

0 = Off
1 = On

P0218

Zero Speed Dis. Out

0 = Ref. or Speed
1 = Reference

P0219

Zero Speed Time

0 to 999 s

P0220

LOC/REM Selection Src

0 = Always LOC
1 = Always REM
2 = LR Key LOC
3 = LR Key REM
4 = DIx
5 = Serial/USB LOC
6 = Serial/USB REM
7 = Anybus-CC LOC
8 = Anybus-CC REM
9 = CANop/DNet LOC
10 = CANop/DNet REM
11 = SoftPLC LOC
12 = SoftPLC REM
13 = PLC11 LOC
14 = PLC11 REM

P0221

LOC Reference Sel.

0 = Keypad
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = AI3
4 = AI4
5 = Sum AIs > 0
6 = Sum AIs
7 = E.P.
8 = Multispeed
9 = Serial/USB
10 = Anybus-CC
11 = CANop/DNet
12 = SoftPLC
13 = PLC11

P0222

REM Reference Sel.

See options in P0221

P0223

LOC FWD/REV Selection

0 = Always FWD
1 = Always REV
2 = FR Key FWD
3 = FR Key REV
4 = DIx
5 = Serial/USB FWD
6 = Serial/USB REV
7 = Anybus-CC FWD
8 = Anybus-CC REV
9 = CANop/DNet FWD
10 = CANop/DNet REV
11 = AI4 Polarity
12 = SoftPLC FWD
13 = SoftPLC REV
14 = AI2 Polarity
15 = PLC11 FWD
16 = PLC11 REV

P0224

LOC Run/Stop Sel.

P0225

P0226

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

0 = Off

CFG

35, 46

12-10

0 = Ref. or Speed

-

35, 46

12-10

0s

-

35, 46

12-11

2 = LR Key LOC

CFG

31, 32, 33,
110

13-28

0 = Keypad

CFG

31, 36, 37,
38, 110

13-28

1 = AI1

CFG

32, 36, 37,
38, 110

13-28

2 = FR Key FWD

CFG

31, 33, 110

13-29

0 = I,O Keys
1 = DIx
2 = Serial/USB
3 = Anybus-CC
4 = CANop/DNet
5 = SoftPLC
6 = PLC11

0 = I,O Keys

CFG

31, 33, 110

13-30

LOC JOG Selection

0 = Disable
1 = JOG Key
2 = DIx
3 = Serial/USB
4 = Anybus-CC
5 = CANop/DNet
6 = SoftPLC
7 = PLC11

1 = JOG Key

CFG

31, 110

13-30

REM FWD/REV Sel.

See options in P0223

4 = DIx

CFG

32, 33, 110

13-29

0-7

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

P0227

REM Run/Stop Sel.

See options in P0224

1 = DIx

CFG

32, 33, 110

13-30

P0228

REM JOG Selection

See options in P0225

2 = DIx

CFG

32, 110

13-30

P0229

Stop Mode Selection

0 = Ramp to Stop
1 = Coast to Stop
2 = Fast Stop

0 = Ramp to Stop

CFG

31, 32, 33,
34

13-30

P0230

Dead Zone (AIs)

0 = Off
1 = On

0 = Off

-

38

13-1

P0231

AI1 Signal Function

0 = Speed Ref.
1 = No Ramp Ref.
2 = Max.Torque Cur
3 = Process Var.
4 = PTC
5 = Not Used
6 = Not Used
7 = PLC Use

0 = Speed Ref.

CFG

38, 95

13-2

P0232

AI1 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

1.000

-

38, 95

13-3

P0233

AI1 Signal Type

0 = 0 to 10V/20mA
1 = 4 to 20 mA
2 = 10V/20mA to 0
3 = 20 to 4 mA

0 = 0 to
10V/20mA

CFG

38, 95

13-5

P0234

AI1 Offset

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0.00 %

-

38, 95

13-4

P0235

AI1 Filter

0.00 to 16.00 s

0.00 s

-

38, 95

13-4

P0236

AI2 Signal Function

See options in P0231

0 = Speed Ref.

CFG

38, 95

13-2

P0237

AI2 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

1.000

-

38, 95

13-3

P0238

AI2 Signal Type

0 = 0 to 10V/20mA
1 = 4 to 20 mA
2 = 10V/20mA to 0
3 = 20 to 4 mA
4 = -10 to +10V

0 = 0 to
10V/20mA

CFG

38, 95

13-5

P0239

AI2 Offset

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0.00 %

-

38, 95

13-4

P0240

AI2 Filter

0.00 to 16.00 s

P0241

AI3 Signal Function

0 = Speed Ref.
1 = No Ramp Ref.
2 = Max.Torque Cur
3 = Process Var.
4 = PTC
5 = Not Used
6 = Not Used
7 = PLC Use

P0242

AI3 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

P0243

AI3 Signal Type

P0244
P0245

0.00 s

-

38, 95

13-4

0 = Speed Ref.

CFG

38, 95

13-2

1.000

-

38, 95

13-4

0 = 0 to 10V/20mA
1 = 4 to 20 mA
2 = 10V/20mA to 0
3 = 20 to 4 mA

0 = 0 to
10V/20mA

CFG

38, 95

13-5

AI3 Offset

-100.00 to 100.00 %

0.00 %

-

38, 95

13-4

AI3 Filter

0.00 to 16.00 s

0.00 s

-

38, 95

13-4

P0246

AI4 Signal Function

0 = Speed Ref.
1 = No Ramp Ref.
2 = Max.Torque Cur
3 = Process Var.
4 = Not Used
5 = Not Used
6 = Not Used
7 = PLC Use

0 = Speed Ref.

CFG

38, 95

13-3

P0247

AI4 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

1.000

-

38, 95

13-4

P0248

AI4 Signal Type

0 = 0 to 10V/20mA
1 = 4 to 20 mA
2 = 10V/20mA to 0
3 = 20 to 4 mA
4 = -10 to +10 V

0 = 0 to
10V/20mA

CFG

38, 95

13-5

0-8

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

P0249

AI4 Offset

-100.00 to 100.00 %

P0250

AI4 Filter

0.00 to 16.00 s

P0251

AO1 Function

0 = Speed Ref.
1 = Total Ref.
2 = Real Speed
3 = Torque Cur.Ref
4 = Torque Current
5 = Output Current
6 = Process Var.
7 = Active Current
8 = Output Power
9 = PID Setpoint
10 = Torque Cur.> 0
11 = Motor Torque
12 = SoftPLC
13 = PTC
14 = Not Used
15 = Not Used
16 = Motor Ixt
17 = Encoder Speed
18 = P0696 Value
19 = P0697 Value
20 = P0698 Value
21 = P0699 Value
22 = PLC11
23 = Id* Current

P0252

AO1 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

P0253

AO1 Signal Type

P0254

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

0.00 %

-

38, 95

13-4

0.00 s

-

38, 95

13-4

2 = Real Speed

-

39

13-6

1.000

-

39

13-8

0 = 0 to 10V/20mA
1 = 4 to 20 mA
2 = 10V/20mA to 0
3 = 20 to 4 mA

0 = 0 to
10V/20mA

CFG

39

13-10

AO2 Function

See options in P0251

5 = Output Current

-

39

13-6

P0255

AO2 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

1.000

-

39

13-8

P0256

AO2 Signal Type

0 = 0 to 10V/20mA
1 = 4 to 20 mA
2 = 10V/20mA to 0
3 = 20 to 4 mA

0 = 0 to
10V/20mA

CFG

39

13-10

P0257

AO3 Function

0 = Speed Ref.
1 = Total Ref.
2 = Real Speed
3 = Torque Cur.Ref
4 = Torque Current
5 = Output Current
6 = Process Var.
7 = Active Current
8 = Output Power
9 = PID Setpoint
10 = Torque Cur.> 0
11 = Motor Torque
12 = SoftPLC
13 = Not Used
14 = Not Used
15 = Not Used
16 = Motor Ixt
17 = Encoder Speed
18 = P0696 Value
19 = P0697 Value
20 = P0698 Value
21 = P0699 Value
22 = Not Used
23 = Id* Current
24 to 71 = Exclusive
WEG Use

2 = Real Speed

-

39

13-7

P0258

AO3 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

1.000

-

39

13-8

0-9

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

4 = 0 to 10 V

CFG

39

13-10

5 = Output Current

-

39

13-7

1.000

-

39

13-8

P0259

AO3 Signal Type

0 = 0 to 20 mA
1 = 4 to 20 mA
2 = 20 to 0 mA
3 = 20 to 4 mA
4 = 0 to 10 V
5 = 10 to 0 V
6 = -10 to +10V

P0260

AO4 Function

See options in P0257

P0261

AO4 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

P0262

AO4 Signal Type

0 = 0 to 20 mA
1 = 4 to 20 mA
2 = 20 to 0 mA
3 = 20 to 4 mA
4 = 0 to 10 V
5 = 10 to 0 V
6 = -10 to +10V

4 = 0 to 10 V

CFG

39

13-10

P0263

DI1 Function

0 = Not Used
1 = Run/Stop
2 = General Enable
3 = Fast Stop
4 = FWD Run
5 = REV Run
6 = 3-Wire Start
7 = 3-Wire Stop
8 = FWD/REV
9 = LOC/REM
10 = JOG
11 = Increase EP
12 = Decrease EP
13 = Not Used
14 = Ramp 2
15 = Speed/Torque
16 = JOG+
17 = JOG18 = No Ext. Alarm
19 = No Ext. Fault
20 = Reset
21 = PLC Use
22 = Manual/Auto
23 = Not Used
24 = Disab.FlyStart
25 = DC Link Regul.
26 = Progr. Off
27 = Load User 1/2
28 = Load User 3
29 = DO2 Timer
30 = DO3 Timer
31 = Trace Function

1 = Run/Stop

CFG

20, 31, 32,
33, 34, 37,
40, 44, 46

13-12

P0264

DI2 Function

See options in P0263

8 = FWD/REV

CFG

20, 31, 32,
33, 34, 37,
40, 44, 46

13-12

P0265

DI3 Function

See options in P0263

0 = Not Used

CFG

20, 31, 32,
33, 34, 37,
40, 44, 45,
46

13-12

0-10

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

P0266

DI4 Function

0 = Not Used
1 = Run/Stop
2 = General Enable
3 = Fast Stop
4 = FWD Run
5 = REV Run
6 = 3-Wire Start
7 = 3-Wire Stop
8 = FWD/REV
9 = LOC/REM
10 = JOG
11 = Increase EP
12 = Decrease EP
13 = Multispeed
14 = Ramp 2
15 = Speed/Torque
16 = JOG+
17 = JOG18 = No Ext. Alarm
19 = No Ext. Fault
20 = Reset
21 = PLC Use
22 = Manual/Auto
23 = Not Used
24 = Disab.FlyStart
25 = DC Link Regul.
26 = Progr. Off
27 = Load User 1/2
28 = Load User 3
29 = DO2 Timer
30 = DO3 Timer
31 = Trace Function

0 = Not Used

CFG

20, 31, 32,
33, 34, 36,
37, 40, 44,
45, 46

13-12

P0267

DI5 Function

See options in P0266

10 = JOG

CFG

20, 31, 32,
33, 34, 36,
37, 40, 44,
45, 46

13-12

P0268

DI6 Function

See options in P0266

14 = Ramp 2

CFG

20, 31, 32,
33, 34, 36,
37, 40, 44,
45, 46

13-12

P0269

DI7 Function

See options in P0263

0 = Not Used

CFG

20, 31, 32,
33, 34, 37,
40, 44, 45,
46

13-12

0-11

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

P0270

DI8 Function

0 = Not Used
1 = Run/Stop
2 = General Enable
3 = Fast Stop
4 = FWD Run
5 = REV Run
6 = 3-Wire Start
7 = 3-Wire Stop
8 = FWD/REV
9 = LOC/REM
10 = JOG
11 = Increase EP
12 = Decrease EP
13 = Not Used
14 = Ramp 2
15 = Speed/Torque
16 = JOG+
17 = JOG18 = No Ext. Alarm
19 = No Ext. Fault
20 = Reset
21 = Not Used
22 = Manual/Auto
23 = Not Used
24 = Disab.FlyStart
25 = DC Link Regul.
26 = Parametriz.Off
27 = Load User 1/2
28 = Load User 3
29 = DO2 Timer
30 = DO3 Timer
31 = Trace Function

0 = Not Used

CFG

20, 31, 32,
33, 34, 37,
40, 44, 45,
46

13-12

P0275

DO1 Function (RL1)

0 = Not Used
1 = N* > Nx
2 = N > Nx
3 = N < Ny
4 = N = N*
5 = Zero Speed
6 = Is > Ix
7 = Is < Ix
8 = Torque > Tx
9 = Torque < Tx
10 = Remote
11 = Run
12 = Ready
13 = No Fault
14 = No F070
15 = No F071
16 = No F006/21/22
17 = No F051/54/57
18 = No F072
19 = 4-20mA OK
20 = P0695 Value
21 = Forward
22 = Proc. V. > PVx
23 = Proc. V. < PVy
24 = Ride-Through
25 = Pre-Charge OK
26 = Fault
27 = Time Enab > Hx
28 = SoftPLC
29 = Not Used
30 = N>Nx/Nt>Nx
31 = F > Fx (1)
32 = F > Fx (2)
33 = STO
34 = No F160
35 = No Alarm
36 = No Fault and No
Alarm
37 = PLC11

13 = No Fault

CFG

41

13-19

0-12

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

2 = N > Nx

CFG

41

13-19

P0276

DO2 Function (RL2)

0 = Not Used
1 = N* > Nx
2 = N > Nx
3 = N < Ny
4 = N = N*
5 = Zero Speed
6 = Is > Ix
7 = Is < Ix
8 = Torque > Tx
9 = Torque < Tx
10 = Remote
11 = Run
12 = Ready
13 = No Fault
14 = No F070
15 = No F071
16 = No F006/21/22
17 = No F051/54/57
18 = No F072
19 = 4-20mA OK
20 = P0695 Value
21 = Forward
22 = Proc. V. > PVx
23 = Proc. V. < PVy
24 = Ride-Through
25 = Pre-Charge OK
26 = Fault
27 = Time Enab > Hx
28 = SoftPLC
29 = Timer
30 = N>Nx/Nt>Nx
31 = F > Fx (1)
32 = F > Fx (2)
33 = STO
34 = No F160
35 = No Alarm
36 = No Fault and No
Alarm
37 = PLC11

P0277

DO3 Function (RL3)

See options in P0276

1 = N* > Nx

CFG

41

13-19

P0278

DO4 Function

0 = Not Used
1 = N* > Nx
2 = N > Nx
3 = N < Ny
4 = N = N*
5 = Zero Speed
6 = Is > Ix
7 = Is < Ix
8 = Torque > Tx
9 = Torque < Tx
10 = Remote
11 = Run
12 = Ready
13 = No Fault
14 = No F070
15 = No F071
16 = No F006/21/22
17 = No F051/54/57
18 = No F072
19 = 4-20mA OK
20 = P0695 Value
21 = Forward
22 = Proc. V. > PVx
23 = Proc. V. < PVy
24 = Ride-Through
25 = Pre-Charge OK
26 = Fault
27 = Time Enab > Hx
28 = SoftPLC
29 = Not Used
30 = N>Nx/N>Nx
31 = F > Fx (1)
32 = F > Fx (2)
33 = STO
34 = No F160
35 = No Alarm
36 = No Fault/Alarm
37 = Not Used

0 = Not Used

CFG

41

13-19

0-13

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

0 = Not Used

CFG

41

13-19

P0279

DO5 Function

See options in P0278

P0281

Fx Frequency

0.0 to 300.0 Hz

4.0 Hz

-

41

13-25

P0282

Fx Hysteresis

0.0 to 15.0 Hz

2.0 Hz

-

41

13-25

P0283

DO2 ON Time

0.0 to 300.0 s

0.0 s

-

41

13-25

P0284

DO2 OFF Time

0.0 to 300.0 s

0.0 s

-

41

13-25

P0285

DO3 ON Time

0.0 to 300.0 s

0.0 s

-

41

13-25

P0286

DO3 OFF Time

0.0 to 300.0 s

0.0 s

-

41

13-25

P0287

Nx/Ny Hysteresis

0 to 900 rpm

18 (15) rpm

-

41

13-26

P0288

Nx Speed

0 to 18000 rpm

120 (100) rpm

-

41

13-26

P0289

Ny Speed

0 to 18000 rpm

1800 (1500) rpm

-

41

13-26

P0290

Ix Current

0 to 2xInom-ND

1.0xInom-ND

-

41

13-26

P0291

Zero Speed Zone

0 to 18000 rpm

18 (15) rpm

-

35, 41, 46

13-26

P0292

N = N* Band

0 to 18000 rpm

18 (15) rpm

-

41

13-27

P0293

Tx Torque

0 to 200 %

100 %

-

41

13-27

P0294

Hx Time

0 to 6553 h

4320 h

-

41

13-27

P0295

ND/HD VFD Rated Curr.

0 = 3.6A / 3.6A
1 = 5A / 5A
2 = 6A / 5A
3 = 7A / 5.5A
4 = 7A / 7A
5 = 10A / 8A
6 = 10A / 10A
7 = 13A / 11A
8 = 13.5A / 11A
9 = 16A / 13A
10 = 17A / 13.5A
11 = 24A / 19A
12 = 24A / 20A
13 = 28A / 24A
14 = 31A / 25A
15 = 33.5A / 28A
16 = 38A / 33A
17 = 45A / 36A
18 = 45A / 38A
19 = 54A / 45A
20 = 58.5A / 47A
21 = 70A / 56A
22 = 70.5A / 61A
23 = 86A / 70A
24 = 88A / 73A
25 = 105A / 86A
26 = 427A / 427A
27 = 470A / 470A
28 = 811A / 811A
29 = 893A / 893A
30 = 1216A / 1216A
31 = 1339A / 1339A
32 = 1622A / 1622A
33 = 1786A / 1786A
34 = 2028A / 2028A
35 = 2232A / 2232A
36 = 2A / 2A
37 = 527A / 527A
38 = 1000A / 1000A
39 = 1500A / 1500A
40 = 2000A / 2000A
41 = 2500A / 2500A
42 = 600A / 515A
43 = 1140A / 979A
44 = 1710A / 1468A
45 = 2280A / 1957A
46 = 2850A / 2446A
47 = 105A / 88 A
48 = 142A / 115A
49 = 180A / 142A
50 = 211A / 180A

-

RO

09, 42

6-6

0-14

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

According to
inverter model

CFG

42

6-7

2 = 5.0 kHz

CFG

42

6-7

0 = Normal Duty

CFG

42

6-8

P0296

Line Rated Voltage

0 = 200 - 240 V
1 = 380 V
2 = 400 - 415 V
3 = 440 - 460 V
4 = 480 V
5 = 500 - 525 V
6 = 550 - 575 V
7 = 600 V
8 = 660 - 690 V

P0297

Switching Frequency

0 = 1.25 kHz
1 = 2.5 kHz
2 = 5.0 kHz
3 = 10.0 kHz

P0298

Application

0 = Normal Duty
1 = Heavy Duty

P0299

DC-Braking Start Time

0.0 to 15.0 s

0.0 s

V/f, VVW
and Sless

47

12-18

P0300

DC-Braking Stop Time

0.0 to 15.0 s

0.0 s

V/f, VVW
and Sless

47

12-19

P0301

DC-Braking Speed

0 to 450 rpm

30 rpm

V/f, VVW
and Sless

47

12-20

P0302

DC-Braking Voltage

0.0 to 10.0 %

2.0 %

V/f and VVW

47

12-20

P0303

Skip Speed 1

0 to 18000 rpm

600 rpm

-

48

12-21

P0304

Skip Speed 2

0 to 18000 rpm

900 rpm

-

48

12-21

P0305

Skip Speed 3

0 to 18000 rpm

1200 rpm

-

48

12-21

P0306

Skip Band

0 to 750 rpm

0 rpm

-

48

12-21

P0308

Serial Address

1 to 247

1

CFG

113

17-1

P0310

Serial Baud Rate

0 = 9600 bits/s
1 = 19200 bits/s
2 = 38400 bits/s
3 = 57600 bits/s

0 = 9600 bits/s

CFG

113

17-1

P0311

Serial Bytes Config.

0 = 8 bits, no, 1
1 = 8 bits, even,1
2 = 8 bits, odd, 1
3 = 8 bits, no, 2
4 = 8 bits, even,2
5 = 8 bits, odd, 2

3 = 8 bits, no, 2

CFG

113

17-1

P0312

Serial Protocol

1 = TP
2 = Modbus RTU

2 = Modbus RTU

CFG

113

17-1

P0313

Comm. Error Action

0 = Off
1 = Ramp Stop
2 = General Disab.
3 = Go to LOC
4 = LOC Keep Enab.
5 = Cause Fault

0 = Off

-

111

17-3

P0314

Serial Watchdog

0.0 to 999.0 s

0.0 s

CFG

113

17-1

P0316

Serial Interf. Status

0 = Off
1 = On
2 = Watchdog Error

-

RO

09, 113

17-1

P0317

Oriented Start-up

0 = No
1 = Yes

0 = No

CFG

02

10-5

P0318

Copy Function MemCard

0 = Off
1 = VFD -> MemCard
2 = MemCard -> VFD

1 = VFD ->
MemCard

CFG

06

7-2

P0319

Copy Function HMI

0 = Off
1 = VFD -> HMI
2 = HMI -> VFD

0 = Off

CFG

06

7-3

0-15

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

0 = Off

CFG

44

12-11

P0320

FlyStart/Ride-Through

0 = Off
1 = Flying Start
2 = FS / RT
3 = Ride-Through

P0321

DC Link Power Loss

178 to 282 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
425 to 737 V
425 to 737 V
486 to 885 V
486 to 885 V

252 V (P0296=0)
436 V (P0296=1)
459 V (P0296=2)
505 V (P0296=3)
551 V (P0296=4)
602 V (P0296=5)
660 V (P0296=6)
689 V (P0296=7)
792 V (P0296=8)

Vector

44

12-16

P0322

DC Link Ride-Through

178 to 282 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
425 to 737 V
425 to 737 V
486 to 885 V
486 to 885 V

245 V (P0296=0)
423 V (P0296=1)
446 V (P0296=2)
490 V (P0296=3)
535 V (P0296=4)
585 V (P0296=5)
640 V (P0296=6)
668 V (P0296=7)
768 V (P0296=8)

Vector

44

12-16

P0323

DC Link Power Back

178 to 282 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
425 to 737 V
425 to 737 V
486 to 885 V
486 to 885 V

267 V (P0296=0)
462 V (P0296=1)
486 V (P0296=2)
535 V (P0296=3)
583 V (P0296=4)
638 V (P0296=5)
699 V (P0296=6)
729 V (P0296=7)
838 V (P0296=8)

Vector

44

12-17

P0325

Ride-Through P Gain

0.0 to 63.9

22.8

Vector

44

12-17

P0326

Ride-Through I Gain

0.000 to 9.999

0.128

Vector

44

12-17

P0327

F.S. Current Ramp I/f

0.000 to 1.000 s

0.070 s

Sless

44

12-12

P0328

Flying Start Filter

0.000 to 1.000 s

0.085 s

Sless

44

12-12

P0329

Frequency Ramp F.S.

2.0 to 50.0

6.0

Sless

44

12-12

P0331

Voltage Ramp

0.2 to 60.0 s

2.0 s

V/f and VVW

44

12-14

P0332

Dead Time

0.1 to 10.0 s

1.0 s

V/f and VVW

44

12-14

P0340

Auto-Reset Time

0 to 255 s

45

15-8

P0342

Motor Unbal.Curr.Conf

0 = Off
1 = On

0 = Off

CFG

45

15-9

P0343

Ground Fault Config.

0 = Off
1 = On

1 = On

CFG

45

15-9

P0344

Current Lim. Conf.

0 = Hold - FL ON
1 = Decel. - FL ON
2 = Hold - FL OFF
3 = Decel.- FL OFF

1 = Decel. - FL ON

CFG, V/f
and VVW

26

9-7

P0348

Motor Overload Conf.

0 = Off
1 = Fault/Alarm
2 = Fault
3 = Alarm

1 = Fault/Alarm

CFG

45

15-9

P0349

Ixt Alarm Level

70 to 100 %

85 %

CFG

45

15-10

P0350

IGBTs Overload Conf.

0 = F, w/ SF rd.
1 = F/A, w/ SF rd.
2 = F, no SF rd.
3 = F/A, no SF rd.

1 = F/A, w/ SF rd.

CFG

45

15-10

P0351

Motor Overtemp. Conf.

0 = Off
1 = Fault/Alarm
2 = Fault
3 = Alarm

1 = Fault/Alarm

CFG

45

15-11

0-16

0s

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

P0352

Fan Control Config.

0 = HS-OFF,Int-OFF
1 = HS-ON,Int-ON
2 = HS-CT,Int-CT
3 = HS-CT,Int-OFF
4 = HS-CT,Int-ON
5 = HS-ON,Int-OFF
6 = HS-ON,Int-CT
7 = HS-OFF,Int-ON
8 = HS-OFF,Int-CT

2 = HS-CT,Int-CT

CFG

45

15-12

P0353

IGBTs/Air Overtmp.Cfg

0 = HS-F/A,Air-F/A
1 = HS-F/A, Air-F
2 = HS-F, Air-F/A
3 = HS-F, Air-F

0 = HS-F/A,Air-F/A

CFG

45

15-13

P0354

Fan Speed Config.

0 = Off
1 = Fault

1 = Fault

CFG

45

15-13

P0356

Dead Time Compens.

0 = Off
1 = On

1 = On

CFG

45

15-13

P0357

Line Phase Loss Time

0 to 60 s

3s

-

45

15-14

P0359

Motor Current Stabil.

0 = Off
1 = On

0 = Off

V/f and VVW

45

15-14

P0372

DC-Braking Curr Sless

0.0 to 90.0 %

40.0 %

Sless

47

12-20

P0397

Slip Compens. Regen.

0 = Off
1 = On

1 = On

CFG and
VVW

25

10-3

P0398

Motor Service Factor

1.00 to 1.50

1.00

CFG

05, 43, 94

11-10

P0399

Motor Rated Eff.

50.0 to 99.9 %

67.0 %

CFG and
VVW

05, 43, 94

10-3

P0400

Motor Rated Voltage

0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V
0 to 690 V

220 V (P0296=0)
440 V (P0296=1)
440 V (P0296=2)
440 V (P0296=3)
440 V (P0296=4)
575 V (P0296=5)
575 V (P0296=6)
690 V (P0296=7)
690 V (P0296=8)

CFG

05, 43, 94

11-11

P0401

Motor Rated Current

0 to 1.3xInom-ND

1.0xInom-ND

CFG

05, 43, 94

11-11

P0402

Motor Rated Speed

0 to 18000 rpm

1750 (1458) rpm

CFG

05, 43, 94

11-11

P0403

Motor Rated Frequency

0 to 300 Hz

60 (50) Hz

CFG

05, 43, 94

11-12

0-17

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

P0404

Motor Rated Power

0 = 0.33hp 0.25kW
1 = 0.5hp 0.37kW
2 = 0.75hp 0.55kW
3 = 1hp 0.75kW
4 = 1.5hp 1.1kW
5 = 2hp 1.5kW
6 = 3hp 2.2kW
7 = 4hp 3kW
8 = 5hp 3.7kW
9 = 5.5hp 4kW
10 = 6hp 4.5kW
11 = 7.5hp 5.5kW
12 = 10hp 7.5kW
13 = 12.5hp 9kW
14 = 15hp 11kW
15 = 20hp 15kW
16 = 25hp 18.5kW
17 = 30hp 22kW
18 = 40hp 30kW
19 = 50hp 37kW
20 = 60hp 45kW
21 = 75hp 55kW
22 = 100hp 75kW
23 = 125hp 90kW
24 = 150hp 110kW
25 = 175hp 130kW
26 = 180hp 132kW
27 = 200hp 150kW
28 = 220hp 160kW
29 = 250hp 185kW
30 = 270hp 200kW
31 = 300hp 220kW
32 = 350hp 260kW
33 = 380hp 280kW
34 = 400hp 300kW
35 = 430hp 315kW
36 = 440hp 330kW
37 = 450hp 335kW
38 = 475hp 355kW
39 = 500hp 375kW
40 = 540hp 400kW
41 = 600hp 450kW
42 = 620hp 460kW
43 = 670hp 500kW
44 = 700hp 525kW
45 = 760hp 570kW
46 = 800hp 600kW
47 = 850hp 630kW
48 = 900hp 670kW
49 = 1000hp 736kW
50 = 1100hp 810kW
51 = 1250hp 920kW
52 = 1400hp 1030kW
53 = 1500hp 1110kW
54 = 1600hp 1180kW
55 = 1800hp 1330kW
56 = 2000hp 1480kW
57 = 2300hp 1700kW
58 = 2500hp 1840kW

P0405

Encoder Pulses Number

100 to 9999 ppr

P0406

Motor Ventilation

0 = Self-Vent.
1 = Separate Vent.
2 = Optimal Flux

P0407

Motor Rated Power Fac

0.50 to 0.99

0-18

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

Motormax-ND

CFG

05, 43, 94

11-12

1024 ppr

CFG

05, 43, 94

11-13

0 = Self-Vent.

CFG

05, 43, 94

11-14

0.68

CFG and
VVW

05, 43, 94

10-4

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

0 = No

CFG, VVW
and Vector

05, 43, 94

11-22

0.000 ohm

CFG, VVW
and Vector

05, 43, 94

11-23

P0408

Run Self-Tuning

0 = No
1 = No Rotation
2 = Run for Im
3 = Run for Tm
4 = Estimate Tm

P0409

Stator Resistance

0.000 to 9.999 ohm

P0410

Magnetization Current

0 to 1.25xInom-ND

Imag-ND

-

05, 43, 94

11-24

P0411

Leakage Inductance

0.00 to 99.99 mH

0.00 mH

CFG and
Vector

05, 43, 94

11-24

P0412

Tr Time Constant

0.000 to 9.999 s

0.000 s

Vector

05, 43, 94

11-25

P0413

Tm Time Constant

0.00 to 99.99 s

0.00 s

Vector

05, 43, 94

11-26

P0520

PID Proportional Gain

0.000 to 7.999

1.000

-

46

20-9

P0521

PID Integral Gain

0.000 to 7.999

0.043

-

46

20-9

P0522

PID Differential Gain

0.000 to 3.499

0.000

-

46

20-9

P0523

PID Ramp Time

0.0 to 999.0 s

3.0 s

-

46

20-10

P0524

PID Feedback Sel.

0 = AI1 (P0231)
1 = AI2 (P0236)
2 = AI3 (P0241)
3 = AI4 (P0246)

1 = AI2 (P0236)

CFG

38, 46

20-10

P0525

Keypad PID Setpoint

0.0 to 100.0 %

P0527

PID Action Type

0 = Direct
1 = Reverse

P0528

Proc. V. Scale Factor

P0529

0.0 %

-

46

20-11

0 = Direct

-

46

20-11

1 to 9999

1000

-

46

20-11

Proc.V. Decimal Point

0 = wxyz
1 = wxy.z
2 = wx.yz
3 = w.xyz

1 = wxy.z

-

46

20-12

P0530

Proc. V. Eng. Unit 1

32 to 127

37

-

46

20-12

P0531

Proc. V. Eng. Unit 2

32 to 127

32

-

46

20-12

P0532

Proc. V. Eng. Unit 3

32 to 127

32

-

46

20-13

P0533

PVx Value

0.0 to 100.0 %

90.0 %

-

46

20-13

P0534

PVy Value

0.0 to 100.0 %

10.0 %

-

46

20-13

P0535

Wake Up Band

0 to 100 %

P0536

P0525 Autom. Setting

0 = Off
1 = On

P0550

Trigger Signal Source

P0551

Trigger Level

0%

-

35, 46

20-13

1 = On

CFG

46

20-14

0 = Not selected
1 = Speed Refer.
2 = Motor Speed
3 = Motor Current
4 = DC Link Volt.
5 = Motor Freq.
6 = Motor Voltage
7 = Motor Torque
8 = Process Var.
9 = Setpoint PID
10 = AI1
11 = AI2
12 = AI3
13 = AI4

0 = Not selected

-

52

19-1

-100.0 to 340.0 %

0.0 %

-

52

19-1

0-19

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

5 = Fault

-

52

19-2

P0552

Trigger Condition

0 = P0550* = P0551
1 = P0550* <>P0551
2 = P0550* > P0551
3 = P0550* < P0551
4 = Alarm
5 = Fault
6 = DIx

P0553

Trace Sampling Period

1 to 65535

1

-

52

19-3

P0554

Trace Pre-Trigger

0 to 100 %

0%

-

52

19-3

P0559

Trace Max. Memory

0 to 100 %

0%

-

52

19-3

P0560

Trace Avail. Memory

0 to 100 %

-

RO

52

19-4

P0561

Trace Channel 1 (CH1)

0 = Not selected
1 = Speed Refer.
2 = Motor Speed
3 = Motor Current
4 = DC Link Volt.
5 = Motor Freq.
6 = Motor Voltage
7 = Motor Torque
8 = Process Var.
9 = Setpoint PID
10 = AI1
11 = AI2
12 = AI3
13 = AI4

1 = Speed Refer.

-

52

19-4

P0562

Trace Channel 2 (CH2)

See options in P0561

2 = Motor Speed

-

52

19-4

P0563

Trace Channel 3 (CH3)

See options in P0561

3 = Motor Current

-

52

19-4

P0564

Trace Channel 4 (CH4)

See options in P0561

0 = Not selected

-

52

19-4

P0571

Start Trace Function

0 = Off
1 = On

0 = Off

-

52

19-5

P0572

Trace Trig. Day/Month

00/00 to 31/12

-

RO

09, 52

19-5

P0573

Trace Trig. Year

00 to 99

-

RO

09, 52

19-5

P0574

Trace Trig. Time

00:00 to 23:59

-

RO

09, 52

19-5

P0575

Trace Trig. Seconds

00 to 59

-

RO

09, 52

19-5

P0576

Trace Function Status

0 = Off
1 = Waiting
2 = Trigger
3 = Concluded

-

RO

09, 52

19-6

P0680

Logical Status

Bit 0 to 4 = Not Used
Bit 5 = 2nd Ramp
Bit 6 = Config. Mode
Bit 7 = Alarm
Bit 8 = Running
Bit 9 = Enabled
Bit 10 = Forward
Bit 11 = JOG
Bit 12 = Remote
Bit 13 = Subvoltage
Bit 14 = Automatic(PID)
Bit 15 = Fault

-

RO

09, 111

17-3

P0681

Speed in 13 bits

-32768 to 32767

-

RO

09, 111

17-3

P0682

Serial/USB Control

Bit 0 = Ramp Enable
Bit 1 = General Enable
Bit 2 = Run Forward
Bit 3 = JOG Enable
Bit 4 = Remote
Bit 5 = 2nd Ramp
Bit 6 = Reserved
Bit 7 = Fault Reset
Bit 8 to 15 = Reserved

-

RO

09, 111

17-1

0-20

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

P0683

Serial/USB Speed Ref.

-32768 to 32767

-

RO

09, 111

17-1

P0684

CANopen/DNet Control

See options in P0682

-

RO

09, 111

17-1

P0685

CANop./DNet Speed Ref

-32768 to 32767

-

RO

09, 111

17-1

P0686

Anybus-CC Control

See options in P0682

-

RO

09, 111

17-2

P0687

Anybus-CC Speed Ref.

-32768 to 32767

-

RO

09, 111

17-2

P0692

Operation Mode Status

Bit 0 = Orient.Startup
Bit 1 = Not Used
Bit 2 = Self Tuning
Bit 3 = AutoGuided
P318
Bit 4 = Copy Function
Bit 5 = Copying MMF
Bit 6 = Reprogram.Inv.
Bit 7 = Aux Supply 24V
Bit 8 = Incomp. Param.
Bit 9 to 15 = Incomp.
Code

-

RO

09, 111

17-3

P0693

Operation Mode
Command

Bit 0 = Abort Startup
Bit 1 = Not Used
Bit 2 = Abort SelfTun.
Bit 3 = Abort P0318
Bit 4 = Reserved
Bit 5 = Abort MMF
Copy
Bit 6 and 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = Update Depend.
Bit 9 to 15 = Reserved

-

RO

09, 111

17-3

P0695

DOx Value

Bit 0 = DO1
Bit 1 = DO2
Bit 2 = DO3
Bit 3 = DO4
Bit 4 = DO5

-

RO

09, 111

17-3

P0696

AOx Value 1

-32768 to 32767

-

RO

09, 111

17-3

P0697

AOx Value 2

-32768 to 32767

-

RO

09, 111

17-3

P0698

AOx Value 3

-32768 to 32767

-

RO

09, 111

17-3

P0699

AOx Value 4

-32768 to 32767

-

RO

09, 111

17-4

P0700

CAN Protocol

1 = CANopen
2 = DeviceNet

1 = CANopen

CFG

112

17-1

P0701

CAN Address

0 to 127

63

CFG

112

17-1

P0702

CAN Baud Rate

0 = 1 Mbit/s
1 = Reserved
2 = 500 Kbit/s
3 = 250 Kbit/s
4 = 125 Kbit/s
5 = 100 Kbit/s
6 = 50 Kbit/s
7 = 20 Kbit/s
8 = 10 Kbit/s

0 = 1 Mbit/s

CFG

112

17-1

P0703

Bus Off Reset

0 = Manual
1 = Automatic

1 = Automatic

CFG

112

17-1

P0705

CAN Controller Status

0 = Disabled
1 = Auto-baud
2 = CAN Enabled
3 = Warning
4 = Error Passive
5 = Bus Off
6 = No Bus Power

-

RO

09, 112

17-1

P0706

RX CAN Telegrams

0 to 65535

-

RO

09, 112

17-1

P0707

TX CAN Telegrams

0 to 65535

-

RO

09, 112

17-2

P0708

Bus Off Counter

0 to 65535

-

RO

09, 112

17-2

0-21

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

-

RO

09, 112

17-2

0 = ODVA
Basic 2W

-

112

17-2

P0709

CAN Lost Messages

0 to 65535

P0710

DNet I/O instances

0 = ODVA Basic 2W
1 = ODVA Extend 2W
2 = Manuf.Spec. 2W
3 = Manuf.Spec. 3W
4 = Manuf.Spec. 4W
5 = Manuf.Spec. 5W
6 = Manuf.Spec. 6W

P0711

DNet Read Word #3

-1 to 1499

-1

-

112

17-2

P0712

DNet Read Word #4

-1 to 1499

-1

-

112

17-2

P0713

DNet Read Word #5

-1 to 1499

-1

-

112

17-2

P0714

DNet Read Word #6

-1 to 1499

-1

-

112

17-2

P0715

DNet Write Word #3

-1 to 1499

-1

-

112

17-2

P0716

DNet Write Word #4

-1 to 1499

-1

-

112

17-2

P0717

DNet Write Word #5

-1 to 1499

-1

-

112

17-2

P0718

DNet Write Word #6

-1 to 1499

-1

-

112

17-2

P0719

DNet Network Status

0 = Offline
1 = OnLine,NotConn
2 = OnLine,Conn
3 = Conn.Timed-out
4 = Link Failure
5 = Auto-Baud

-

RO

09, 112

17-2

P0720

DNet Master Status

0 = Run
1 = Idle

-

RO

09, 112

17-2

P0721

CANopen Comm. Status

0 = Disabled
1 = Reserved
2 = Comm. Enabled
3 = ErrorCtrl.Enab
4 = Guarding Error
5 = HeartbeatError

-

RO

09, 112

17-2

P0722

CANopen Node State

0 = Disabled
1 = Initialization
2 = Stopped
3 = Operational
4 = PreOperational

-

RO

09, 112

17-2

P0723

Anybus Identification

0 = Disabled
1 = RS232
2 = RS422
3 = USB
4 = Serial Server
5 = Bluetooth
6 = Zigbee
7 = Reserved
8 = Reserved
9 = Reserved
10 = RS485
11 = Reserved
12 = Reserved
13 = Reserved
14 = Reserved
15 = Reserved
16 = Profibus DP
17 = DeviceNet
18 = CANopen
19 = EtherNet/IP
20 = CC-Link
21 = Modbus-TCP
22 = Modbus-RTU
23 = Profinet IO
24 = Reserved
25 = Reserved

-

RO

09, 114

17-2

0-22

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

P0724

Anybus Comm. Status

0 = Disabled
1 = Not Supported
2 = Access Error
3 = Offline
4 = Online

-

RO

09, 114

17-2

P0725

Anybus Address

0 to 255

0

CFG

114

17-2

P0726

Anybus Baud Rate

0 to 3

0

CFG

114

17-2

P0727

Anybus I/O Words

2 = 2 Words
3 = 3 Words
4 = 4 Words
5 = 5 Words
6 = 6 Words
7 = 7 Words
8 = 8 Words
9 = PLC11 Board

2 = 2 Words

CFG

114

17-3

P0728

Anybus Read Word #3

0 to 1499

0

CFG

114

17-3

P0729

Anybus Read Word #4

0 to 1499

0

CFG

114

17-3

P0730

Anybus Read Word #5

0 to 1499

0

CFG

114

17-3

P0731

Anybus Read Word #6

0 to 1499

0

CFG

114

17-3

P0732

Anybus Read Word #7

0 to 1499

0

CFG

114

17-3

P0733

Anybus Read Word #8

0 to 1499

0

CFG

114

17-3

P0734

Anybus Write Word #3

0 to 1499

0

CFG

114

17-3

P0735

Anybus Write Word #4

0 to 1499

0

CFG

114

17-3

P0736

Anybus Write Word #5

0 to 1499

0

CFG

114

17-3

P0737

Anybus Write Word #6

0 to 1499

0

CFG

114

17-3

P0738

Anybus Write Word #7

0 to 1499

0

CFG

114

17-3

P0739

Anybus Write Word #8

0 to 1499

0

CFG

114

17-3

P0740

Profibus Comm. Status

0 = Disabled
1 = Not Supported
2 = Access Error
3 = Offline
4 = Online

-

RO

09, 115

-

P0800

Phase U Book 1 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-13

P0801

Phase V Book 1 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-13

P0802

Phase W Book 1 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-13

P0803

Phase U Book 2 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-13

P0804

Phase V Book 2 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-14

P0805

Phase W Book 2 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-14

P0806

Phase U Book 3 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-14

P0807

Phase V Book 3 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-14

P0808

Phase W Book 3 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-14

P0809

Phase U Book 4 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-14

P0810

Phase V Book 4 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-14

P0811

Phase W Book 4 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-14

0-23

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

P0812

Phase U Book 5 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-14

P0813

Phase V Book 5 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-14

P0814

Phase W Book 5 Temper

-20.0 to 150.0 °C

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 45

16-14

P0832

DIM1 Function

0 = Not Used
1 = Extern Fault
2 = Refrig. Fault
3 = Overtemp. Brk
4 = Overtemp. Ret.
5 = High Temp. Ret

0 = Not Used

CFW-11M

45, 40

15-15

P0833

DIM2 Function

See options in P0832

0 = Not Used

CFW-11M

45, 40

15-15

P0834

DIM1 DIM2 Status

Bit 0 = DIM1
Bit 1 = DIM2

-

CFW-11M
and RO

09, 40

16-14

P1000

SoftPLC Status

0 = No Application
1 = Install. App.
2 = Incompat. App.
3 = App. Stopped
4 = App. Running

0 = No Application

RO

09, 50

18-1

P1001

SoftPLC Command

0 = Stop Program
1 = Run Program
2 = Delete Program

0 = Stop Program

CFG

50

18-1

P1002

Scan Cycle Time

0 to 65535 ms

-

RO

09, 50

18-1

P1010

SoftPLC Parameter 1

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1011

SoftPLC Parameter 2

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1012

SoftPLC Parameter 3

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1013

SoftPLC Parameter 4

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1014

SoftPLC Parameter 5

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1015

SoftPLC Parameter 6

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1016

SoftPLC Parameter 7

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1017

SoftPLC Parameter 8

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1018

SoftPLC Parameter 9

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1019

SoftPLC Parameter 10

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1020

SoftPLC Parameter 11

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1021

SoftPLC Parameter 12

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1022

SoftPLC Parameter 13

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1023

SoftPLC Parameter 14

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1024

SoftPLC Parameter 15

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1025

SoftPLC Parameter 16

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1026

SoftPLC Parameter 17

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1027

SoftPLC Parameter 18

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1028

SoftPLC Parameter 19

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1029

SoftPLC Parameter 20

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1030

SoftPLC Parameter 21

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1031

SoftPLC Parameter 22

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1032

SoftPLC Parameter 23

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1033

SoftPLC Parameter 24

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1034

SoftPLC Parameter 25

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1035

SoftPLC Parameter 26

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1036

SoftPLC Parameter 27

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1037

SoftPLC Parameter 28

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1038

SoftPLC Parameter 29

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

0-24

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Parameter

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory Setting

User
Setting

Proprieties

Groups

Pag.

P1039

SoftPLC Parameter 30

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1040

SoftPLC Parameter 31

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1041

SoftPLC Parameter 32

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1042

SoftPLC Parameter 33

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1043

SoftPLC Parameter 34

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1044

SoftPLC Parameter 35

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1045

SoftPLC Parameter 36

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1046

SoftPLC Parameter 37

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1047

SoftPLC Parameter 38

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1048

SoftPLC Parameter 39

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

P1049

SoftPLC Parameter 40

-32768 to 32767

0

CFG

50

18-1

Notes:
RO = Read only parameter
rw = Read/write parameter
CFG = Configuration parameter, value can be programmed only with motor stopped
V/f = Available when V/f control mode is chosen
Adj = Available when adjustable V/f control mode is chosen
VVW = Available when VVW control mode is chosen
Vector = Available when a vector control mode is chosen
Sless = Available when sensorless control mode is chosen
Encoder = Available when vector control with encoder is chosen
CFW-11M = Available for Modular Drive models

0-25

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Fault/Alarm
F006:
Imbalance or
Input Phase Loss

Description
Mains voltage imbalance too high or phase missing
in the input power supply.
Note:
- If the motor is unloaded or operating with reduced
load this fault may not occur.
- Fault delay is set at parameter P0357.
P0357=0 disables the fault.

A010:
Rectifier High
Temperature

A high temperature alarm was detected by the NTC
Surrounding air temperature is too high (>50 °C (122 °F))
temperature sensors located in the rectifier modules.
and output current is too high.
Note (CFW-11):
Blocked or defective fan.
- This is valid only for the following models:
Inverter heatsink is completely covered with dust.
CFW110086T2, CFW110105T2, CFW110045T4, Note (CFW-11M):
CFW110058T4, CFW110070T4 and
Overtemperature (rectifier/braking).
CFW110088T4.
Failure in the connection between the digital input and
- It may be disabled by setting P0353=2 or 3.
the sensor.
Note (CFW-11M):
Failure of the corresponding sensor.
These faults/alarms are associated to the configuraFailure in the device being monitored by the sensor.
tion of the parameters P0832 and P0833.
- Function of the DIM 1 input.
- Function of the DIM 2 input.
An overtemperature fault was detected by the NTC
Surrounding air temperature is too high (>50 °C (122 °F))
temperature sensors located in the rectifier modules.
and output current is too high.
Note:
Blocked or defective fan.
- This is valid only for the following models:
Inverter heatsink is completely covered with dust.
CFW110086T2, CFW110105T2, CFW110045T4,
CFW110058T4, CFW110070T4 and
CFW110088T4.

F011:
Rectifier
Overtemperature

Possible Causes
Phase missing at the inverter's input power supply.
Input voltage imbalance >5 %.

F021:
DC Bus Undervoltage

DC bus undervoltage condition occurred.

The input voltage is too low and the DC bus voltage
dropped below the minimum permitted value (monitor the
value at Parameter P0004):
Ud < 223 V - For a 200-240 V three-phase input voltage
Ud < 170 V - For a 200-240 V single-phase input
voltage (models CFW11MXXXXS2 or CFW11MXXXXB2)
(P0296=0);
Ud < 385 V - For a 380 V input voltage (P0296=1);
Ud < 405 V - For a 400-415 V input voltage
(P0296=2);
Ud < 446 V - For a 440-460 V input voltage
(P0296=3);
Ud < 487 V - For a 480 V input voltage (P0296=4).
Phase loss in the input power supply.
Pre-charge circuit failure.
Parameter P0296 was set to a value above of the power
supply rated voltage.

F022:
DC Bus Overvoltage

DC bus overvoltage condition occurred.

The input voltage is too high and the DC bus voltage
surpassed the maximum permitted value:
Ud > 400 V - For 220-230 V input models (P0296=0);
Ud > 800 V - For 380-480 V input models (P0296=1,
2, 3, or 4).
Inertia of the driven-load is too high or deceleration time
is too short.
Wrong settings for parameters P0151, or P0153, or P0185.

F030(*):
Power Module U Fault

Desaturation of IGBT occured in Power Module U.
Note:
This protection is available only for frame D models.

Short-circuit between motor phases U and V or U and W. (2)

F034(*):
Power Module V Fault

Desaturation of IGBT occured in Power Module V.
Note:
This protection is available only for frame D models.
Desaturation of IGBT occured in Power Module W.
Note:
This protection is available only for frame D models.
Desaturation of Dynamic Braking IGBT occured.
Note:
This protection is available only for frame D models.

Short-circuit between motor phases V and U or V and W. (2)

F038(*):
Power Module W Fault
F042:
DB IGBT Fault

Short-circuit between motor phases W and U or W and V. (2)

Short-circuit between the connection cables of the
dynamic braking resistor.

(*) In the case of the modular drive, the book where the fault has occurred is not indicated on the HMI. Therefore, it is necessary to verify the
indication LEDs on the IPS1 board (refer to note (2)).

0-26

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Fault/Alarm

Description

Possible Causes

A046:
High Load on Motor

Load is too high for the used motor.
Note:
It may be disabled by setting P0348=0 or 2.

Settings of P0156, P0157, and P0158 are too low for the
used motor.
Motor shaft load is excessive.

A047:
IGBT Overload Alarm

An IGBT overload alarm occurred.
Note:
It may be disabled by setting P0350=0 or 2.

Inverter output current is too high.

F048:
IGBT Overload Fault

An IGBT overload fault occurred.
Note:
It may be disabled by setting P0350=0 or 2.

Inverter output current is too high.

A050:
A high temperature alarm was detected by the NTC
IGBT High Temperature U temperature sensors located on the IGBTs.
Note:
It may be disabled by setting P0353=2 or 3.

Surrounding air temperature is too high (>50 °C (122 °F))
and output current is too high.
Blocked or defective fan.
Inverter heatsink is completely covered with dust.

F051:
IGBT Overtemperature U

A high temperature fault was detected by the NTC
temperature sensors located on the IGBTs.

A053:
High Temperature on
IGBTs V

Alarm of high temperature measured at the
temperature sensors (NTC) of the IGBTs.
Note:
It can be disabled by setting P0353 = 2 or 3.

F054:
Overtemperature on
IGBTs V

Fault of overtemperature measured at the
temperature sensors (NTC) of the IGBTs.

A056:
High Temperature on
IGBTs W

Alarm of high temperature measured at the
temperature sensors (NTC) of the IGBTs.
Note:
It can be disabled by setting P0353 = 2 or 3.

F057:
Overtemperature on
IGBTs W

Fault of overtemperature measured at the
temperature sensors (NTC) of the IGBTs.

F067:
Incorrect Encoder/
Motor Wiring

Fault related to the phase relation of the encoder
signals.
Note:
- This fault can only happen during the self-tuning
routine.
- It is not possible to reset this fault.
- In this case, turn off the power supply, solve the
problem, and then turn it on again.

Output motor cables U, V, W are inverted.
Encoder channels A and B are inverted.
Encoder was not properly mounted.

F070:
Overcurrent /
Short-circuit

Overcurrent or short-circuit detected at the output,
in the DC bus, or at the braking resistor.
Note:
It is available only for models of frames A, B, and C.

Short-circuit between two motor phases.
Short-circuit between the connection cables of the
dynamic braking resistor.
IGBT modules are shorted.

F071:
Output Overcurrent

The inverter output current was too high for too long.

Excessive load inertia or acceleration time too short.
Settings of P0135, P0169, P0170, P0171, and P0172
are too high.

F072:
Motor Overload

The motor overload protection operated.
Note:
It may be disabled by setting P0348=0 or 3.

Settings of P0156, P0157, and P0158 are too low for the
used motor.
Motor shaft load is excessive.

F074:
Ground Fault

A ground fault occured either in the cable between
the inverter and the motor or in the motor itself.
Note:
It may be disabled by setting P0343=0.

Shorted wiring in one or more of the output phases.
Motor cable capacitance is too large, resulting in current
peaks at the output. (1)

F076:
Motor Current
Imbalance

Fault of motor current unbalance.
Note:
It may be disabled by setting P0342=0.

Loose connection or broken wiring between the motor
and inverter connection.
Vector control with wrong orientation.
Vector control with encoder, encoder wiring or encoder
motor connection inverted.

F077:
DB Resistor Overload

The dynamic braking resistor overload protection
operated.

Excessive load inertia or desacceleration time too short.
Motor shaft load is excessive.
Wrong setttings for parameters P0154 and P0155.

F078:
Motor
Overtemperature

Fault related to the PTC temperature sensor installed
in the motor.
Note:
- It may be disabled by setting P0351=0 or 3.
- It is required to set the analog input / output to the
PTC function.

Excessive load at the motor shaft.
Excessive duty cycle (too many starts / stops per minute).
Surrounding air temperature too high.
Loose connection or short-circuit (resistance < 100 Ω) in
the wiring connected to the motor termistor.
Motor termistor is not installed.
Blocked motor shaft.

High ambient temperature around the inverter (>50 °C)
and high output current.
Blocked or defective fan.
Very dirty heatsink.

High ambient temperature around the inverter (>50 °C)
and high output current.
Blocked or defective fan.
Very dirty heatsink.

0-27

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Fault/Alarm

Description

Possible Causes

F079:
Encoder Signal Fault

Lack of encoder signals.

Broken wiring between motor encoder and option kit for
encoder interface.
Defective encoder.

F080:
CPU Watchdog

Microcontroller watchdog fault.

Electrical noise.

F082:
Copy Function Fault

Fault while copying parameters.

An attempt to copy the keypad parameters to an inverter
with a different firmware version.

F084:
Auto-diagnosis Fault

Auto-diagnosis fault.

Defect in the inverter internal circuitry.

A088:
Keypad Comm. Fault

Indicates a problem between the keypad and control
board communication.

Loose keypad cable connection.
Electrical noise in the installation.

A090:
External Alarm

External alarm via digital input.
Note:
It is required to set a digital input to "No external
alarm".

Wiring was not connected to the digital input (DI1 to DI8)
set to “No external alarm”.

F091:
External Fault

External fault via digital input.
Note:
It is required to set a digital input to "No external
fault".

Wiring was not connected to the digital input (DI1 to DI8)
set to “No external fault”.

F099:
Invalid Current Offset

Current measurement circuit is measuring a wrong
value for null current.

Defect in the inverter internal circuitry.

A110:
High Motor
Temperature

Alarm related to the PTC temperature sensor installed
in the motor.
Note:
- It may be disabled by setting P0351=0 or 2.
- It is required to set the analog input / output to the
PTC function.

Excessive load at the motor shaft.
Excessive duty cycle (too many starts / stops per minute).
Surrounding air temperature too high.
Loose connection or short-circuit (resistance < 100 Ω) in
the wiring connected to the motor termistor.
Motor termistor is not installed.
Blocked motor shaft.

A128:
Timeout for Serial
Communication

Indicates that the inverter stopped receiving valid
messages within a certain time interval.
Note:
It may be disabled by setting P0314=0.0 s.

Check the wiring and grounding installation.
Make sure the inverter has sent a new message within the
time interval set at P0314.

A129:
Anybus is Offline

Alarm that indicates interruption of the Anybus-CC
communication.

PLC entered into the idle state.
Programming error. Master and slave set with a different
number of I/O words.
Communication with master has been lost (broken cable,
unplugged connector, etc.).

A130:
Anybus Access Error

Alarm that indicates an access error to the
Anybus-CC communication module.

Defective, unrecognized, or improperly installed Anybus-CC
module.
Conflict with a WEG option board.

A133:
CAN Not Powered

Alarm indicating that the power supply was not
connected to the CAN controller.

Broken or loose cable.
Power supply is off.

A134:
Bus Off

Inverter CAN interface has entered into the bus-off
state.

Incorrect communication baud-rate.
Two nodes configured with the same address in the network.
Wrong cable connection (inverted signals).

A135:
CANopen
Communication Error

Alarm that indicates a communication error.

Communication problems.
Wrong master configuration/settings.
Incorrect configuration of the communication objects.

A136:
Idle Master

Network master has entered into the idle state.

PLC in IDLE mode.
Bit of the PLC command register set to zero (0).

A137:
I/O connection timeout - DeviceNet communication
DNet Connection Timeout alarm.

One or more allocated I/O connections have entered
into the timeout state.

F150:
Motor Overspeed

Overspeed fault.
It is activated when the real speed exceeds the value
of P0134+P0132 for more than 20 ms.

Wrong settings of P0161 and/or P0162.
Problem with the hoist-type load.

F151:
FLASH Memory Module
Fault

FLASH Memory Module fault (MMF-01).

Defective FLASH memory module.
Check the connection of the FLASH memory module.

A152:
Internal Air High
Temperature

Alarm indicating that the internal air temperature is
too high.
Note:
It may be disabled by setting P0353=1 or 3.

0-28

Surrounding air temperature too high (>50 °C (122 °F))
and excessive output current.
Defective internal fan (if installed).
Note (CFW-11M):
High temperature inside the panel (>45 °C).

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Fault/Alarm

Description

Possible Causes

F153:
Internal Air
Overtemperature

Internal air overtemperature fault.

F156:
Undertemperature

Undertemperature fault (below -30 °C (-22 °F)) in
Surrounding air temperature ≤ -30 °C (-22 °F).
the IGBT or rectifier measured by the temperature
sensors.
Refer to the PLC11-01 Module Programming Manual

F161:
Timeout PLC11CFW-11

Surrounding air temperature too high (>50 °C (122 °F))
and excessive output current.
Defective internal fan (if installed).

A162:
Incompatible PLC
Firmware
A163
Break Detect AI1

It indicates that the AI1 current (4 20mA or 20-4mA)
reference is out of the 4 to 20mA range.

Broken AI1 cable;
Bad contact at the signal connection to the terminal strip

A164
Break Detect AI2

It indicates that the AI2 current (4 20mA or 20-4mA)
reference is out of the 4 to 20mA range.

		Broken AI2 cable;
		Bad contact at the signal connection to the terminal strip

A165
Break Detect AI3

It indicates that the AI3 current (4 20mA or 20-4mA)
reference is out of the 4 to 20mA range.

Broken AI3 cable;
Bad contact at the signal connection to the terminal strip

A166
Break Detect AI4

It indicates that the AI4 current (4 20mA or 20-4mA)
reference is out of the 4 to 20mA range.

Broken AI4 cable;
Bad contact at the signal connection to the terminal strip

A177:
Fan Replacement

Fan replacement alarm (P0045 > 50000 hours).
Note:
This function may be disabled by setting P0354=0.

Maximum number of operating hours for the heatsink fan
has been reached.

F179:
Heatsink Fan Speed Fault

This fault indicates a problem with the heatsink fan.
Note:
This function may be disabled by setting P0354=0.

Dust on fan blades and bearings.
Defective fan.

A181:
Invalid Clock Value

Invalid clock value alarm.

It is necessary to set date and time at parameters P0194
to P0199.
Keypad battery is discharged, defective, or not installed.

F182:
Pulse Feedback Fault

Indicates a fault on the output pulses feedback.

Defect in the inverter internal circuitry.

F183:
IGBT Overload +
Temperature

Overtemperature related to the IGBTs overload
protection.

Surrounding air temperature too high.
Operation with frequencies < 10 Hz under overload.

F185
Precharge Contac Fault

It indicates fault at the Pre charge Contactor

Pre-charge contactor defect

F228
Serial Communication
Timeout

Refer to the RS-232 / RS-485 Serial Communication Manual

F229
Anybus Offline

Refer to the Anybus-CC Communication Manual

F230
Anybus Access Error
F233
CAN Bus Power Failure

Refer to the CANopen Communication Manual and/or the DeviceNet Communication Manual

F234
Bus Off
F235
CANopen Communication
Error
F236
Master Idle

Refer to the CANopen Communication Manual

Refer to the DeviceNet Communication Manual

F237
DeviceNet Connect
Timeout
A300:
High temperature alarm measured with the
High temperature at IGBT temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 1 U phase
U B1
IGBT
F301:
Overtemperature at IGBT
U B1

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 1 U phase IGBT

High ambient temperature (>45°C) and high output
current.
Blocked or defective fan.
Fins of the book heatsink too dirty, impairing the air flow.

0-29

0

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Fault/Alarm

Description

Possible Causes

A303:
High temperature alarm measured with the
High Temperature at IGBT temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 1 V phase
V B1
IGBT
F304:
Overtemperature at IGBT
V B1

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 1 V phase IGBT

A306:
High Temperature at IGBT
W B1

High temperature alarm measured with the
temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 1 W phase
IGBT

F307:
Overtemperature at IGBT
W B1

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 1 W phase IGBT

A309:
High temperature alarm measured with the
High Temperature at IGBT temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 2 U phase
U B2
IGBT
F310:
Overtemperature at IGBT
U B2

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 2 U phase IGBT

A312:
High temperature alarm measured with the
High Temperature at IGBT temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 2 V phase
V B2
IGBT
F313:
Overtemperature at IGBT
V B2

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 2 V phase IGBT

A315:
High temperature alarm measured with the
High Temperature at IGBT temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 2 W phase
W B2
IGBT
F316:
Overtemperature at IGBT
W B2

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 2 W phase IGBT

A318:
High temperature alarm measured with the
High Temperature at IGBT temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 3 U phase
U B3
IGBT
F319:
Overtemperature at IGBT
U B3

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 3 U phase IGBT

A321:
High Temperature at IGBT
V B3

High temperature alarm measured with the
temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 3 V phase
IGBT

F322:
Overtemperature at IGBT
V B3

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 3 V phase IGBT

A324:
High temperature alarm measured with the
High Temperature at IGBT temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 3 W phase
W B3
IGBT
F325:
Overtemperature at IGBT
W B3

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 3 W phase IGBT

A327:
High temperature alarm measured with the
High Temperature at IGBT temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 4 U phase
U B4
IGBT
F328:
Overtemperature at IGBT
U B4

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 4 U phase IGBT

A330:
High Temperature at IGBT
V B4

High temperature alarm measured with the
temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 4 V phase
IGBT

F331:
Overtemperature at IGBT
V B4

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 4 V phase IGBT

A333:
High temperature alarm measured with the
High Temperature at IGBT temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 4 W phase
W B4
IGBT

0-30

High ambient temperature (>45°C) and high output
current.
Blocked or defective fan.
Fins of the book heatsink too dirty, impairing the air flow.

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Fault/Alarm

Description

F334:
Overtemperature at IGBT
W B4

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 4 W phase IGBT

A336:
High Temperature at IGBT
U B5

High temperature alarm measured with the
temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 5 U phase
IGBT

F337:
Overtemperature at IGBT
U B5

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 5 U phase IGBT

A339:
High Temperature at IGBT
V B5

High temperature alarm measured with the
temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 5 V phase
IGBT

F340:
Overtemperature at IGBT
V B5

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 5 V phase IGBT

Possible Causes

0

High ambient temperature (>45°C) and high output
current.
Blocked or defective fan.
Fins of the book heatsink too dirty, impairing the air flow.

A342:
High temperature alarm measured with the
High Temperature at IGBT temperature sensor (NTC) of the book 5 W phase
W B5
IGBT
F343:
Overtemperature at IGBT
W B5

Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature
sensor (NTC) of the book 5 W phase IGBT

A345:
High Load at IGBT U B1

Overload alarm at book 1 U phase IGBT

F346:
Overload at IGBT U B1

Overload fault at book 1 U phase IGBT

A348:
High Load at IGBT V B1

Overload alarm at book 1 V phase IGBT

F349:
Overload at IGBT V B1

Overload fault at book 1 V phase IGBT

A351:
High Load at IGBT W B1

Overload alarm at book 1 W phase IGBT

F352:
Overload at IGBT W B1

Overload fault at book 1 W phase IGBT

A354:
High Load at IGBT U B2

Overload alarm at book 2 U phase IGBT

F355:
Overload at IGBT U B2

Overload fault at book 2 U phase IGBT

A357:
High Load at IGBT V B2

Overload alarm at book 2 V phase IGBT

F358:
Overload at IGBT V B2

Overload fault at book 2 V phase IGBT

A360:
High Load at IGBT W B2

Overload alarm at book 2 W phase IGBT

F361:
Overload at IGBT W B2

Overload fault at book 2 W phase IGBT

A363:
High Load at IGBT U B3

Overload alarm at book 3 U phase IGBT

F364:
Overload at IGBT U B3

Overload fault at book 3 U phase IGBT

A366:
High Load at IGBT V B3

Overload alarm at book 3 V phase IGBT

F367:
Overload at IGBT V B3

Overload fault at book 3 V phase IGBT

A369:
High Load at IGBT W B3

Overload alarm at book 3 W phase IGBT

F370:
Overload at IGBT W B3

Overload fault at book 3 W phase IGBT

High current at the inverter output (see figure 8.1).

0-31

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Fault/Alarm

Description

A372:
High Load at IGBT U B4

Overload alarm at book 4 U phase IGBT

F373:
Overload at IGBT U B4

Overload fault at book 4 U phase IGBT

A375:
High Load at IGBT V B4

Overload alarm at book 4 V phase IGBT

F376:
Overload at IGBT V B4

Overload fault at book 4 V phase IGBT

A378:
High Load at IGBT W B4

Overload alarm at book 4 W phase IGBT

F379:
Overload at IGBT W B4

Overload fault at book 4 W phase IGBT

A381:
High Load at IGBT U B5

Overload alarm at book 5 U phase IGBT

F382:
Overload at IGBT U B5

Overload fault at book 5 U phase IGBT

A384:
High Load at IGBT V B5

Overload alarm at book 5 V phase IGBT

F385:
Overload at IGBT V B5

Overload fault at book 5 V phase IGBT

A387:
High Load at IGBT W B5

Overload alarm at book 5 W phase IGBT

F388:
Overload at IGBT W B5

Overload fault at book 5 W phase IGBT

A390:
Current Unbalance at
Phase U B1

Phase U book 1current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

A391:
Current Unbalance at
Phase V B1

Phase V book 1current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

A392:
Current Unbalance at
Phase W B1

Phase W book 1current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

A393:
Current Unbalance at
Phase U B2

Phase U book 2 current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

A394:
Current Unbalance at
Phase V B2

Phase V book 2 current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

A395:
Current Unbalance at
Phase W B2

Phase W book 2 current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

0-32

Possible Causes

High current at the inverter output (see figure 8.1).

Bad electric connection between the DC bus and the
power unit.
Bad electric connection between the power unit output
and the motor.
Note: In case of fast acceleration or braking, this alarm may
be indicated momentarily, disappearing after a few seconds.
This is not an indication of any anomaly in the inverter.
If this alarm persists when the motor is operating at a
constant speed, it is an indication of an anomaly in the
current distribution among the power units.

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

Fault/Alarm

Description

A396:
Current Unbalance at
Phase U B3

Phase U book 3 current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

A397:
Current Unbalance at
Phase V B3

Phase V book 3 current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

A398:
Current Unbalance at
Phase W B3

Phase W book 3 current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

A399:
Current Unbalance at
Phase U B4

Phase U book 4 current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

A400:
Current Unbalance at
Phase V B4

Phase V book 4 current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

A401:
Current Unbalance at
Phase W B4

Phase W book 4 current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

A402:
Current Unbalance at
Phase U B5

Phase U book 5 current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

A403:
Current Unbalance at
Phase V B5

Phase V book 5 current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

A404:
Current Unbalance at
Phase W B5

Phase W book 5 current unbalance alarm.
It indicates a 20 % unbalance in the current
distribution between this phase and the smallest
current of the same phase in other book, only when
the current in this phase is higher than 75 % of its
nominal value.

F406:
Overtemperature at the
Braking Module

These faults/alarms are associated to the
configuration of the parameters P0832 and P0833.
- Function of the DIM1 input.
- Function of the DIM2 input.

F408:
Failure in the Cooling
System
F410:
External Fault

Possible Causes

0

Bad electric connection between the DC bus and the
power unit.
Bad electric connection between the power unit output
and the motor.
Note: In case of fast acceleration or braking, this alarm may
be indicated momentarily, disappearing after a few seconds.
This is not an indication of any anomaly in the inverter.
If this alarm persists when the motor is operating at a
constant speed, it is an indication of an anomaly in the
current distribution among the power units.

Overtemperature (rectifier/braking).
Failure in the connection between the digital input and
the sensor.
Failure of the corresponding sensor.
Failure in the device being monitored by the sensor.

F412:
Overtemperature at the
Rectifier

0-33

Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms

0

Fault/Alarm
A700
Detached HMI

Description

Possible Causes

Refer to the SoftPLC Manual

F701
Detached HMI
A702
Inverter Disabled
A704
Two Movements Enabled
A706
Not Programmed
Reference SoftPLC

Note:
(1) Long motor cables (with more than 100 meters) will have a high leakage capacitance to the ground. The
circulation of leakage currents through these capacitances may activate the ground fault protection after
the inverter is enabled, and consequently, the occurrence of fault F074.
POSSIBLE SOLUTION:
- Decrease the carrier frequency (P0297).
(2) In case of F030 (Arm U Fault), F034 (Arm V Fault) and F038 (Arm W Fault) faults, there is an indication at
the IPS1 board that signalizes which of the power units is presenting the fault. The indication is done through
LEDs that remain on when the fault occurs. When a reset is performed, the LED that indicates the fault goes
off (refer to the figure 0.1).

Figure 0.1 - LEDs that indicates the fault

0-34

Safety Notices

Safety Notices
This Manual contains the information necessary for the correct use of the CFW-11 Frequency Inverter.
It has been developed to be used by qualified personnel with suitable training or technical qualification for
operating this type of equipment.

1.1 SAFETY NOTICES IN THIS MANUAL
The following safety notices are used in this manual:

DANGER!

The nonobservance of the procedures recommended in this warning can lead to death, serious
injuries or considerable material damage.

ATTENTION!

The nonobservance of the procedures recommended in this warning can lead to material damage.

NOTE!

The text intents to supply important information for the correct understanding and good operation
of the product.

1.2 SAFETY NOTICES ON THE PRODUCT
The following symbols are attached to the product, serving as safety notices:

High voltages are present.

Components sensitive to electrostatic discharge.
Do not touch them.
Mandatory connection to the protective earth (PE).

Connection of the shield to the ground.

Hot surface.

1-1

1

Safety Notices
1.3 PRELIMINARY RECOMMENDATIONS
DANGER!

Only qualified personnel familiar with the CFW-11 Frequency Inverter and associated equipment
should plan or implement the installation, start-up and subsequent maintenance of this equipment
These personnel must follow all the safety instructions included in this Manual and/or defined by
local regulations.
Failure to comply with these instructions may result in life threatening and/or equipment damage.

1

NOTE!

For the purposes of this manual, qualified personnel are those trained to be able to:
1. Install, ground, energize and operate the CFW-11 according to this manual and the effective
legal safety procedures;
2. Use protection equipment according to the established standards;
3. Give first aid services.

DANGER!

Always disconnect the input power before touching any electrical component associated to the
inverter.
Many components can remain charged with high voltages or remain in movement (fans) even after
that AC power is disconnected or switched off.
Wait at least 10 minutes to assure a total discharge of the capacitors.
Always connect the equipment frame to the protection earth (PE) at the suitable connection point.

ATTENTION!

Electronic boards have components sensitive to electrostatic discharges. Do not touch directly on
components or connectors. If necessary, touch the grounded metallic frame before or use an adequate
grounded wrist strap.

Do not perform any high pot tests with the inverter!
If it is necessary consult WEG.

NOTE!

Frequency Inverter may interfere with other electronic equipment. In order to reduce these effects,
take the precautions recommended in the chapter 3 - Installation and Connections, of the User
Manual.

NOTE!

Read the User Manual completely before installing or operating the inverter.

1-2

General Information

GENERAL INFORMATION
2.1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL
This manual presents the necessary information for the configuration of all of the functions and parameters of
the CFW-11 Frequency Inverter. This manual must be used together with the CFW-11 User Manual.
The text intents to supply additional information to facilitate the use and programming of the CFW-11 in
specific applications.

2.2 TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINITIONS

2

2.2.1 Terms and Definitions Used in the Manual
Normal Duty Cycle (ND): It is the inverter operation regimen that defines the maximum current value for
continuous operation I nom-ND and overload of 110 % during 1 minute. It is selected by programming P0298
(Application)=0 (Normal Duty – ND). It must be used for driving motors that are not subject in that application
to high torques in relation to their rated torque, when operating in permanent regimen, during start, acceleration
or deceleration.
I nom-ND: Inverter rated current for use with normal overload regimen (ND=Normal Duty).
Overload: 1.1 x I nom-ND / 1 minute.
Heavy Duty Cycle (HD): It is the inverter operation regimen that defines the maximum current value for
continuous operation I nom-HD and overload of 150 % during 1 minute. It is selected by programming P0298
(Application)=1 (Heavy Duty (HD)). It must be used for driving motors that are subject in that application to high
overload torques in relation to their rated torque, when operating in constant speed, during start, acceleration
or deceleration.
I nom-HD: Inverter rated current for use with heavy overload regimen (HD=Heavy Duty).
Overload: 1.5 x I nom-HD / 1 minute.
Rectifier: The input circuit of the inverters that converts the input AC voltage into DC. It is formed by power
diodes.
Pre-charge Circuit: It charges the DC Link capacitors with a limited current, thus avoiding current peaks when
powering the inverter.
DC Link: This is the inverter intermediate circuit, with DC voltage and current, obtained from the rectification
of the AC supply voltage, or from an external source; it supplies the output IGBTs inverter bridge.
U, V and W Arm: It is a set of two IGBTs of the phases U, V and W at the inverter output.
IGBT: “Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor”; It is the basic component of the output inverter bridge. It operates
like an electronic switch in the saturated (closed switch) and cut (open switch) modes.

2-1

General Information
Braking IGBT: Operates as a switch for the activation of the braking resistor. It is commanded by the DC Link
level.
PTC: It’s a resistor whose resistance value in ohms increases proportionally to the increase of the temperature;
it is used as a temperature sensor in motors.
NTC: It’s a resistor whose resistance value in ohms decreases proportionally to the temperature increase; it is
used as a temperature sensor in power modules.
Keypad (HMI): Human-Machine Interface; It is the device that allows the control of the motor, the visualization
and the modification of the inverter parameters. It presents keys for commanding the motor, navigation keys
and a graphic LCD display.

2

MMF (Flash Memory Module): It is the nonvolatile memory that can be electrically written and erased.
RAM Memory: Random Access Memory (volatile).
USB: “Universal Serial Bus”; it is a type of connection in the perspective of the “Plug and Play” concept.
PE: “Protective Earth”.
RFI Filter: “Radio Frequency Interference Filter”. It is a filter that avoids interference in the radiofrequency
range.
PWM: “Pulse Width Modulation”. It is a pulsing voltage that supplies the motor.
Switching Frequency: It is the inverter bridge IGBTs commutation frequency, specified normally in kHz.
General Enable: When activated, it accelerates the motor with the acceleration ramp provided Run/Stop=Run.
When deactivated, the PWM pulses are immediately blocked. It can be commanded through digital input
programmed for that function or via serial.
Run/Stop: Inverter function that when activated (Run) accelerates the motor with the acceleration ramp until
reaching the speed reference, and when deactivated (Stop) decelerates the motor with the deceleration ramp
down to stop. It can be commanded through digital input programmed for that function or via serial. The HMI
keys
and
work in a similar manner:
=Run,
=Stop.
Heatsink: It is a metal part designed for dissipating the heat generated by the power semiconductors.
Amp, A: Ampere.
°C: Degrees Celsius.
AC: Alternating Current.
DC: Direct Current.

2-2

General Information
CFM: “cubic feet per minute”; it is a flow measurement unit.
hp: “Horse Power”=746 Watts (power measurement unit, normally used to indicate the mechanical power of
electric motors).
Hz: Hertz.
l/s: liters per second.
kg: kilogram=1000 gram.
kHz: kilohertz=1000 Hz.

2

mA: milliamp=0.001 Amp.
min: minute.
ms: millisecond=0.001 second.
Nm: Newton meter; torque measurement unit.
rms: “Root mean square”; effective value.
rpm: revolutions per minute: speed measurement unit.
s: second.
V: volt.
Ω: ohm.

2.2.2 Numerical Representation
The decimal numbers are represented by means of digits without suffix. Hexadecimal numbers are represented
with the letter “h” after the number.

2.2.3 Symbols for the Parameter Proprieties Description
RO
Reading only parameter.
CFG Parameter that can be changed only with a stopped motor.
V/f
Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only in the V/f mode: P0202=0, 1 or 2.
Adj
Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only in the V/f adjustable mode: P0202=2.
Vector Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only in the vector modes with encoder or sensorless: P0202=3 or 4.
VVW Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only in the VVW mode: P0202=5.
Sless Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only in the vector sensorless mode: P0202=3.
Encoder Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only in the vector with encoder mode: P0202=4.
CFW-11M Parameter visible on the keypad (HMI) only when available in the Modular Drive.

2-3

General Information

2

2-4

About the CFW-11

ABOUT THE CFW-11
3.1 About the CFW-11
The CFW-11 is a high performance Frequency Inverter that makes it possible the control of speed and torque
of three-phase AC induction motors. The principal characteristic of this product is the “Vectrue” technology,
which presents the following advantages:
Scalar Control (V/f), VVW or vector control programmable in the same product;
The Vector control can be programmed as “sensorless” (which means that standard motors, without the
need of encoder) or vector control with motor encoder;
The “sensorless” vector control allows high torque and fast response, even at very slow speeds or during
starting;
The “Optimal Braking” function for the vector control allows a controlled motor braking, eliminating in some
applications the braking resistor;
The vector control “Self-Tuning” function allows the automatic setting of the regulators and control parameters,
from the identification (also automatic) of the motor and load parameters.

3-1

3

About the CFW-11

 = DC link connection
 = Dynamic braking resistor connection

Precharge

Power
Supply

Motor
Capacitor
Bank

Three-phase
rectifier

IGBT inverter
RFI filter

PE
DC LINK

3

PE
Feedbacks:
- voltage
- current

POWER
CONTROL
PC

SuperDrive G2 software
WLP software

USB

Power supplies for electronics and for interface
between power and control

Accessories
I/O Expansion
(Slot 1 – white)

HMI (remote)

HMIƒ

Digital Inputs
(DI1 to DI6)

CC11
Control
Board with
32-bit
“RISC”
CPU

Analog Inputs
(AI1 and AI2)

FLASH
Memory
Module
(Slot 5)
ƒ=Human-Machine Interface

Figure 3.1 - CFW-11 block diagram

3-2

Encoder Interface
(Slot 2 – yellow)
COMM 1
(Slot 3 – green)
COMM 2
(Anybus) (Slot 4)
Analog Outputs
(AO1 and AO2)
Digital Outputs
DO1(RL1) to
DO3 (RL3)

About the CFW-11

A – Mounting Supports
(for surface mounting)
B – Heatsink
C – Top cover
D – Fan with fixing support
E – COMM 2 module (Anybus)
F – Accessory board module
G – FLASH memory module
H – Front cover
I – Keypad (HMI)

3

Figure 3.2 - CFW-11 main components

1

USB connector

2

USB LED
Off: without USB connection
On/blinking: USB communication active

3

Status LED
Green: Normal operation without fault or alarm
Yellow: In the alarm condition
Blinking red: In the fault condition

Figure 3.3 - LEDs and USB connector

3-3

About the CFW-11

3

3-4

Keypad (HMI)
Keypad (HMI)
4.1 Keypad (HMI)
Through the keypad (HMI) it is possible to command the inverter, visualize and adjust all the parameters. It
presents a navigation manner similar to the one used in cell phones, with options to access the parameters
sequentially or by means of groups (menu).

"Left “Soft key”: Function defined by the text
directly above on the display.

Right “Soft key”: Function defined by the text
directly above on the display.

1. Increases the parameter contents.
2. Increases the speed.
3. Selects the previous group of the Parameter
Group list.

1. Decreases the parameter contents.
2. Decreases the speed.
3. Selects the next group of the Parameter
Group list.

Accelerates the motor following the acceleration
ramp.
Active when:
P0224=0 in LOC or
P0227=0 in REM.

Controls the motor speed direction.
Active when:
P0223=2 or 3 in LOC and /or
P0226=2 or 3 in REM.

Decelerates the motor following the deceleration
ramp, down to stop.
Active when:
P0224=0 in LOC or
P0227=0 in REM.

Selects between LOCAL or REMOTE
situation.
Active when:
P0220=2 or 3.

It accelerates the motor following the acceleration ramp up to
the speed defined in P0122.
It keeps the motor at this speed as long as pressed.
When released it decelerates the motor following the
deceleration ramp down to stop.
Active when al the conditions below were fulfilled:
1. Run/Stop=Stop
2. General Enable=Active
3. P0225=1 in LOC and/or P0228=1 in REM.

Figure 4.1 - HMI keys

Battery:
The battery located inside the keypad (HMI) is used to keep the clock operation while the inverter is not powered.
Its location is showed in the figure 4.2.
The life expectation of the battery is of approximately 10 years. In order to remove it rotate the cover located at
the back of the keypad (HMI). Replace the battery, when necessary, by another of the CR2032 type.

NOTE!

The battery is necessary only for clock-related functions. In the event of the battery being discharged
or not installed in the keypad (HMI), the clock time becomes incorrect and the alarm A181 – “Invalid
clock value” will be indicated every time the inverter is powered.

4-1

4

Keypad (HMI)

1

4

Cover for access to the battery

Figure 4.2 - Keypad (HMI) back part

Installation:
The Keypad (HMI) can be installed or removed from the inverter while it is with or without power.

4-2

Programming Basic Instructions

PROGRAMMING Basic Instructions
5.1 Parameter Structure
When the right “soft key” in the monitoring mode (“Menu”) is pressed, the first 4 parameter groups are showed
on the display. An example of the parameter group structure is presented in the table 5.1. The number and the
name of the groups may change depending on the used software version.

NOTE!

The inverter leaves the factory with the keypad (HMI) language, frequency (V/f 50/60 Hz mode) and
voltage adjusted according to the market.
The reset to the factory default may change the content of the parameters related to the frequency
(50 Hz/60 Hz). In the detailed description, some parameters present values in parentheses, which
must be adjusted in the inverter for using the 50 Hz frequency.

Table 5.1 - CFW-11 parameter groups structure
Level 0
Monitoring

00
01

Level 1
ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS

02
03
04
05
06
07

ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS
BASIC APPLICATION
SELF-TUNING
BACKUP PARAMETERS
I/O CONFIGURATION

08
09

FAULT HISTORY
READ ONLY PARAMS.

Level 2
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

Ramps
Speed References
Speed Limits
V/f Control
Adjust. V/f Curve
VVW Control
V/f Current Limit.
V/f DC Volt.Limit.
Dynamic Braking
Vector Control

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49

HMI
Local Command
Remote Command
3-Wire Command
FWD/REV Run Comm.
Zero Speed Logic
Multispeed
Electr. Potentiom.
Analog Inputs
Analog Outputs
Digital Inputs
Digital Outputs
Inverter Data
Motor Data
FlyStart/RideThru
Protections
PID Regulator
DC Braking
Skip Speed
Communication

50
51
52

SoftPLC
PLC
Trace Function

38
39
40
41

Analog Inputs
Analog Outputs
Digital Inputs
Digital Outputs

Level 3

90
91
92
93
94
95
96

Speed Regulator
Current Regulator
Flux Regulator
I/F Control
Self-Tuning
Torque Curr.Limit.
DC Link Regulator

5

110
111
112
113
114
115

Local/Rem Config.
Status/Commands
CANopen/DeviceNet
Serial RS232/485
Anybus
Profibus DP

5-1

Programming Basic Instructions
5.2 Groups Accessed in the Option Menu in the Monitoring Mode
In the monitoring mode access the groups of the option “Menu” by pressing the right "soft key".
Table 5.2 - Parameter groups accessed in the option menu of the monitoring mode
Group

Contained parameters or groups

00

ALL PARAMETERS

All the parameters

01

PARAMETER GROUPS

Access to groups divided by functions

02

ORIENTED START-UP

Parameter for entering the “Oriented Start-up” mode

03

CHANGED PARAMETERS

Only parameters whose contents are different from the factory settings

04

BASIC APPLICATION

Parameters for simple applications: ramps, minimum and maximum speed, maximum current and
torque boost. Presented in details in the CFW-11 User Manual at section 5.2.3

05

SELF-TUNING

Access parameter (P0408) and estimated parameters

06

BACKUP PARAMETERS

Parameters related to functions of parameter copy via FLASH Memory Module, keypad (HMI) and
software update

07

I/O CONFIGURATION

Groups related to digital and analog, inputs and outputs

08

FAULT HISTORY

Parameters with information on the 10 last faults

09

READ ONLY PARAMS.

Parameters used only for reading

5.3 Password Setting in P0000
In order to be able to change the content of the parameters, it is necessary to set correctly the password in
P0000, as indicated below. Otherwise the content of the parameters can only be visualized.
It is possible to customize the password by means of P0200. Refer to the description of this parameter in the
section 5.4 of this manual.
Seq.

Action/Result
- Monitoring Mode.
- Press “ Menu”

5

1

Ready

rpm
A
Hz

15:45

PARAMETERS” is already
2

selected.
- Press “Select”.

Ready
00
01
02
03

“Access to Parameters
3

P0000: 0” is already
selected.
- Press “Select”.
- In order to set the
password, press

4

until the number 5 appears
on the display.

LOC

Ready

15:45

LOC

appears, press “Save”.

Ready

15:45

LOC

performed correctly, the
display must show “Access
6

Ready

0rpm

LOC

- Press “Return”

Return

15:45

Ready
00
01
02
03

Select

7

Return

- The display returns to the
Monitoring Mode.
8

Figure 5.1 - Sequence for allowing parameter changes via P0000

0rpm

LOC

ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS
ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS

Ready

15:45

Select

0rpm

LOC

0
0.0
0.0

rpm
A
Hz

15:45

5-2

Save

P0000: 5”.

to Parameters

0rpm

Save

15:45

Access to Parameters
P0000:
5
Speed Reference
P0001:
90 rpm

- Press “Return".

Access to Parameters
0
15:45

P0000

(left "soft key").

P0000
Return

0rpm

LOC

- If the setting was

0rpm

Select

Ready

Return

0rpm

Select

Display Indication

Access to Parameters
5

Menu

Access to Parameters
P0000:
0
Speed Reference
P0001:
90 rpm
Return

Action/Result
-When the number 5

5

ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS
ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS

Return

- The parameter

0rpm

LOC

0
0.0
0.0

(right "soft key").

- The group “00 ALL

Seq.

Display Indication

Menu

Programming Basic Instructions
5.4 HMI [30]
In the group “30 HMI” are the parameters related to the presentation of information on the keypad (HMI)
display. See next the detailed description of the possible settings for those parameters.

P0193 – Day of the Week
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Sunday
1 = Monday
2 = Tuesday
3 = Wednesday
4 = Thursday
5 = Friday
6 = Saturday

Factory
Setting:

0

1 to 31

Factory
Setting:

1

1 to 12

Factory
Setting:

1

0 to 99

Factory
Setting:

6

0 to 23

Factory
Setting:

0

Factory
Setting:

P0198=0
P0199=0

P0194 – Day
Adjustable
Range:

P0195 – Month
Adjustable
Range:

P0196 – Year
Adjustable
Range:

5

P0197 – Hour
Adjustable
Range:

P0198 – Minutes
P0199 – Seconds
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 59

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
30 HMI

Description:
Those parameters set the date and time of the CFW-11 real time clock. It is important to configure them with the
correct date and time so that the fault and alarm record occurs with actual date and time information.
5-3

Programming Basic Instructions

P0200 – Password
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = On
2 = Change Password

Factory
Setting:

1

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
30 HMI

Description:
It allows changing the password and/or setting its status, configuring it as active or inactive. For more details on
each option, refer to the table 5.3 described next.
Table 5.3 - Options for the parameter P0000
P0200
0 (Inactive)
1 (Active)
2 (Changed Password)

Kind of Action
It allows parameter changes regardless of P0000
It does only allow parameter changes when the content of P0000 is equal
to the password
It opens a window for changing the password

When the option 2 is selected (Change password), the inverter opens a window for changing the password, allowing
the selection of a new value for it.

P0201 – Language
Adjustable
Range:

5

0 = Português
1 = English
2 = Español
3 = Deutsch

Factory
Setting:

0

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
30 HMI

Description:
It determines the language in which information will be presented on the keypad (HMI).

P0205 – Reading Parameter Selection 1
P0206 – Reading Parameter Selection 2
P0207 – Reading Parameter Selection 3
Adjustable
Range:

5-4

0 = Not selected
1 = Speed Reference #
2 = Motor Speed #
3 = Motor Current #
4 = DC Link Voltage #
5 = Motor Frequency #
6 = Motor Voltage #
7 = Motor Torque #
8 = Output Power #

Factory
Setting:

P0205=2
P0206=3
P0207=5

Programming Basic Instructions

9 = Process Variable #
10 = Setpoint PID #
11 = Speed Reference 12 = Motor Speed 13 = Motor Current 14 = DC Link Voltage 15 = Motor Frequency 16 = Motor Voltage 17 = Motor Torque 18 = Output Power 19 = Process Variable 20 = Setpoint PID Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
30 HMI

Description:
Those parameters define which variables, and in what manner they will be shown on the keypad (HMI) display in
the monitoring mode.
The options that present the symbol “#” at the end indicate that the variable will be displayed in absolute numerical
values. The options ended with the symbol “–“, configure the variable to be displayed as a bar graph, in percentage
values. More details on this programming can be seen in the section 5.6 next.

P0208 – Reference Scale Factor
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000

Factory
Setting:

1800
(1500)

P0212 – Reference Decimal Point
Adjustable
Range:

0 = wxyz
1 = wxy.z
2 = wx.yz
3 = w.xyz

Factory
Setting:

5

0

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
30 HMI

Description:
They define how the Speed Reference (P0001) and the Motor Speed (P0002) will be presented when the motor runs
at the synchronous speed.
In order to indicate the value in rpm, P0208 must be adjusted at the motor synchronous speed according to the
next table:
Table 5.4 - Synchronous speed reference in rpm
Frequency
50Hz

60Hz

Number of Motor Poles
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8

Synchronous Speed in rpm
3000
1500
1000
750
3600
1800
1200
900

5-5

Programming Basic Instructions

In order to indicate values in other units, use the following formulas:

P0002 =

Speed x P0208
Synchronous Speed x (10)P0212

P0001 =

Reference x P0208
Synchronous Speed x (10)P0212

Where,
Reference = Speed reference, in rpm;
Speed = Actual speed, in rpm;
Synchronous Speed = 120 x Motor Rated Frequency (P0403)/Nr. of Poles;
Nr. of Poles = 120 x P0403/ Motor Rated Speed (P0402), and can be equal to 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10.
Example:
If Speed = Synchronous Speed = 1800,
P0208 = 900,
P0212 = 1 (wxy.z), then
P0002 = 1800 x 900 1
1800 x (10)

= 90.0

P0209 – Reference Engineering Unit 1
P0210 – Reference Engineering Unit 2

5

P0211 – Reference Engineering Unit 3
Adjustable
Range:

32 to 127

Factory
Setting:

P0209=114 (r)
P0210=112 (p)
P0211=109 (m)

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
30 HMI

Description:
Those parameters are used to adjust the unit of the variable one wants to indicate at parameters P0001 and P0002.
The characters “rpm” can be replaced by those wanted by the user, for instance, L/s (length/second), CFM (cubic
feet per minute), etc.
The reference engineering unit is composed by 3 characters: P0209 defines the leftmost, P0210 the center and
P0211 the rightmost character.
The available characters correspond to the ASCII code from 32 to 127.

5-6

Programming Basic Instructions

Examples:
A,

B,

...,

Y,

Z,

a,

b,

...,

- To indicate “L/s”:
P0209=”L” (76)
P0210=”/” (47)
P0211=”s” (115)

y,

z,

0,

1,

...,

9,

#,

$,

%,

(,

),

*,

+,

...

- To indicate “CFM”:
P0209=”C” (67)
P0210=”F” (70)
P0211=”M” (77)

P0213 – Full Scale Reading Parameter 1
P0214 – Full Scale Reading Parameter 2
P0215 – Full Scale Reading Parameter 3
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 200.0 %

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

100.0 %

30 HMI

Description:
Those parameters configure the full scale of the reading variables 1, 2 and 3 (selected through P0205, P0206 and
P0207), when they were programmed to be presented as bar graphs.

P0216 – HMI Display Contrast
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 37

Factory
Setting:

27

5

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
30 HMI

Description:
It allows setting the keypad (HMI) display contrast level. Higher values configure a higher contrast level.

5-7

Programming Basic Instructions

5.5 Date and Time Setting
Seq.

Action/Result
- Monitoring Mode.
- Press “Menu”

1

Ready

(right "soft key").

2

selected.

Ready
00
01
02
03

- If necessary, set P0194
according to the actual day.

Menu

0rpm

6

16:10

PARAMETER GROUPS” is
selected.
- Press “Select”.

Ready
00
01
02
03

showed on the display, with
the group “20 Ramps”
selected.
until

the group “30 HMI” is

- Press “Select”.

Return

06
10
16:10

LOC

0rpm

16:10

7

Select

- When P0199 is finished,

Ready

the Real Time Clock will be

Minutes
P0198:
Seconds
P0199:

adjusted.
- Press “Return”
(left "soft key").

Ready
20
21
22
23

LOC

Return

16:10

- Press “Return”.

0rpm

Ramps
Speed References
Speed Limits
V/f Control
Select

27
28
29
30

V/f DC Volt.Limit.
Dynamic Braking
Vector Control
HMI
16:10

34
18:11

Select

V/f DC Volt.Limit.
Dynamic Braking
Vector Control
HMI

Ready
00
01
02
03

9

11

				
Ready
0rpm
LOC

Return

- Press “Return”.

0rpm

LOC

Return

27
28
29
30

8

				
Ready
0rpm
LOC

Return

18:11

Select

0rpm

LOC

ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS
ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS

Return

18:11

Select

Select

- The display returns to the

5

Monitoring Mode.
10

Ready

Figure 5.2 - Date and time adjustment

0rpm

LOC

0
0.0
0.0

rpm
A
Hz

18:11

5-8

Select

from “Month P0195” to

selected.
- The group “30 HMI” is

5

or

contents

0rpm

LOC

for adjusting the parameters

- A new list of groups is

selected.

Day
P0194:
Month
P0195:

- Proceed in the same way

Select

ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS
ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS

Return

- Press

Ready

- For changing P0194

“Seconds P0199”.

- The group “01

4

Therefore, press “Select”.

.

ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS
ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS

Return

3

LOC

Display Indication

Action/Result
- The parameter “Day
P0194” is already selected.

rpm
A
Hz

16:10

PARAMETERS” is already

0rpm

LOC

0
0.0
0.0

- The group “00 ALL

Seq.

Display Indication

Menu

Programming Basic Instructions

5.6 Display Indications in the Monitoring Mode Settings
Every time the inverter is powered the display goes to the Monitoring Mode. In order to make it easier the
reading of the motor main parameters, the keypad (HMI) display can be configured to show them in 3
different modes.
Content of the 3 parameters in numerical form:
Selection of the parameters via P0205, P0206 and P0207. That mode can be seen in the figure 5.3.

Loc./Rem. indication
- LOC: Local situation;
- REM: Remote situation.

Motor speed direction
indication.
Inverter status:
- Run
- Ready
- Configuration
- Self tuning
- Last fault: FXXX
- Last alarm: AXXX
- etc.

Run

LOC

1800
1.0
60.0
12:35

Motor speed indication
in rpm.

1800rpm

rpm
A
Hz
Menu

Monitoring parameters:
- Motor speed in rpm;
- Motor current in Amps;
- Output frequency in Hz (default).
P0205, P0206 and P0207: selection of the
parameters to be shown in the Monitoring Mode.
P0208 to P0212: Engineering unit for the speed
indication.

Left "soft key" function.

Right "soft key" function.

Indication of the time.
Adjusted in:
P0197, P0198 and P0199.

Figure 5.3 - Monitoring Mode screen at the factory setting

Content of the 3 parameters in form of a bar graph:
Selection of the parameters via P0205, P0206 and/or P0207. The values are showed in percentage by means
of horizontal bars. This mode is illustrated in the figure 5.4.

Run
rpm
A
Hz

1800rpm
LOC
100%
10%

P0205, P0206 and P0207: selection of the parameters
to be shown in the Monitoring Mode.

100%
12:35

Monitoring parameters:
- Motor speed in rpm;
- Motor current in Amps;
- Output frequency in Hz (default).

Menu

P0208 to P0212: Engineering unit for the speed
indication.

Figure 5.4 - Monitoring Mode screen with bar graphs

In order to configure the bar graph monitoring mode, access the parameters P0205, P0206 and/or P0207
and select the options ended with the symbol “–“ (values in the range from 11 to 20). Thus, the respective
variable is configured to be shown as a bar graph.
The figure 5.5, presented next, illustrates the procedure for the modification of the display of one variable
to the graph mode.

5-9

5

Programming Basic Instructions
Seq.

Action/Result

Display Indication
Ready

- Monitoring Mode.
1

(right "soft key").

rpm
A
Hz

16:10

Ready

- The group “00 ALL
2

00
01
02
03

PARAMETERS” is already
selected

.

LOC

16:10

Action/Result
- The “Read Parameter

7

Sel. 1 P0205" is selected.
- Press “Select”.

Display Indication
Ready

- Press

0rpm

8

until

Ready

Ready

PARAMETER GROUPS” is

00
01
02
03

selected.
- Press “Select”.

LOC

Return

16:10

Read Parameter Sel. 1
[011] Speed Refer. Return

0rpm

- Press “Return”.

4

with the group “20

20
21
22
23

Ramps” selected.
- Press

until

Return

0rpm

16:10

Ready
27
28
29
30

selected.
- Press “Select”.

LOC

16:10

Select

- The parameter “Day

5

6

- Press “Return”.

0rpm

- The display returns to the

Ready

selected.

Day
P0194:
Month
P0195:

- Press
until selecting “Read

Return

Parameter Sel. 1

LOC

Select

12

Monitoring Mode with the

0rpm

LOC

16:10

Select

0rpm

LOC

Ready

16:10

speed indicated by a bar

0rpm

Select

0rpm

LOC

rpm

graph.

P0194” is already

16:10

00 ALL PARAMETERS
01 PARAMETER GROUPS
02 ORIENTED START-UP
03 CHANGED PARAMETERS
Return

V/f DC Volt. Limit.
Dynamic Braking
Vector Control
HMI

Return

0rpm

LOC

V/f DC Volt. Limit.
Dynamic Braking
Vector Control
HMI

Ready

Select

11

- The group “30 HMI” is

- Press “Return”.

27
28
29
30

Return

selected.

5

10

Ramps
Speed References
Speed Limits
V/f Control

Return

the group “30 HMI” is

LOC

Save

Select

- A new list of groups is
Ready

16:10

Language
P0201 : English
Read Parameter Sel. 1
P0205 : Speed Refer. -

Ready

showed on the display,

0rpm

LOC

P0205

- Press “Save”.

9

Select

Speed Refer. – “.

Select

ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS
ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS

16:10

selecting the option “ [11]

Ready

- The group “01

0rpm

LOC

Language
P0201 : English
Read Parameter Sel. 1
P0205 : Motor Speed #
Return

Menu

ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS
ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS

Return

3

0rpm

LOC

0
0.0
0.0

- Press “Menu”

Seq.

0.0
0.0

5%
A
Hz

16:10

Menu

06
10
16:10

Select

P0205".

Figure 5.5 - Monitoring with bar graph configuration

In order to return to the standard Monitoring Mode (numerical), you only have to select the options ended with
“#” (values from 1 to 10) in the parameters P0205, P0206 and/or P0207.
Content of the parameter P0205 in numerical form with bigger characters:
Program the reading parameters (P0206 and P0207) in zero (inactive) and P0205 as numerical value (one
option ended with “#”). Thus, P0205 starts being displayed in bigger characters. The figure 5.6 illustrates this
monitoring mode.
Run

LOC

1800rpm

1800rpm
11:23

Menu

Content of the parameter P0205, with bigger characters.
The other parameters must be programmed in 0, at
P0206 and P0207.

Figure 5.6 - Example of the screen in the Monitoring Mode with P0205 programmed with bigger characters

5-10

Programming Basic Instructions
5.7 Incompatibility between Parameters
If any of the combinations listed below occur, the CFW-11 goes to the “Config” state.
1)

Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (4=FWD Run);

2)

Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (5=REV Run);

3)

Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (6=3-Wire Start);

4)

Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (7=3-Wire Stop);

5)

Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (8=FWD/REV);

6)

Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (9=LOC/REM);

7)

Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (11=Increase E.P.);

8)

Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (12=Decrease E.P.);

9)

Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (14=Ramp 2);

10) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (15=Speed/Torque);
11) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (22=Manual/Automatic);
12) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (24=Disable Flying Start);
13) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (25=DC Link Regulator);
14) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (26=Programming Off);
15) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (27=Load User 1/2);

5

16) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (28=Load User 3);
17) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (29=DO2 Timer);
18) Two or more DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (30=DO3 Timer);
19) DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (4=FWD Run) without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for
(5=REV Run);
20) DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (5=REV Run) without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for
(4=FWD Run);
21) DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (6=3-Wire Start) without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for
(7=3-Wire Stop);
22) DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (7=3-Wire Stop) without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for
(6=3-Wire Start);
23) P0221 or P0222 programmed for (8=Multispeed) without DIx (P0266...P0268) programmed for
(13=Multispeed);
24) P0221 or P0222 not programmed for (8=Multispeed) with DIx (P0266...P0268) programmed for
(13=Multispeed);

5-11

Programming Basic Instructions
25) [P0221 or P0222 programmed for (7=E.P.)] AND [without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for
(11=Increase E.P.) OR without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (12=Decrease E.P.)];
26) [P0221 and P0222 not programmed for (7=E.P.)] AND [with DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for
(11=Increase E.P.) OR with DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (12=Decrease E.P.)];
27) [P0202 programmed for (0=V/f 60Hz) OR (1=V/f 50Hz) OR (2=Adjustable V/f) OR (5=VVW)] AND
[P0231=1(No Ramp Ref.) OR P0231=2 (Max.Torque Cur) OR P0236=1 (No Ramp Ref.) OR P0236=2
(Max.Torque Cur) OR P0241=1 (No Ramp Ref.) OR P0241=2 (Max.Torque Cur) OR P0246=1 (No Ramp
Ref.) OR P0246=2 (Max.Torque Cur)];
28) [P0202 programmed for (0=V/f 60Hz) OR (1=V/f 50Hz) OR (2=Adjustable V/f) OR (5=VVW)] AND [DIx
(P0263...P0270) programmed for (16=JOG+) OR (17=JOG-);
29) P0203 programmed for (1=PID Regulator) AND P0217 for (1=On) AND [P0224 programmed for
(0=
,
Keys) OR P0227 programmed for (0=
,
Keys)];
30) DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (29=DO2 Timer) without DO2 (P0276) programmed for
(29=Timer);
31) DO2 (P0276) programmed for (29=Timer) without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (29=DO2
Timer);
32) DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (30=DO3 Timer) without DO3 (P0277) programmed for
(29=Timer);
33) DO3 (P0277) programmed for (29=Timer) without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (30=DO3
Timer);
34) [P0224 programmed for (1=DIx) OR P0227 programmed for (1=DIx)] AND [without DIx (P0263...P0270)
programmed for (1=Run/Stop) AND without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (2=General Enable)
AND without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (3=Fast Stop) AND without DIx (P0263...P0270)
programmed for (4=FWD Run) AND without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (5=REV Run) AND
without DIx (P0263...P0270) programmed for (6=3-Wire Start) AND without (P0263...P0270) programmed
for (7=3-Wire Stop)].

5

5-12

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

INVERTER MODEL AND ACCESSORIES IDENTIFICATION
In order to identify the model of the inverter, verify the code existent on the product identification labels: the
complete one, located at the side of the inverter, or the abbreviated one, under the keypad (HMI). The figures
below show examples of those labels.

Manufacturing date
Serial Number
Maximum environment temperature
Software Version

CFW11 model
WEG part number
Inverter net weight
Input rated data ( voltage, number of phases,
rated currents for operation with ND) and HD
overload regimens, and frequency)
Current specifications for operation with
normal overload regimen (ND)

Output rated data (voltage, number of phases,
rated currents for normal overload regimen
(ND) and heavy overload regimen (HD), overload currents for 1 min and 3 s, and frequency
range)

Current specifications for operation with
heavy overload regimen (HD)

a) Identification label at the side of the inverter for the models in cabinet (CFW-11)

CFW11M model
WEG part number

Serial Number
Maximum environment temperature
Manufacturing date

Software Version
Input rated data ( voltage, number of phases,
rated currents for operation with ND) and HD
overload regimens, and frequency)
Current specifications for operation with
normal overload regimen (ND)

Output rated data (voltage, number of phases,
rated currents for normal overload regimen
(ND) and heavy overload regimen (HD), overload currents for 1 min and 3 s, and frequency
range)

Current specifications for operation with
heavy overload regimen (HD)

6
b) CFW-11M identification label which is attached inside the panel where the inverter is installed
CFW11 model
WEG part number

CFW110016T2SZ
12345678

99/99/9999

Manufacturing date

SERIAL#:

1234567980

Serial number

c) Identification label under the keypad (HMI)
Figure 6.1 - Identification labels

Once the inverter model identification code is verified, one must interpret it in order to understand its meaning.
Refer to the table present in the section 2.4 of the CFW-11 User Manual and in the section 2.6 of the CFW-11M
User Manual.

6-1

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification
6.1 Inverter Data [42]
In this group are the parameters related to the inverter information and characteristics, such as inverter model,
accessories identified by the control circuit, software version, switching frequency, etc.

P0023 – Software Version
Adjustable
Range:

0.00 to 655.35

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

42 Inverter Data

Description:
It indicates the software version contained in the FLASH memory of the microcontroller located on the control board.

P0027 – Accessories Configuration 1
P0028 – Accessories Configuration 2
Adjustable
Range:

0000h to FFFFh

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

42 Inverter Data

Description:
Those parameters identify by means of a hexadecimal code the accessories that were found installed on the control
module.

6

For the accessories installed in the slots 1 and 2 the identification code is informed at the parameter P0027. In case
of modules connected in the slots 3, 4 or 5, the code will be shown through the parameter P0028.
The next table shows the codes shown in those parameters, regarding the main CFW-11 accessories.

6-2

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

Table 6.1 - CFW-11 accessory identification codes
Name

Description

Slot

Identification Code
P0027
P0028

IOA-01

Module with 2 14-bit analog inputs, 2 digital inputs, 2 14-bit analog
outputs in voltage or current, 2 open collector digital outputs

1

FD--

----

IOB-01

Module with 2 isolated analog inputs, 2 digital inputs, 2 isolated analog
outputs in voltage or current, 2 open collector digital outputs

1

FA--

----

ENC-01

Incremental encoder module 5 to 12 Vdc, 100 kHz, with encoder signal
repeater

2

--C2

----

ENC-02
RS-485-01
RS-232-01

Incremental encoder module 5 to 12 Vdc, 100 kHz
RS-485 serial communication module
RS-232C serial communication module

2
3
3

--C2
-------

---CE-CC--

RS-232-02

RS-232C serial communication module with keys for programming the
microcontroller FLASH memory

3

----

CC--

3
3
1, 2 and 3
4
4
4
4
4
5

----------------------------

CA-CD-----(1)
----(3)
----(3)
----(3)
----(3)
----(3)
----(2)

CAN/RS-485-01
CAN-01
PLC11-01
PROFIBUS DP-05
DEVICENET-05
ETHERNET IP-05
RS-232-05
RS-485-05
MMF-01

CAN and RS-485 interface module
CAN interface module
PLC module
Profibus-DP interface module
DeviceNet interface module
Ethernet interface module
RS-232 interface module
RS-485 interface module
FLASH Memory Module

For Anybus-CC communication modules (slot 4), PLC11 module and for the FLASH memory module, the P028
identification code will depend on the combination of these accessories, as presented in the next table.
Table 6.2 - Formation of the two first codes for P0028 parameter
6

PLC module

FLASH Memory Module

Bits
7

5

4

Anybus-CC modules
01 = Active Module
10 = Passive Module

3

2

1

0

0

0

0

0

2nd Hexadecimal Code

1st Hexadecimal Code

6

(1)

Bit 7: indicates the presence of the PLC module (0=without PLC module, 1=with PLC module).

(2)

Bit 6: indicates the presence of the FLASH memory module (0=without memory module, 1=with memory
module).

(3)

Bits 5 and 4: indicate the presence of Anybus-CC modules, as follows.
Table 6.3 - Module types
Bits
5
0

4
1

Type of Module
Active

Name
PROFIBUS DP-05, DEVICENET-05, ETHERNET IP-05

1

0

Passive

RS-232-05, RS-485-05

Bits 3, 2, 1 and 0 are fixed in 0000, and form always the code “0” in hexadecimal.
Example: For An inverter equipped with the IOA-01, ENC-02, RS-485-01, PROFIBUS DP-05 modules, and the FLASH
memory module, the hexadecimal code presented in the parameters P0027 and P0028 is respectively FDC2 and
CE50 (table 6.4).
6-3

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification
Table 6.4 - Example of the two first characters of the code showed in P0028 for
PROFIBUS DP-05 and FLASH memory module
7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

5

0

P0029 – Power Hardware Configuration
Adjustable
Range:

Bit 0 to 5 = Rated Current
Bit 6 and 7 = Rated Voltage
Bit 8 = EMC Filter
Bit 9 = Safety Relay
Bit 10 = (0)24V/(1)DC Link
Bit 11 = (0)RST/(1)DC Link
Bit 12 = Dyn.Brak. IGBT
Bit 13 = Special
Bit 14 and 15 = Reserved

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

42 Inverter Data

Description:
In a similar way than parameters P0027 and P0028, the parameter P0029 identifies the inverter model and the
present accessories. The codification is formed by the combination of binary digits, and presented in the keypad
(HMI) in hexadecimal format.
The bits that compose the code are explained in the next table.
Table 6.5 - Parameter P0029 code constitution
12

0

With
braking
IGBT

11

10

9

0

6
4th Hexadecimal Code

8

with RFI filter

1

13

with safety relay

1

14

with 24V supply

Bits
15

3rd Hexadecimal Code

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Voltage
00 = 200...240 V
01 = 380...480 V

Current

2nd Hexadecimal Code

1st Hexadecimal Code

Bits 15, 14 and 13: are fixed in 110;
Bit 12: it indicates the presence of the dynamic braking IGBT (0 = with braking IGBT, 1 = without braking IGBT);
Bit 11: always 0;
Bit 10: indicates if the inverter has the DC/DC converter for receiving external 24 V electronics power supply
(0=with DC/DC converter, 1=without DC/DC 24 V converter);
Bit 9: indicates the presence of the safety relay (0=without safety relay, 1=with safety relay);
Bit 8: indicates if the inverter is equipped with RFI suppressor filter (0=without RFI filter, 1=with RFI filter);
6-4

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

Bits 7 and 6: indicate the inverter power supply voltage (00=200...240 V, 01=380/480 V);
Bits 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 and 0: together with the voltage indication bits (7 and 6), they indicate the inverter rated current
(ND). The next table presents the combinations available for those bits.
Table 6.6 - Current codification for the parameter P0029

0

6

5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0

4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1

3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0

2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0

1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0

0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1

7
2 A*
6 A*
7 A*
10 A*
7A
10 A
13 A
16 A
24 A
28 A
33.5 A
45 A
54 A
70 A
86 A
105 A

380 V...480 V

200 V...240 V

7

6

0

5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1

4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

2
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1

1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0

0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1

3.6 A
5A
7A
10 A
13.5 A
17 A
24 A
31 A
38 A
45 A
58.5 A
70.5 A
88 A

* Models with single-phase/three-phase power supply.
Example: For a 10 V, 380...480 V CFW-11, with RFI suppressor filter, without safety relay and without external 24 V
supply, the hexadecimal code presented in the keypad (HMI) for the parameter P0029 is C544 (refer to the table
6.7).
Table 6.7 - Example of the code at P0029 for a specific inverter model
15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

C

5

4

4

6

6-5

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

P0295 – ND/HD VFD Rated Current
Adjustable
Range:

0 = 3.6 A / 3.6 A
1=5A/5A
2=6A/5A
3 = 7 A / 5.5 A
4=7A/7A
5 = 10 A / 8 A
6 = 10 A / 10 A
7 = 13 A / 11 A
8 = 13.5 A / 11 A
9 = 16 A / 13 A
10 = 17 A / 13.5 A
11 = 24 A / 19 A
12 = 24 A / 20 A
13 = 28 A / 24 A
14 = 31 A / 25 A
15 = 33.5 A / 28 A
16 = 38 A / 33 A
17 = 45 A / 36 A
18 = 45 A / 38 A
19 = 54 A / 45 A
20 = 58.5 A / 47 A
21 = 70 A / 56 A
22 = 70.5 A / 61 A
23 = 86 A / 70 A
24 = 88 A / 73 A
25 = 105 A / 86 A
26 = 427 A / 340 A
27 = 470 A / 418 A
28 = 811 A / 646 A
29 = 893 A / 794 A
30 = 1217 A / 969 A
31 = 1340 A / 1191 A
32 = 1622 A / 1292 A
33 = 1786 A / 1600 A
34 = 2028 A / 1615 A
35 = 2232 A / 1985 A
36 = 2 A / 2 A
37 = 527 A / 527 A
38 = 1000 A / 1000 A
39 = 1500 A / 1500 A
40 = 2000 A / 2000 A
41 = 2500 A / 2500 A
42 = 600 A / 515 A
43 = 1140 A / 979 A
44 = 1710 A / 1468 A
45 = 2280 A / 1957 A
46 = 2850 A / 2446 A
47 = 105 A / 88 A
48 = 142 A / 115 A
49 = 180 A / 142 A
50 = 211 A / 180 A

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

6

Factory
Setting:

42 Inverter Data

Description:
This parameter presents the inverter rated current for the normal overload regimen (ND) and for the heavy overload
regimen (HD). The inverter operation mode, if it is ND or HD, is defined by the content of P0298.

6-6

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

P0296 – Line Rated Voltage
Adjustable
Range:

0 = 200 ... 240 V
1 = 380 V
2 = 400 / 415 V
3 = 440 / 460 V
4 = 480 V
5 = 500 / 525 V
6 = 550 / 575 V
7 = 600 V
8 = 660 / 690 V

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

According to
the inverter
model

42 Inverter Data

Description:
Setting according to the inverter power supply voltage.
The adjustable range depends on the inverter model, according to the table 6.8, which also presents the factory
default value.

NOTE!

When adjusted via the keypad (HMI), this parameter may change automatically the following
parameters: P0151, P0153, P0185, P0321, P0322 and P0323.
Table 6.8 - P0296 setting according to the CFW-11 inverter model
Inverter Model
200-240 V

Adjustable Range
0 = 200...240 V

Factory Setting
0

380-480 V

1 = 380 V
2 = 400 / 415 V
3 = 440 / 460 V
4 = 480 V

3

500-600 V

5 = 500 / 525 V
6 = 550 / 575 V
7 = 600 V

6

660-690 V

8 = 660 / 690 V

8

6

P0297 – Switching Frequency
Adjustable
Range:

0 = 1.25 kHz
1 = 2.5 kHz
2 = 5.0 kHz
3 = 10.0 kHz

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory 2
Setting:

42 Inverter Data

6-7

Inverter Model and Accessories Identification

Description:
Refer to the allowed current for switching frequencies different from the default, in the tables available in chapter 8
of the CFW-11 User Manual.
The inverter switching frequency can be adjusted according to the needs of the application.
Higher switching frequencies imply in lower motor acoustic noise, however, the selection of the switching frequency
results in a compromise between the motor acoustic noises, the losses in the inverter IGBTs and the maximum
allowed currents.
The reduction of the switching frequency reduces effects related to motor instability, which occur in specific application
conditions. It also reduces the earth leakage current, being able to avoid the actuation of the faults F074 (Ground
Fault) or F070 (Output Overcurrent/Short Circuit).
Note: The option 0 (1.25 kHz) is only allowed for the V/f or VVW control (P0202=0, 1, 2 or 5).

P0298 – Application
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Normal Duty (ND)
1 = Heavy Duty (HD)

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory 0
Setting:

42 Inverter Data

Description:
Set the content of this parameter according to the application.
The Normal Duty Regimen (ND) defines the maximum current for continuous operation (Inom-ND) and an overload
of 110 % during 1 minute. It must be used for driving motors that are not subject in that application to high torques
in relation to their rated torque, when operating in permanent regimen, during start, acceleration or deceleration.
The Heavy Duty Regimen (HD) defines the maximum current for continuous operation (Inom-HD) and an overload
of 150 % during 1 minute. It must be used for driving motors that are subject in that application to high
overload torques in relation to their rated torque, when operating in constant speed, during start, acceleration or
deceleration.

6

The Inom-ND and Inom-HD are presented in P0295. Refer to the CFW-11 User Manual chapter 8 for more details
regarding these operation regimens.

6-8

Starting-up and Settings

STARTING-UP AND SETTINGS
In order to start-up in the several types of controls, beginning from the factory settings, consult the following
sections:
- 9.5 - V/f Control;
- 10.1 - VVW Control;
- 11.9 - Sensorless and Encoder Vector Control.
In order to use previously loaded parameters, refer to the section 7.1, described next.

7.1 Backup Parameters [06]
The CFW-11 BACKUP functions allow saving the content of the current inverter parameters in a specific memory,
or vice-versa (overwrite the contents of the current parameters with the memory contents). Besides, there is a
function exclusive for software update, by means of the FLASH Memory Module.

P0204 – Load/Save Parameters
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Not Used
1 = Not Used
2 = Reset P0045
3 = Reset P0043
4 = Reset P0044
5 = Load 60 Hz
6 = Load 50 Hz
7 = Load User 1
8 = Load User 2
9 = Load User 3
10 = Save User 1
11 = Save User 2
12 = Save User 3

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

06 BACKUP PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

0

Description:
It makes it possible to save the actual inverter parameters in an area of the control module EEPROM memory or the
other way around, to load the contents of that area into the parameters. It also allows resetting the Time Enabled
(P0043), kWh (P0044) and Fan Enabled Time (P0045) counters. The table 7.1 describes the actions performed by
each option.

7

7-1

Starting-up and Settings

Table 7.1 - Parameter P0204 options
P0204
0, 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Action
Not Used: no action
Reset P0045: resets the enabled fan hour counter
Reset P0043: resets the enabled hours counter
Reset P0044: resets the kWh counter
Load 60 Hz: loads the 60 Hz factory settings into the inverter parameters
Load 50 Hz: loads the 50 Hz factory settings into the inverter parameters
Load User 1: loads the User 1 parameters into the current inverter parameters
Load User 2: loads the User 2 parameters into the current inverter parameters
Load User 3: loads the User 3 parameters into the current inverter parameters
Save User 1: saves the current inverter parameters into the User 1 parameter memory
Save User 2: saves the current inverter parameters into the User 2 parameter memory
Save User 3: saves the current inverter parameters into the User 3 parameter memory

0

=1

4
20

7

P0

2
=1

User
Memory 3

User
Memory 1

2

P0

Current P0204=5 or 6
inverter
parameters

4

20

P0

=
04

P0

Factory
Setting

20

2

04

P0

=9

4=

11

P0

20

4=

8

User
Memory 2

Figure 7.1 - Parameter transfer

In order to load parameters from User 1, User 2 and/or User 3 to the CFW-11 operation area (P0204=7, 8 or 9),
it is necessary that these areas had been saved previously.
The operation of loading one of those memories can also be performed via digital inputs (DIx). Refer to the section
13.8 for more details regarding this programming (P0204=10, 11 or 12).

NOTE!

When P0204=5 or 6, the parameters P0296 (Line Rated Voltage), P0297 (Switching Frequency),
P0308 (Serial Address) and P0201 (Language), are not changed by the factory settings.

P0318 – Copy Function MemCard

7

Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = VFD → MemCard
2 = MemCard → VFD

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

06 BACKUP PARAMETERS

7-2

Factory 1
Setting:

Starting-up and Settings

Description:
This function allows saving the contents of the inverter writing parameters in the FLASH Memory Module (MMF), or
vice-versa, and can be used to transfer the contents of the parameters from one inverter to another.
Table 7.2 - Parameter P0318 options
P0318
0
1
2

Action
Inactive: no action
Inverter → MemCard: transfers the inverter current parameters contents to the MMF
MemCard → Inverter: transfers the contents of the parameters stored in the MMF to the inverter control board

After storing the parameters of one inverter in a FLASH memory module, it is possible to pass them to another inverter
with this function. However, if the inverters are form different models or with incompatible software versions, the
keypad (HMI) will exhibit the message “Flash Mem. Module with invalid parameters” and will not allow the copy.

NOTE!

During the inverter operation the modified parameters are saved in the FLASH memory module,
regardless of a user command. This assures that the MMF will always have an updated copy of the
inverter parameters.

NOTE!

When the inverter is powered and the memory module is present, the current parameter contents are
compared with the contents of the parameters saved in the MMF and, in case they are different, the
keypad (HMI) will exhibit the message “Flash Mem.Module with different parameters”, after 3 seconds
the message is replaced by the parameter P0318 menu. The user has the option to overwrite the
contents of the memory module (choosing P0318=1), or overwrite the inverter parameters (choosing
P0318=2), or even ignore the message by programming P0318=0.

NOTE!

When using the network communication board, the SoftPLC function or the PLC11 board, it is
recommended to set the parameter P0318 = 0.

P0319 – Copy Function HMI
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = VFD → HMI
2 = HMI → VFD

Factory 0
Setting:

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

06 BACKUP PARAMETERS

Description:
The Copy Function HMI is similar to the previous, and it is also used to transfer the contents of the parameters
from one inverter to another (others). The inverters must be of the same model (voltage/current) and have the same
software version.
Table 7.3 - Parameter P0319 options
P0319

Action

0

Inactive: no action

1

Inverter → HMI: transfers the inverter current parameters and the user memories 1, 2 and 3 contents to the keypad (HMI)
nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). The inverter current parameters remain unchanged

2

HMI → Inverter: transfers the content of the keypad (HMI) nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) to the current inverter parameters
and to the user memories 1, 2 and 3

7-3

7

Starting-up and Settings
NOTE!

In case the keypad (HMI) had been previously loaded with parameters from a version “different” from
that of the inverter where one is trying to copy the parameters, the operation will not be carried out
and the keypad (HMI) will indicate the fault F082 (Copy Function Fault). It is understood as “different”
versions, those that differ in the “x” and “y” digits, assuming that the software version numbers be
described as Vx.yz.
Example: Version V1.60 → (x=1, y=6 and z=0) previously stored in the keypad (HMI)
 Inverter version: V1.75 → (x’=1, y’=7 and z’=5)
P0319=2 → F082 [(y=6) → (y’=7)]
 Inverter version: V1.62 → (x’=1, y’=6 and z’=2)
P0319=2 → normal copy [(y=6) = (y’=6)] and [(x=1) = (x’=1)]
In order to copy parameters from one inverter to another, one must proceed in the following manner:
1. Connect the keypad (HMI) to the inverter from which one wants to copy the parameters (Inverter A);
2. Set P0319=1 (VFD → HMI) to transfer the parameters from the Inverter A to the keypad (HMI);
3. Press the right “soft key” “Save”. P0319 returns automatically to 0 (inactive) as soon as the transfer is
finished;
4. Disconnect the keypad (HMI) from the inverter;
5. Connect the same keypad (HMI) to the invert to which one wants to transfer the parameters (Inverter B);
6. Set P0319=2 (HMI → VFD) to transfer the contents of the keypad (HMI) nonvolatile memory (EEPROM with
the Inverter A parameters) to the Inverter B;
7. Press the right “soft key” “Save”. When P0319 returns to 0 the transfer of the parameters has been
finished.
From that moment on the Inverters A and B will have the parameters with the same contents.
Notes:
 In case that inverters A and B are not from the same model, verify the values of P0296 (Line Rated
Voltage) and P0297 (Switching Frequency) at the Inverter B;

7

 If inverters A and B drive different motors, verify the Inverter B motor parameters.

7-4

Starting-up and Settings
8. In order to copy the contents of the Inverter A parameters to other inverters, repeat the same procedures 5
to 7 described previously.
INVERTER
A

INVERTER
B

Parameters

Parameters

INV → HMI

HMI → INV

EEPROM

EEPROM

HMI

HMI

Figure 7.2 - Parameter copy from “Inverter A” to the “Inverter B”

NOTE!

As long as the keypad (HMI) is performing the reading or the writing procedure, it will not be possible
to operate it.

7

7-5

Starting-up and Settings

7

7-6

Available Control Types

AVAILABLE CONTROL TYPES
8.1 Control Types
The inverter feeds the motor with variable voltage, current and frequency, by means of whose the control of
the motor speed is obtained. The values applied to the motor follow a control strategy, which depends on the
selected type of control and on the inverter parameter settings.
Choose the control type in function of the static and dynamic, torque and speed requirements of the driven
load.
Control modes and their main characteristics:
 V/f: scalar control; it is the simplest control mode, by imposed voltage/frequency; with an open loop speed
regulation or with slip compensation (programmable); it allows multimotor operation.
 VVW: Voltage Vector WEG; it allows a static speed control more accurate than the V/f mode; it adjusts
itself automatically to the line variations, and also to the load variations, however it does not present fast
dynamic response.
 Sensorless Vector: it is a field oriented control; without motor speed sensor; able to drive any standard
motor; speed control range of 1:100; speed control static precision of 0.5 % of the rated speed; high
control dynamics.
 Vector with Encoder: it is a field oriented control; it needs motor encoder and inverter encoder interface
module (ENC1 or ENC2); speed control down to 0 rpm; speed control static precision of 0.01 % of the
rated speed; high static and dynamic performance of the speed and torque control.
All these control modes are described in details in the chapters 9, 10 and 11, the related parameters and
orientations regarding the use of each of these modes.

8

8-1

Available Control Types

8

8-2

Scalar Control (V/f)

SCALAR CONTROL (V/f)
It consists of a simple control based on a curve that links output voltage and frequency. The inverter operates
as a voltage source, generating frequency and voltage values according to that curve. It is possible to adjust
this curve to standard 50 Hz or 60 Hz motors or to special ones through the adjustable V/f curve. Refer to the
block diagram at the figure 9.1.
The advantage of the V/f control is that due to its simplicity just a few settings are necessary. The start-up is fast
and simple, and the factory settings require generally few or no modifications.

P0202=Type of Control
V

P0202=0 or 1=V/f
Pwm
P0136
Pwm

V

Total Reference

Speed

(Refer to figure 13.8)

V P0202=2=Adjustable V/f
p0142

f

p0143
p0144
p0146

p0145
Speed

V
Reference
V
Automatic Torque
Boost

p0137

Speed

V

p0138

Speed

Is = Output Current

transf.
Slip Compensation

I active
P0139

Figure 9.1 - V/f control block diagram

The V/f or scalar control is recommended for the following cases:
 Operation of several motors with the same inverter (multimotor operation);
 The motor rated current is less than 1/3 of the inverter rated current;
 The inverter is, for test purposes, enabled without motor or with a small motor and no load.
The scalar control can also be used in applications that do neither require fast dynamic response, nor accuracy
in the speed regulation, and also do not require high starting torque (the speed error is a function of the motor
slip, and by programming the parameter P0138 – Slip Compensation – it is possible to get a accuracy of
approximately 1 % at the rated speed with the load variation).

9-1

9

Scalar Control (V/f)
9.1 V/f Control [23]
P0136 – Manual Torque Boost
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 9

Factory 1
Setting:

Proprieties:

V/f

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
23 V/f Control

Description:
It acts at low speeds, increasing the inverter output voltage in order to compensate the voltage drop across the
motor stator resistance, with the purpose of keeping the torque constant.
The optimum setting is the lowest value of P0136 that allows a satisfactory starting of the motor. Values higher than
the necessary will increase the motor current at low speeds, being able to lead the inverter to a fault (F048, F051,
F071, F072, F078 or F183) or alarm (A046, A047, A050 or A110) condition.
Output Voltage

nominal

1/2 nominal

P0136=9

P0136=0
nnom/2

nnom

Speed

Figure 9.2 - Effect of P0136 on the V/f curve (P0202=0 or 1)

P0137 – Automatic Torque Boost
Adjustable
Range:

0.00 to 1.00

Proprieties:

V/f

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory 0.00
Setting:

23 V/f Control

Description:
The Automatic Torque Boost compensates the voltage drop on the stator resistance in function of the motor active
current.
The criteria for adjusting P0137 are the same as for the parameter P0136.

9

9-2

Scalar Control (V/f)

P0007
P0136
IxR

Speed Reference

Voltage Applied to
the Motor

P0137
Automatic
IxR

Active Output
Current
P0139

Figure 9.3 - Torque Boost block diagram

Output Voltage

nominal

1/2 nominal

Compensation
Zone
Nnom/2

Nnom

Speed

Figure 9.4 - Effect of P0137 on the V/f curve (P0202=0…2)

P0138 – Slip Compensation
Adjustable
Range:

-10.0 to +10.0 %

Proprieties:

V/f

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory 0.0 %
Setting:

23 V/f Control

Description:
The parameter P0138 is used in the motor slip compensation function, when adjusted to positive values. In this
case it compensates the drop in the speed due to the application of load to the motor shaft. It increases the output
frequency in function of the increase in the motor active current.
The setting of P0138 allows regulating the slip compensation precisely. Once P0138 is adjusted the inverter will
keep the speed constant even with load variations by adjusting the voltage and frequency automatically.
Negative values are used in special applications where one wants to reduce the output speed in function of the
increase in the motor current.
E.g.: Load distribution in motors operated in parallel.

9

9-3

Scalar Control (V/f)

Total Reference
(Refer to figure 9.1)

Speed

Output
Active
Current

∆f

Slip Compensation
p0139

P0138

Figure 9.5 - Slip compensation block diagram

Output Voltage
Vnom

∆V

∆F

(function of
the motor
load)

Nnom

Speed

Figure 9.6 - V/f curve with slip compensation

For the adjustment of the parameter P0138 to compensate the motor slip:
a) Run the motor with no load at approximately half the working speed;
b) Measure the motor or equipment speed with a tachometer;
c) Apply rated load to the equipment;
d) Increase the content of P0138 until the speed reaches the value measured before with no load.

P0139 – Output Current Filter (Active)

9

Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 16.0 s

Proprieties:

V/f and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory 0.2 s
Setting:

23 V/f Control

Description:
It sets the active current filter time constant.
It is used in the Automatic Torque Boost and Slip Compensation functions. Refer to the figures 9.3 and 9.5.
It sets the response time of the Slip Compensation and of the Automatic Torque Boost. Refer to the figures 9.3
and 9.5

9-4

Scalar Control (V/f)

P0140 – Dwell Time at Start
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 10.0 s

Factory 0.0 s
Setting:

P0141 – Dwell Speed at Start
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 300 rpm

Factory 90 rpm
Setting:

Proprieties:

V/f and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
23 V/f Control

Description:
P0140 sets the time during which the speed is kept constant during the acceleration. Refer to the figure 9.7.
P0141 sets the speed step during the acceleration. Refer to the figure 9.7.
By means of these parameters it is possible to introduce a speed step during the acceleration, helping the starting of
high torque loads.
Speed

p0141

p0140

Time

Figure 9.7 - Acceleration speed profile as a function of P0140 and P0141

NOTE!

The accommodation time will be considered null when the Flying Start function is active
(P0320 = 1 or 2).

P0202 – Type of Control
Adjustable
Range:

0=V/f 60 Hz
1=V/f 50 Hz
2=V/f Adjustable
3=Sensorless
4=Encoder
5=VVW (Voltage Vector WEG)

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

0
(1)

9

23 V/f Control

9-5

Scalar Control (V/f)

Description:
In order to get an overview of the control types, as well as orientation to choose the most suitable type for the
application, refer to the chapter 8 of the CFW-11 User Manual.
For the V/f mode, select P0202=0, 1 or 2:
Parameter P0202 setting for the V/f mode:
 P0202=0 for motors with rated frequency=60 Hz;
 P0202=1 for motors with rated frequency=50 Hz.
Notes:
 The correct setting of P0400 assures the application of the correct V/f ratio at the output, in case of
50 Hz or 60 Hz motors with voltage different from the inverter input voltage.
 P0202=2: for special motors with rated frequency different from 50 Hz or 60 Hz, or for the adjustment
of special V/f curve profiles. Example: the approximation of a quadratic V/f curve for energy saving in
variable torque loads like centrifuge pumps and fans.

9.2 Adjustable V/f Curve [24]
P0142 – Maximum Output Voltage
P0143 – Intermediate Output Voltage
P0144 – 3Hz Output Voltage
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 100.0 %

Factory P0142=100.0 %
Setting: P0143=50.0 %
P0144=8.0 %

P0145 – Field Weakening Speed
P0146 – Intermediate Speed
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Proprieties:

Adj and CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory P0145=1800 rpm
Setting: P0146=900 rpm

24 Adjust. V/f Curve

Description:
This function allows the adjustment of the curve that links output voltage and frequency by means of parameters, as
presented by the figure 9.8, in V/f mode.

9

It is necessary when the used motor has a rated frequency different from 50 Hz or 60 Hz, or when a quadratic V/f
curve, for energy saving in the operation of centrifuge pumps and fans, is desired, or even in special applications,
such as, for instance, when a transformer is used at the inverter output, between it and the motor.

9-6

Scalar Control (V/f)
The function is activated with P0202=2 (Adjustable V/f).
The factory setting of P0144 (8.0 %) is adequate for standard motors with rated frequency of 60 Hz. When using
a motor with rated frequency (adjusted in P0403) different from 60 Hz, the default value for P0144 may become
inadequate, being able to cause difficulties in the motor starting. A good approximation for the setting of P0144 is
given by the formula:
p0144 =

3
x p0142
p0403

If it is necessary to increase the starting torque, increase gradually the value of P0144.
Output
Voltage

Line rated voltage

100 %
P0142
P0202=2
P0143

P0144
Speed/Frequency
0.1 Hz

3 Hz

P0146

P0145

P0134

Figure 9.8 - V/f curve in function of P0142 to P0146

9.3 V/f Current Limitation [26]
P0135 – Maximum Output Current
Adjustable
Range:

0.2 to 2xInom-HD

Proprieties:

V/f e VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory 1.5xInom-HD
Setting:

26 V/f Current Limit

P0344 – Current Limitation Configuration
Adjustable
Range:

0=Hold -FL ON
1=Decel. -FL ON
2=Hold -FL OFF
3=Decel. -FL OFF

Proprieties:

V/f, CFG and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

1

26 V/f Current Limit

9

9-7

Scalar Control (V/f)

Description:
It is the current limitation for the V/f control with actuation mode defined by P0344 (refer to the table 9.1) and the
current limit defined by P0135.
Table 9.1 - Current limitation configuration
P0344

Function

Description

0 = Hold - FL ON

Current limitation of the “Ramp Hold” type
Active fast current limitation

Current limitation according to the figure 9.9(a)
Fast current limitation at the value 1.9 x InomHD active

1 = Decel. - FL ON

Current limitation of the “Ramp Deceleration” type
Active fast current limitation

Current limitation according to the figure 9.9(b)
Fast current limitation at the value 1.9 x InomHD active

2 = Hold - FL OFF

Current limitation of the “Ramp Hold” type
Inactive fast current limitation

Current limitation according to the figure 9.9(a)

3 = Decel.- FL OFF

Current limitation of the “Ramp Deceleration” type
Inactive fast current limitation

Current limitation according to the figure 9.9(b)

Current limitation of the “Ramp Hold” type:
 It avoids the stalling of the motor during a torque overload at the acceleration or at the deceleration.
 Working: if the motor current exceeds the value adjusted in P0135 during the acceleration or the
deceleration, the speed will no longer be increased (acceleration) or decreased (deceleration). When the
motor current reaches a value below P0135 the motor will again accelerate or decelerate. Refer to the
figure 9.9(a).
 It acts faster than the “Ramp Deceleration” mode.
 It acts in the motorization and braking modes.

Current limitation of the “Ramp Deceleration” type:
 It avoids the stalling of the motor during a torque overload at the acceleration or at constant speed.
 Working: if the motor current exceeds the value adjusted in P0135, the input of the speed ramp is set
to zero forcing a deceleration. When the motor current reaches a value below P0135 the motor will
accelerate again. Refer to the figure 9.9(b).
Fast current limitation:
 It reduces the inverter output voltage instantaneously when the motor current reaches the value of
1.9xInomHD.

9

9-8

Scalar Control (V/f)

Motor current

Motor current
p0135

p0135

Time

Time

Speed

Speed

Deceleration
via ramp
(P0101)

Acceleration
via ramp
(P0100)

Time
During acceleration

Time
During deceleration

(a) “Ramp Hold”

Motor current
Time

P0135

Time

Speed
Decelerates
via ramp P0101

Time
(b) “Ramp Deceleration”

Figure 9.9 - Current limitation via P0135 working modes

9

9-9

Scalar Control (V/f)

9.4 V/f DC Voltage Limitation [27]
There are two functions in the inverter for limiting the DC link voltage during the motor braking. They act limiting
the braking torque and power, avoiding therefore the tripping of the inverter by overvoltage (F022).
The overvoltage on the DC link is more common when a load with high inertia is driven or when a short
deceleration time is programmed.

NOTE!

When using the dynamic braking the function "Ramp Hold" or "Ramp Acceleration" must be disabled.
Refer to the P0151 description.

In the V/f mode, there are two types of function to limit the DC link voltage:
1 – “Ramp Hold”:
It is effective only during the deceleration.
Working: When the DC link voltage reaches the level adjusted in P0151, a command is sent to the “ramp”
block, which inhibits the motor speed variation (“ramp hold”). Refer to the figures 9.10 and 9.11.
With this function an optimized deceleration time (minimum possible) for the driven load is obtained.
The use is recommended for loads running with high inertia moment referenced to the motor shaft, or loads
with medium inertia, which require short deceleration ramps.

error

DC link
Voltage (Ud)

Error < 0: Ramp Hold =inactive
Error ≥ 0: Ramp Hold=active

Ramp Hold

p0151
Output

Input

Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp

Figure 9.10 - Limitation of the DC link voltage using Ramp Hold function block diagram

9

9-10

Scalar Control (V/f)

DC Link Voltage (P0004)

F022 – Overvoltage
DC Link Regulation

P0151
Nominal Ud

Time

Output
Speed
Time

Figure 9.11 - Example of the DC link voltage limitation working with the Ramp Hold function

2 - Ramp Acceleration:
It is effective in any situation, regardless of the motor speed condition, accelerating, decelerating or at
constant speed.
Working: the DC link voltage is compared with the value adjusted in P0151, the difference between these
signals is multiplied by the proportional gain (P0152) and the result is added to the ramp output. Refer to
the figures 9.12 and 9.13.
In a similar manner as the Ramp Hold, with this function an optimized deceleration time (minimum possible)
for the driven load is also obtained.
The use is recommended for loads that require braking torques in constant speed situation. Example: driving
of loads with eccentric shafts such as the existent in pumpjacks.

P0152
DC Link

Speed

Voltage (Ud)

P0151

Ramp Output

Figure 9.12 - Limitation of the DC link voltage using Ramp Hold function block diagram

9

9-11

Scalar Control (V/f)

DC Link Voltage (P0004)
P0151
Nominal Ud

f022-Overvoltage
DC Link Regulation

Voltage ud
(p0004)
Time

Output
Speed

Time

Figure 9.13 - Example of the DC link voltage limitation working with the Ramp Acceleration function

P0150 – DC Regulator Type (V/f)
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Ramp Hold
1 = Ramp Acceleration

Proprieties:

V/f, CFG and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

0

Factory
Setting:

400 V
800 V
800 V
800 V
800 V
1000 V
1000 V
1000 V
1200 V

27 V/f DC Volt. Limit.

Description:
It selects the DC link voltage limitation function type in the V/f mode.

P0151 – DC Link Voltage Regulation Acting Level (V/f)
Adjustable
Range:

339 to 400 V (P0296=0)
585 to 800 V (P0296=1)
585 to 800 V (P0296=2)
585 to 800 V (P0296=3)
585 to 800 V (P0296=4)
809 to 1000 V (P0296=5)
809 to 1000 V (P0296=6)
924 to 1200 V (P0296=7)
924 to 1200 V (P0296=8)

Proprieties:

V/f and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

9

9-12

27 V/f DC Volt. Limit.

Scalar Control (V/f)

Description:
It is the actuation level of the DC link voltage limitation function for the V/f mode.
Setting of P0151 value:
a) The P0151 factory setting leaves inactive the DC link voltage limitation function for the V/f mode. In order
to activate it, one must reduce the value of P0151 as suggested in the table 9.2.
Table 9.2 - Recommended actuation levels for the DC link regulation
Inverter
Vnom

220/230 V

380 V

400/415 V

440/460 V

480 V

500/525 V

550/575 V

600 V

660/690 V

P0296
P0151

0
375 V

1
618 V

2
675 V

3
748 V

4
780 V

5
893 V

6
972 V

7
972 V

8
1174 V

b) In case DC link overvoltage (F022) keeps happening during the deceleration, reduce the value of P0151
gradually or increase the deceleration ramp time (P0101 and/or P0103).
c) If the supply line is permanently at a voltage level that results in a DC link voltage higher than the P0151
setting, it will not be possible to decelerate the motor. In this case, reduce the line voltage or increase
the value of the P0151 setting.
d) If, even with the procedures above, it is not possible to decelerate the motor in the necessary time, use
the dynamic braking (Refer to the section 14).

P0152 – DC Link Voltage Regulator Proportional Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.00 to 9.99

Proprieties:

V/f and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory 1.50
Setting:

27 V/f DC Volt. Limit.

Description:
It defines the DC Link Voltage Regulator proportional gain (refer to the figure 9.12).
P0152 multiplies the DC link voltage error, i.e., Error = actual DC link voltage – (P0151), and it is normally used
to prevent overvoltage in applications with eccentric loads.

9.5 Start-up in the V/f Control Mode
NOTE!

Read the whole CFW-11 User Manual before installing, powering or operating the inverter.

9

Sequence for installation, verification, powering and start-up:
a) Install the inverter: according to the chapter 3 – Installation and Connection of the CFW-11 User Manual,
wiring all the power and control connections.

9-13

Scalar Control (V/f)

b) Prepare the inverter and apply power: according to the section 5.1 of the CFW-11 User Manual.
c) Adjust the password P0000=5: according to the section 5.3 of this manual.
d) Adjust the inverter to operate with the application line and motor: execute the Oriented Start-up
routine according to the section 5.2.2 of the CFW-11 User Manual. Refer to the section 11.7 (Motor Data)
of this manual.
e) Setting of specific parameters and functions for the application: program the digital and analog
inputs and outputs, HMI keys, etc., according to the application needs.
For applications:
- That are simple, which can use the factory settings programming for the digital and analog inputs and
outputs, use the Menu “Basic Application”. Refer to the section 5.2.3 of the CFW-11 User Manual.
- That require only the digital and analog inputs and outputs with programming different from the factory
settings, use the Menu “I/O Configuration”.
- That need functions as Flying Start, Ride-Through, DC Braking, Dynamic Braking, etc., access and modify
those functions parameters by means of the Menu “Parameter Groups”.

9

9-14

VVW Control

VVW CONTROL
The VVW (Voltage Vector WEG) control mode uses a control method with intermediate performance between
V/f and Sensorless Vector. Refer to the figure 10.1 block diagram.
The main advantage compared to the V/f control is the better speed regulation with higher torque capability at
low speeds (frequencies below 5 Hz), allowing a sensible improvement of the inverter performance in permanent
regimen. Comparing to the Sensorless Vector, the settings are simpler and easier.
The VVW control uses the stator current measurement, the stator resistance value (that can be obtained with the
self-tuning routine) and the induction motor nameplate data to perform automatically the torque estimation, the
output voltage compensation and consequently the slip compensation, replacing the function of the parameters
P0137 and P0138.
In order to obtain a good speed regulation in permanent regimen, the slip frequency is calculated based on
the load estimated torque, which considers the existent motor data.

10

10-1

10

10-2

Reference
(Refer to
Figure 13.9)

P0151

P0100-P0104

Hold

t

P0151 Ud

Ud

Figure 10.1 - VVW control block diagram
P0403

Ud

P0404, P0399,
P0401, P0409,
P0402, P0403

P0133

P0134

DC Voltage
Regulation

P0202=5 (VVW Control)

t

TL/TR, sR

Fslip Calculation

+ f
slip

Torque Estimation

Filter

+

fo
la
lo
m

fo

fo
la

lo

Flux Control

P0400, P0403,
P0401, P0407,
P0409, P0178

m*

m

P0295

fo

m

lo

Io Calculation

P0295

la

Ia Calculation

Output Voltage
Compensation

Ud

iv , iw

iv , iw

Space Vector
Modulation
PWM

Speed Direction

PWM

iv , iw

lo
MI
3Ø

Ud

Line

VVW Control

VVW Control
10.1 VVW Control [25]
The parameter group [25] – VVW Control – contains only 5 parameters related to that function: P0139, P0140,
P0141, P0202 and P0397.
However, since the parameters P0139, P0140, P0141 and P0202 were already presented in the section 9.1,
only the parameter P0397 will be described next.

P0397 – Slip Compensation During Regeneration
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Inactive
1 = Active

Proprieties:

CFG and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

1

25 VVW Control

Description:
It enables or disables the slip compensation during the regeneration in the VVW control mode. Refer to the parameter
P0138 in the section 9.1 for more details on the slip compensation.

10.2 Motor Data [43]
The parameters for the used motor data setting are listed in this group. They must be adjusted according to
the motor nameplate data (P0398 to P0406, except P0405) and by means of the Self-Tuning or from data
of the motor data sheet (other parameters).
In this section only the parameters P0399 and P0407 will be presented, the others are presented in the
section 11.7.

P0398 – Motor Service Factor
Refer to the section 11.7 for more information.

P0399 – Motor Rated Efficiency
Adjustable
Range:

50.0 to 99.9 %

Proprieties:

CFG and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

67.0 %

43 Motor Data

Description:
It sets the motor rated efficiency.
This parameter is important for the VVW control precise operation. The inaccurate setting implies in incorrect
calculation of the slip compensation and consequently an imprecise speed control.

10-3

10

VVW Control

P0400 – Motor Rated Voltage
P0401 – Motor Rated Current
P0402 – Motor Rated Speed
P0403 – Motor Rated Frequency
P0404 – Motor Rated Power
P0406 – Motor Ventilation
Refer to the section 11.7 for more information.

P0407 – Motor Rated Power Factor
Adjustable
Range:

0.50 to 0.99 %

Proprieties:

CFG and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

0.68 %

43 Motor Data

Description:
It is the motor power factor setting, according to the motor nameplate data (cos Ø).
This parameter is important for the VVW control operation. The inaccurate setting will imply in incorrect calculation
of the slip compensation.
The default value of this parameter is adjusted automatically when the parameter P0404 is changed. The suggested
value is valid for three-phase, IV pole WEG motors. For other motor types the setting must be done manually.

P0408– Run Self-Tuning
P0409 – Motor Stator Resistance (Rs)
P0410 – Motor Magnetizing Current (Im)
Refer to the section 11.8.5 for more information.

10.3 VVW Control Mode Start-up
NOTE!

Read the whole CFW-11 User Manual before installing, powering or operating the inverter.

10

Sequence for installation, verification, powering and start-up:
a) Install the inverter: according to the chapter 3 – Installation and Connection of the CFW-11 User Manual,
wiring all the power and control connections.

10-4

VVW Control
b) Prepare the inverter and apply power: according to the section 5.1 of the CFW-11 User Manual.
c) Adjust the password P0000=5: according to the section 5.3 of this manual.
d) Adjust the inverter to operate with the application line and motor: by means of the “Oriented Start-up”
Menu access P0317 and change its content to 1, which makes the inverter initiate the “Oriented Start-up”
routine.
The “Oriented Start-up” routine presents on the keypad (HMI) the main parameters in a logical sequence. The
setting of these parameters prepares the inverter for operation with the application line and motor. Verify the
step by step sequence in the figure 10.2.
The setting of the parameters presented in this operation mode results in the automatic modification of the
content of other inverter parameters and/or internal variables, as indicated in the figure 10.2. In this way one
gets a stable operation of the control circuit with adequate values to obtain the best motor performance.
During the “Oriented Start-up” routine the “Config” (Configuration) status will be indicated on the top left part
of the keypad (HMI).
Parameters related to the motor:
- Program the contents of parameters from P0398 to P0407 directly with the motor nameplate data. Refer
to the section 11.7 (Motor Data).
- Options for the setting of parameter P0409:
I – Automatic by the inverter, performing the self-tuning routine selected in P0408.
II – From the motor test data sheet, supplied by the manufacturer. Refer to the section 11.7.1 in this
manual.
III – Manually, copying the parameters content of another CFW-11 that runs an identical motor.
e) Setting of specific parameters and functions for the application: program the digital and analog
inputs and outputs, HMI keys, etc., according to the application needs.
For applications:
- That are simple, which can use the factory settings programming for the digital and analog inputs and
outputs, use the Menu “Basic Application”. Refer to the section 5.2.3 of the CFW-11 User Manual.
- That require only the digital and analog inputs and outputs with programming different from the factory
settings, use the Menu “I/O Configuration”.
-That need functions as Flying Start, Ride-Through, DC Braking, Dynamic Braking, etc., access and modify
those function parameters by means of the Menu “Parameter Groups”.

10

10-5

VVW Control

Seq.

Action/Result

Display Indication
Ready

- Monitoring Mode.
1

0
0.0
0.0

- Press “ Menu ”
(right "soft key").

Seq.

- Set the content of P0202
pressing “Select”.

Menu

9

2

- The group “00 ALL

Ready

PARAMETERS” is already

00
01
02
03

selected.

3

- The group “01

Ready

PARAMETER GROUPS” is

00
01
02
03

selected.

0rpm

LOC

13:48

to the used line voltage.
Therefore press “Select”.
10

- The group “02

This change will affect

4

5

then selected.

00
01
02
03

- Press “Select”.

Return

- The parameter

Ready

“Oriented Start-up

Oriented Start-up
P0317: No

ORIENTED START-UP” is

P0317:No” is already

P0321, P0322, P0323 and

0rpm

LOC

ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS
ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS
13:48

Ready

- The content of
6

Therefore press “Select”.

Select

11

0rpm

LOC

P0156, P0157, P0158,
P0401 and P0404. The
actuation time and level

P0317

of the IGBTs overload

showed.

Oriented Start-up
[000] No

protection will be affected.

13:48

- The content of the

Ready

parameter is changed to

P0317

“P0317 = [001] Yes”

Return

Save

Config

0rpm

LOC

Type of Control
P0202: VVW
Line Rated Voltage
P0296: 440 - 460 V
Reset

13:48

Select

Config

0rpm

LOC

Line Rated Voltage
P0296: 440 - 460 V
Application
P0298: Normal Duty
Reset

13:48

Select

- If necessary, change the

0rpm

LOC

13:48

13:48

Save

content of P0398 according
to the motor service factor.

Oriented Start-up
[001] Yes

- Press “Save”.

Type of Control
[005] VVW

to the inverter application.

“P0317 = [000] No” is

Return

7

13:48

P0202

content of P0298 according

This change will affect
Return

0rpm

LOC

- If necessary, change the

0rpm

selected.
- Press “Select”.

Select

P0400.

Select

LOC

Config

13:48

content of P0296 according

P0151, P0153, P0185,
Ready

Reset

- If necessary, change the

0rpm

Select

0rpm

LOC

Language
P0201: English
Type of Control
P0202: V/f 60Hz

Return

Select

LOC

13:48

until

selecting the option "[005]
“Save”.

ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS
ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS

Return

- Next press
VVW", and then press

ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS
ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS

Return

Display Indication
Config

rpm
A
Hz

13:48

Action/Result

0rpm

LOC

Therefore press “Select”.

Save

12

- In this moment the

This change will affect the
value of the current and the

Oriented Start-up routine is

time for the actuation of the

initiated and the “Config”

motor overload protection.

Config

LOC

0rpm

Application
P0298: Normal Duty
Motor Service Factor
P0398:
1.15
Reset

13:48

Select

status is indicated at the
top left part of the keypad
(HMI).

- If necessary, change the

- The parameter

Config

“Language P0201:
8

LOC

0rpm

Language
P0201: English
Type of Control
P0202: V/f 60Hz

English” is already
selected.
- If necessary, change

Reset

13:48

13

content of P0399 according

Config

to the rated motor

Motor Service Factor
P0398:
1.15
Motor Rated Eff.
P0399:
67.0 %

efficiency. Therefore press
“Select”.

Select

the language by pressing
“Select”, next

e

to select the language and

10

then press “Save”.

Figure 10.2 - VVW mode Oriented Start-up

10-6

Reset

LOC

13:48

0rpm

Select

VVW Control

Seq.

14

Action/Result

Display Indication

Seq.

Action/Result

- If necessary, change the

- If necessary, change the

content of P0400 according

content of P0406 according

to the motor rated voltage.

Config

Therefore press “Select”.

Motor Rated Eff.
P0399:
67.0 %
Motor Rated Voltage
P0400:
440 V

This change corrects the
output voltage by the factor
x = P0400/P0296.

Reset

LOC

13:48

0rpm

19

Select

Display Indication

to the motor ventilation

Config

type. Therefore press

Motor Rated Power
P0404:
7.5 hp
Motor Ventilation
P0406: Self-Vent.

“Select”.
This change will affect

Reset

0rpm

LOC

13:48

Select

P0156, P0157, P0158,
P0399, and P0407.
If necessary, change the
content of P0407 according

- If necessary, change the
content of P0401 according
to the motor rated current.
15

Therefore press “Select”.
This change will affect
P0156, P0157, P0158 and

Config

LOC

0rpm

20

Motor Rated Voltage
P0400:
440V
Motor Rated Current
P0401:
13.5 A
Reset

13:48

to the motor rated power
factor. Therefore press
“Select”.

- At this point the keypad

Select

P0410.

(HMI) presents the option
for running the “Selftuning”. Whenever it is
possible, one must run the

- If necessary, change the

Self-tuning.

content of P0402 according

16

to the motor rated speed.

Config

Therefore press “Select”.

Motor Rated Current
P0401:
13.5A
Motor Rated Speed
P0402:
1750 rpm

This change will affect
P0122 to P0131, P0133,
P0134, P0182, P0208,

Reset

LOC

13:48

0rpm

21

- Thus, press “Select”

Config

0rpm

LOC

Motor Ventilation
P0406: Self-Vent.
Motor Rated Power Fac
P0407:
0.68
Reset

Config

13:48

Select

0rpm

LOC

Motor Rated Power Fac
P0407:
0.68
Run Self-Tuning
P0408: No
Reset
Ready

13:09

Select
0rpm

LOC

to access the parameter

P0408

P0408 and then

Run Self-Tuning
[001] No Rotation

to select the option “[001]

Return

13:48

Save

No Rotation”. Refer to the

Select

section 11.8.5 for more

P0288 and P0289.

details.
- Next press “Save”.
- After this the Self-tuning

- If necessary, change the
content of P0403 according
to the motor rated
17

frequency. Therefore press
“Select”. This change will
affect P0402.

routine is initiated and the
Config

LOC

Reset

13:08

“SelfTun” status is indicated

0rpm

Motor Rated Speed
P0402:
1750 rpm
Motor Rated Frequency
P0403:
60 Hz

at the top left part of the

SelfTun

keypad (HMI).
22

- The keypad (HMI)

0rpm

LOC

P0409
Estimating Rs

will initiate the routine

Select

13:48

presenting “P0409
Estimating Rs”. Wait until
the end of the Self-tuning

- If necessary, change the

18

content of P0404 according

Config

to the motor rated power.

Motor Rated Frequency
P0403:
60 Hz
Motor Rated Power
P0404:
7.5 hp

Therefore press “Select”.
This change will affect
P0410.

Reset

LOC

13:48

routine.

0rpm

Select

- Once the Self-tuning
routine has finished, the
23

inverter returns to the
Monitoring Mode and it is
ready to operate.

Ready

0rpm

LOC

0
0.0
0.0

rpm
A
Hz

13:48

Menu

Figure 10.2 - VVW mode Oriented Start-up (cont.)

10

10-7

VVW Control

10

10-8

Vector Control

VECTOR CONTROL
It consists in the control type based on the separation of the motor current into two components:
 Flux producing current Id (oriented with the motor electromagnetic flux);
 Torque producing current Iq (perpendicular to the motor flux vector).
The Id current is related to the motor electromagnetic flux, while the Iq current is directly related to the torque
produced at the motor shaft. With this strategy one gets the so called decoupling, i.e., one can control the
motor flux and torque independently by controlling the Id and Iq currents respectively.
Since these currents are represented by vectors that rotate at the synchronous speed, when observed from a
stationary referential, a referential transformation is done so that they are changed to the synchronous referential.
In the synchronous referential these values become DC values proportional the respective vector amplitudes.
This simplifies considerably the control circuit.
When the Id vector is aligned with the motor flux, it can be said that the vector control is orientated. Therefore it
is necessary that the motor parameters be correctly adjusted. Some of those parameters must be programmed
with the motor nameplate data and others obtained automatically through self-tuning or from the motor data
sheet supplied by the manufacturer.
The figure 11.2 presents the block diagram for the vector control with encoder and the figure 11.1 for the
sensorless vector control. The information of the speed, as well as of the currents measured by the inverter, will
be used to obtain the correct vector orientation. In the vector with encoder control case, the speed is obtained
directly from the encoder signal, while in the sensorless vector control there is an algorithm which estimates the
speed, based in the output currents and voltages.
The vector control measures the current, separates the flux and torque portions and transforms these variables to
the synchronous referential. The motor control is accomplished by imposing the desired currents and comparing
them with the actual values.

11.1 Sensorless Control and with Encoder
The Sensorless Vector Control is recommended for the majority of the applications, because it allows the
operation in a speed variation range of 1:100, accuracy in the speed control of 0.5 % of the rated speed, high
starting torque and fast dynamic response.
Another advantage of this control type is the greater robustness against sudden line voltage and load changes,
avoiding unnecessary overcurrent trips.
The necessary settings for the good operation of the sensorless vector control are done automatically. Therefore
the used motor must be connected to the CFW-11 inverter.

11-1

11

11

Total Reference
(refer to the
figure 13.8)

11-2

Figure 11.1 - Sensorless vector control block diagram

Ud

Usd, Usq

P0190

P0185

Gp = P0188
Gi = P0189

Maximum Output
Voltage Regulator

ψ*

Gd = P0166

t

Gp = P0161
Gi = P0162

n

Speed Regulator

Gp = 1.00
Gi = 0.00

Gp = P0186
Gi = P0187

DC Link Regulator

+

Torque

Iq*

Gp = P0175
Gi = P0176

P0179

Id*

Id

Iq

Id

Iq

Id

Flux
Current

Iq
MOTOR
model

Gp = P0167
Gi = P0168

Current Regulator

Torque
Current

N Estimated Speed

ψ Stator Flux

R.T. = On
(refer to the Max FW = P0169
figure 12.8) Max REV = P0170

Flux Regulator

Speed

R.T.=OFF

DIx = 15 (Speed/Torque)

AIx = 2 – Max. Torque Current

P01853 and when the Control Mode is Sensorless
Vector (P0202=3).
The operation at the low speed region may present instability. In this region the motor operation voltage is also
very low, being difficult to be measured accurately.
In order to keep a stable operation of the inverter in that region, the automatic commutation occurs, from
sensorless mode to the so called I/f mode, which is a scalar control with imposed current. Scalar control with
imposed current means a current control with a constant reference value, adjusted in a parameter and controlling
only the frequency in an open loop.
The parameter P0182 defines the speed below which the transition to I/f mode occurs and the parameter P0183
defines the value of the current to be applied to the motor.
The minimum speed recommended for the operation of the Sensorless Vector Mode is 18 rpm for 60 Hz IV pole
motors, and 15 rpm for 50 Hz IV pole motors. If P0182≤3 rpm the inverter will always operate in Sensorless
Vector mode, i.e., the I/f function will be disabled.

11.3 Self-Tuning
Some motor parameters that are not available on the motor nameplate, necessary for the operation of the
sensorless vector or vector with encoder control, are estimated: stator resistance, motor flux leakage inductance,
rotor time constant Tr , the rated magnetizing current of the motor and the mechanic time constant of the motor and
the driven load. These parameters are estimated with the application of voltages and currents to the motor.
The parameters related to the regulators used by the vector control, as well as other control parameters, are
adjusted automatically in function of the motor parameters estimated through the self-tuning routine. The best
self-tuning results are obtained with a preheated motor.
The parameter P0408 controls the self-tuning routine. Depending on the chosen option some parameters can
be obtained from tables that are valid for WEG motors.
In the option P0408=1 (No Rotation) the motor remains stopped throughout the self-tuning. The magnetizing
current value (P0410) is obtained from a table, valid for WEG motors up to 12 poles.
In the option P0408=2 (Run for Im) the value of P0410 is estimated with the motor rotating and the load
decoupled from the motor shaft.
In the option P0408=3 (Run for Tm) the value of P0413 (Mechanic time constant – Tm) is estimated with the
motor rotating. It must be done, preferably, with the load coupled to the motor.

11

11-5

Vector Control

NOTE!

Every time that P0408=1 or 2 the parameter P0413 (Mechanic time constant – Tm) will be adjusted
for a value close to the motor rotor mechanic time constant. Therefore, the motor rotor inertia (table
data valid for WEG motors), the inverter rated voltage and current, are taken into consideration
P0408=2 (Run for Im) in the vector with encoder mode (P0202=4): After finishing the self-tuning
routine, couple the load to the motor and set P0408=4 (Estimate Tm). In this case P0413 will be
estimated taking into account also the driven load.
If the option P0408=2 (Run for Im) is executed with the load coupled to the motor, an incorrect value
of P0410 (Im) may be estimated. This will implicate in estimation error for P0412 (rotor time constant
- Tr) and for P0413 (mechanic time constant – Tm). Overcurrent fault (F071) may also occur during
the inverter operation.
Note: The term “load” includes everything that might be coupled to the motor shaft, for instance,
gearbox, inertia disk, etc.
In the option P0408=4 (Estimate Tm) the self-tuning routine estimates only the P0413 (Mechanic
time constant – Tm) value, with the motor rotating. It must be done, preferably, with the load coupled
to the motor.
During its execution, the self-tuning routine can be canceled by pressing the
the values of P0409 through P0413 be all different from zero.

key, provided that

For more details on the self-tuning parameters, refer to the section 11.8.5 in this manual.
Alternatives for the acquisition of the motor parameters:
Instead of running the self-tuning, it is possible to obtain the values for P0409 to P0412 in the following
manner:
- From the motor test data sheet that can be supplied by its manufacturer. Refer to the section 11.7 of this
manual.
- Manually, by copying the contents of the parameters from another CFW-11 inverter that uses an identical
motor.

11.4 Optimal Flux for Sensorless Vector Control
NOTE!

Active function only on the Sensorless Vector mode (P0202=3), if P0406=2.

The Optimal Flux function can be used for driving some types of WEG motors (*) making it possible the operation
at low speed with rated torque without the need of forced ventilation on the motor. The frequency range for
operation is 12:1, i.e., from 5 Hz to 60 Hz for 60 Hz rated frequency motors and from 4.2 Hz to 50 Hz for
50 Hz rated frequency motors.

NOTE!

11

(*) WEG motors that can be used with the Optimal Flux function: Nema Premium Efficiency, Nema
High Efficiency, IEC Premium Efficiency, IEC Top Premium Efficiency and “Alto Rendimento Plus”.

11-6

Vector Control
When this function is activating, the motor flux is controlled in a way to reduce their electric losses on slow
speeds. That flux is dependent of the torque current filtered (P0009). The Optimal Flux function is unnecessary
in motors with independent ventilation.

11.5	Torque Control
In vector control modes sensorless or with encoder, it is possible to use the inverter in torque control mode
instead of using it in speed control mode. In this case the speed regulator must be kept saturated and the
imposed torque value is defined by the torque limits in P0169/P0170.
Performance of the torque control:
Vector control with encoder:
Torque control range: 10 % to 180 %;
Accuracy: ± 5 % of the rated torque.
Sensorless vector control:
Torque control range: 20 % to 180 %;
Accuracy: ± 10 % of the rated torque;
Minimum operating frequency: 3 Hz.
When the speed regulator is positively saturated, i.e., forward speed direction defined in P0223/P0226, the
value for the torque current limitation is adjusted in P0169. When the speed regulator is negatively saturated,
i.e., reverse speed direction, the value for the torque current limitation is adjusted in P0170.
The torque at the motor shaft (Tmotor) in % is given by the formula:
(*) The formula described next must be used for Forward Torque. For Reverse Torque replace P0169 by
P0170.

Tmotor =

p0401 x p0169* x k
100
(p0401) 2 - P0410 x p0178
100

x 100
2

Being:
Nnom = motor synchronous speed,
N = actual motor speed

K=

1 for N ≤ P0190 x Nnom
P0400
Nnom x p0190 for N > P0190 x Nnom
N
P0400
P0400

11

11-7

Vector Control
NOTE!

For torque control in the sensorless vector mode (P0202=3), observe:
- The torque limits (P0169/P0170) must be higher than 30 % to assure the motor starting. After the start
and with the motor rotating above 3 Hz, they can be reduced, if necessary, to values below 30 %.
- For torque control applications with frequencies until to 0 Hz, use the vector with encoder control
mode (P0202=4).
- In the vector with encoder control type set the speed regulator for the mode “optimized for torque
control” (P0160=1), besides keeping it saturated.

NOTE!

The motor rated current must be equivalent to the CFW-11 rated current, in order that the torque
control has the best possible accuracy.

Settings for the torque control:
Torque limitation:
1. Via parameters P0169, P0170 (through the keypad (HMI), Serial or Fieldbus). Refer to the section
11.8.6;
2. Through the analog inputs AI1, AI2, AI3 or AI4. Refer to the section 13.1.1, option 2 (maximum torque
current).
Speed reference:
3. Set the speed reference 10 %, or more, higher than the working speed. This assures that the speed
regulator output remains saturated at the maximum value allowed by the torque limit adjustment.

NOTE!

The torque limitation with the saturated speed regulator has also a protection (limitation) function.
E.g.: for a winder, when the material being wound brakes, the regulator leaves the saturated condition
and starts controlling the motor speed, which will be kept at the speed reference value.

11.6 Optimal Braking
NOTE!

Only activated on the Vector with Encoder mode (P0202=3 or 4), when P0184=0, P0185 is smaller
than the standard value and P0404 < 21 (75 CV).

NOTE!

The occurrence of optimal braking may cause at the motor:
- Increase of the vibration level;
- Increase of the acoustic noise;
- Increase of the temperature.
Verify the impact of those effects in the application before using the optimal braking.

It is a function that helps the motor controlled braking, eliminating in many cases the need of additional braking
IGBT and braking resistor.

11

The Optimal Braking makes it possible braking the motor with a higher torque than the one obtained with
traditional methods, as for instance, the braking by the injection of direct current (DC braking). In the DC
braking case, only the losses in the motor rotor are used to dissipate the energy stored as the mechanic load
11-8

Vector Control
inertia, rejecting the total friction losses. With the Optimal Braking, in the other hand, the total losses in the
motor, as well as the total inverter losses, are used. It is possible to get a braking torque roughly 5 times greater
than with DC braking.
In the figure 11.3 the Torque x Speed curve of a typical 10 hp/7.5 kW IV pole motor is presented. The braking
torque obtained at the rated speed, for an inverter with a torque limit (P0169 and P0170) adjusted in a value equal
to the motor rated torque, is supplied by the TB1 point on the figure 11.3. The value of TB1 is on the function
of the motor efficiency, and it is defined by the following expression, being despised the attrition losses:

TB1 =

1-η
η

Where:
η = motor efficiency
In the 11.3 figure case, the efficiency of the motor for the rated load is η=0.84 (or 84 %), which results in
TB1=0.19 or 19 % of the motor rated torque.
The braking torque, starting from the TB1 point, varies in the inverse ratio of the speed (1/N). At low speeds,
the braking torque reaches the torque limit of the inverter. In the figure 11.3 case, the torque reaches the torque
limitation (100 %) when the speed is less than approximately 20 % of the rated speed.
It is possible to increase the braking torque by increasing the inverter current limitation during the optimal
braking (P0169) – torque in the forward speed direction or P0170 – reverse).
Generally smaller motors have lower efficiency because they present more losses. Therefore, comparatively
higher braking torque is obtained if they are compared to bigger motors.
Examples:

1 hp/0.75 kW, IV poles: η=0.76 resulting in TB1=0.32;
20 hp/15.0 kW, IV poles: η=0.86 resulting in TB1=0.16.
T
Tnom

1.0
(a)

(b)
TB1

0

11

(c)

0

0.2

1.0

2.0

N
nnom

Figure 11.3 - T x N curve for Optimal Braking with a typical 10 hp/7.5 kW motor, driven by an
inverter with the torque adjusted at a value equal to the motor rated torque

11-9

Vector Control
(a) Torque generated by the motor in normal operation, driven by the inverter in the “motor mode” (load
resistant torque).
(b) Braking torque generated by the Optimal Braking use.
(c) Braking torque generated by the DC braking use.

In order to use the Optimal Braking:
(a) Activate the optimal braking by setting P0184=0 (DC Link Regulation Mode=with losses) and set the DC
link regulation level in P0185, as presented in the section 11.8.7, with P0202=3 or 4 and P0404 smaller
than 21 (75hp).
(b) In order to enable and disable the Optimal Braking via a digital input, set one of the inputs (DIx) for “DC
Link Regulation”. (P0263…P0270=25 and P0184=2).
Results:
DIx=24 V (closed): Optimal Braking is active, equivalent to P0184=0.
DIx=0 V (open): Optimal Braking is inactive.

11.7 Motor Data [43]
In this group are listed the parameters for the setting of the used motor data. Adjust them according to the
motor nameplate data (P0398 to P0406), except P0405, and by means of the self-tuning routine or with the
data existent in the motor data sheet (the other parameters). In the Vector Control mode the parameters P0399
and P0407 are not used.

P0398 – Motor Service Factor
Adjustable
Range:

1.00 to 1.50

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

1.00

43 Motor Data

Description:
It is the continuous overload capability, i.e., a reserve of power that gives the motor the capability to withstand
working in adverse conditions.
Set it according to the value informed on the motor nameplate.
It affects the motor overload protection.

P0399 – Motor Rated Efficiency

11

Refer to the section 10.2 for more details.

11-10

Vector Control

P0400 – Motor Rated Voltage
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 690 V

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory 220 V (P0296=0)
Setting: 440 V (P0296=1, 2, 3 or 4)
575 V (P0296=5 or 6)
690 V (P0296=7 or 8)

43 Motor Data

Description:
Set it according to the motor nameplate data and to the motor cable wiring in the connection box.
This value cannot be higher than the rated voltage adjusted in P0296 (Line Rated Voltage).

NOTE!

In order to validate a new P0400 setting out of the Oriented Start-up Routine it is necessary to
cycle the power of the inverter.

P0401 – Motor Rated Current
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 1.3xInom-ND

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

1.0xInom-ND

43 Motor Data

Description:
Set it according to the used motor nameplate data, taking into consideration the motor voltage.
In the Guided Start-up routine the value adjusted in P0401 automatically modifies the parameters related to the
motor overload protection, according to the table 11.2.

P0402 – Motor Rated Speed
Adjustable

0 to 18000 rpm

Range:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

1750 rpm
(1458 rpm)

43 Motor Data

Description:
Set it according to the used motor nameplate data.

11

For V/f and VVW controls the setting is from 0 to 18000 rpm.
For vector control the setting is from 0 to 7200 rpm.

11-11

Vector Control

P0403 – Motor Rated Frequency
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 300 Hz

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory 60 Hz
Setting: (50 Hz)

43 Motor Data

Description:
Set it according to the used motor nameplate data.
For V/f and VVW controls the setting range goes up to 300 Hz.
For vector control the setting range is from 30 Hz to 120 Hz.

P0404 – Motor Rated Power
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 58 (refer to the next table)

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
43 Motor Data

Description:
Set it according to the used motor nameplate data.

11

11-12

Factory
Setting:

Motormax-ND

Vector Control

Table 11.1 - P0404 (Motor Rated Power) setting
P0404

Motor Rated
Power (hp)

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

0.33
0.50
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
5.5
6.0
7.5
10.0
12.5
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
40.0
50.0
60.0
75.0
100.0
125.0
150.0
175.0
180.0
200.0
220.0
250.0

P0404

Motor Rated
Power (hp)

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58

270.0
300.0
350.0
380.0
400.0
430.0
440.0
450.0
475.0
500.0
540.0
600.0
620.0
670.0
700.0
760.0
800.0
850.0
900.0
1000.0
1100.0
1250.0
1400.0
1500.0
1600.0
1800.0
2000.0
2300.0
2500.0

NOTE!

When adjusted via keypad (HMI), this parameter may change the parameter P0329 automatically.
Refer to the section 12.7.2.

P0405 – Number of Encoder Pulses
Adjustable
Range:

100 to 9999 ppr

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory 1024 ppr
Setting:

43 Motor Data

Description:
It sets the number of pulses per rotation (ppr) of the used incremental encoder.

11

11-13

Vector Control

P0406 – Motor Ventilation
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Self-Ventilated
1 = Separate Ventilation
2 = Optimal Flux

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

0

43 Motor Data

Description:
During the Oriented Start-up Routine, the value adjusted in P0406 changes the parameters related to the motor
overload automatically, in the following manner:
Table 11.2 - Motor overload protection modification in function of P0406
P0406
0
1
2

P0156 (Overl.Curr.100 %)
1.05xP0401
1.05xP0401
1.05xP0401

P0157 (Overl.Curr.50 %)
0.9xP0401
1.0xP0401
1.0xP0401

P0158 (Overl.Curr.5 %)
0.5xP0401
1.0xP0401
1.0xP0401

ATTENTION!

Refer to the section 11.4 for more details on the use of option P0406=2 (Optimal Flux).

P0407 – Motor Rated Power Factor
Refer to the section 10.2 for more details.

P0408 – Run Self-Tuning
P0409 – Motor Stator Resistance (Rs)
P0410 – Motor Magnetizing Current (Im)
P0411 – Motor Flux Leakage Inductance (σls)
P0412 – Lr/Rr Constant (Rotor Time Constant – Tr)
P0413 – Tm Constant (Mechanical Time Constant)
Self-Tuning function parameters. Refer to the section 11.8.5.

11.7.1 Adjustment of the Parameters P0409 to P0412 Based on the Motor Data
Sheet
Being in the possession of the motor equivalent circuit data, it is possible to calculate the value to be programmed
in the parameters from P0409 to P0412, instead of using the self-tuning to obtain them.

11

11-14

Vector Control
Input data:
Motor data sheet:
Vn = voltage used in the tests to obtain the motor parameters, in Volts;
fn = frequency used in the tests to obtain the motor parameters, in Hz;
R1= resistance of the motor stator per phase, in Ohms;
R2 = resistance of the motor rotor per phase, in Ohms;
X1 = stator inductive reactance, in Ohms;
X2 = rotor inductive reactance, in Ohms;
Xm = magnetizing inductive reactance, in Ohms;
Io = motor no load current;
ω = angular speed.
ω =2 x π x fn
P0409 =

P0410 =

P0411 =

P0412 =

P0400 x R1
Vn
Vn x Io x 0.95
P0400
P0400 x [X1 +(X2 x Xm)/(X2 + Xm)]
Vn x ω
P0400 x (Xm + X2)
Vn x ω x R2

11.8 Vector Control [29]
11.8.1 Speed Regulator [90]
The parameters related to the CFW-11 speed regulator are presented in this group.

P0160 – Speed Regulator Optimization
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Normal
1 = Saturated

Proprieties:

CFG and Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

0

29 Vector Control
90 Speed Regulator

Description:
Set P0160=1 (Saturated) for torque control in vector mode with encoder. For more details refer to the section 11.5
in this manual.

11-15

11

Vector Control

P0161 – Speed Regulator Proportional Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 63.9

Factory
Setting:

7.4

Factory
Setting:

0.023

P0162 – Speed Regulator Integral Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 9.999

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
29 Vector Control
90 Speed Regulator

Description:
The speed regulator gains are calculated automatically in function of the parameter P0413 (Tm constant).
However, these gains can be adjusted manually in order to optimize the speed dynamic response, which becomes
faster with their increase. Yet, if the speed begins to oscillate, they must be reduced.
In a general manner, one can say that the Proportional gain (P0161) stabilizes abrupt speed or reference changes,
while the Integral gain (P0162) corrects the error between the reference and the speed, and improves the torque
response at low speeds as well.
Procedure for Manual Optimization of the Speed Regulator:
1. Select the acceleration (P0100) and/or deceleration (P0101) time according to the application.
2. Adjust the speed reference for 75 % of the maximum value.
3. Configure an analog output (AOx) for Real Speed, by programming P0251, P0254, P0257 or P0260 in 2.
4. Disable the speed ramp (Run/Stop=Stop) and wait until the motor stops.
5. Enable the speed ramp (Run/Stop=Run). Observe with an oscilloscope the motor speed signal at the chosen
analog output.
6. Verify among the options of the figure 11.4, which waveform best represents the observed signal.
n(v)

n(v)

n(v)

t (s)
a) Integral Gain – P0162 small and/
or Proportional Gain – P0161 high.

t (s)
b) Optimized speed
regulator

t (s)
c)Integral Gain – P0162 high and/or
Proportional Gain – P0161 small.

Figure 11.4 - Speed regulators response types

7. Adjust P0161 and P0162 according to the response type presented in the figure 11.4.
a) Increase the proportional gain (P0161) and/or increase the integral gain (P0162);
b) Speed regulator is optimized;
c) Reduce the proportional and/or integral gain.

11

11-16

Vector Control

P0163 – Local Reference Offset
P0164 – Remote Reference Offset
Adjustable
Range:

-999 to 999

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

0

29 Vector Control
90 Speed Regulator

Description:
It adjusts the analog inputs (AIx) speed reference offset. Refer to the figure 13.2.

P0165 – Speed Filter
Adjustable
Range:

0.012 to 1.000 s

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

0.012 s

29 Vector Control
90 Speed Regulator

Description:
It adjusts the speed filter time constant. Refer to the figure 13.2.

NOTE!

Generally, this parameter must not be changed. The increment in its value turns the system response
slower.

P0166 – Speed Regulator Differential Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.00 to 7.99

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

0.00

29 Vector Control
90 Speed Regulator

11

11-17

Vector Control

Description:
The differential action may minimize the effects of the application or removal of load, in the motor speed. Refer to
the figure 11.2.
Table 11.3 - Differential gain action in the speed regulator
P0166
0.00
0.01 a 7.99

Differential gain actuation
Inactive
Active

11.8.2 Current Regulator [91]
The parameters related to the CFW-11 current regulator are presented in this group.

P0167 – Current Regulator Proportional Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.00 to 1.99

Factory
Setting:

0.50

P0168 – Current Regulator Integral Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 1.999

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory 0.010
Setting:

29 Vector Control
91 Current Regulator

Description:
These parameters are adjusted automatically in function of the parameters P0411 and P0409.

NOTE!

Do not modify these parameters.

11.8.3 Flux Regulator [92]
The parameters related to the CFW-11 flux regulator are presented next.

P0175 – Flux Regulator Proportional Gain
Adjustable
Range:

11

11-18

0.0 to 31.9

Factory
Setting:

2.0

Vector Control

P0176 – Flux Regulator Integral Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 9.999

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

0.020

29 Vector Control
92 Flux Regulator

Description:
These parameters are adjusted automatically in function of the parameter P0412. In general, the automatic setting
is sufficient and the readjustment is not necessary.
These gains must only be readjusted manually when the flux current signal (Id*) is unstable (oscillating) and
compromising the system operation.

NOTE!

For gains in P0175>12.0 the flux current (Id*) may become unstable.
Note:
(Id*) is observed at the analog outputs AO3 and/or AO4, by setting P0257=22 and/or P0260=22.

P0178 – Rated Flux
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 120 %

Factory
Setting:

100 %

Factory
Setting:

120 %

P0179 – Maximum Flux
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 120 %

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
29 Vector Control
92 Flux Regulator

Description:
The parameter P0178 is the flux reference, while the parameter P0179 defines the maximum value for the flux
(magnetization) current.

NOTE!

These parameters must not be modified.

11

11-19

Vector Control

P0181 – Magnetization Mode
Adjustable
Range:

0 = General Enable
1 = Run/Stop

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

CFG and Encoder

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

0

29 Vector Control
92 Flux Regulator

Description:
Table 11.4 - Magnetization Mode
P0181
0 = General Enable
1 = Run/Stop

Action
Applies magnetizing current after General Enabling = ON
Applies magnetizing current after Run/Stop = Run

In the sensorless vector control mode, the magnetizing current is permanently active. In order to disable it when
the motor is stopped, a digital input programmed for General Enabling can be used. There is also the possibility
of programming P0217 in 1 (active). Refer to the section 12.6. Besides this, a delay for disabling the magnetizing
current can be set by programming P0219 bigger than zero.

P0188 – Proportional Gain of the Maximum Output Voltage Regulator
P0189 – Integral Gain of the Maximum Output Voltage Regulator
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 7.999

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory P0188=0.200
Setting: P0189=0.001

29 Vector Control
92 Flux Regulator

Description:
These parameters adjust the maximum output voltage regulator gains. In general the factory setting is adequate for
the majority of the applications.

P0190 – Maximum Output Voltage

11

Adjustable
Range:

0 to 690 V

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
29 Vector Control
92 Flux Regulator

11-20

0.95 x P0296.
Automatic setting
during the Oriented
Start-up Routine:
0.95 x P0400.

Vector Control

Description:
This parameter defines the value of the maximum output voltage. Its standard value is defined in the condition of
the nominal supply voltage.
The voltage reference used in the regulator "Maximum output voltage" (see the illustration 11.1 or 11.2) is directly
proportional to the voltage supply.
If this voltage increases, the output voltage will then be able to increase to the adjusted value in the parameter
P0400 - Nominal Motor Voltage.
If the voltage supply decreases, the maximum output voltage will decrease in the same proportion.

11.8.4 I/f Control [93]
P0182 – Speed for I/f Control Actuation
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 90 rpm

Factory 18 rpm
Setting:

Proprieties:

Sless

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
29 Vector Control
93 I/F Control

Description:
It defines the speed below witch the transition form the sensorless to the control I/f occurs.
The minimum recommended speed for the sensorless vector control operation is 18 rpm for 60 Hz rated frequency
IV pole motors and 15 rpm for 50 Hz rated frequency IV pole motors.

NOTE!

For P0182≤3 rpm the I/f function will be disabled and the inverter will remain always in the
sensorless vector mode.

P0183 – Current in the I/f Mode
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 9

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

Sless

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

1

29 Vector Control
93 I/F Control

11

11-21

Vector Control

Description:
It defines the current to be applied to the motor when the inverter is operating in the I/f mode, i.e., with the motor
speed below the value defined by P0182.
Table 11.5 - Current applied in the I/f mode
P0183
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Current in the I/f mode as a percentage of P0410 (Im)
100 %
111 %
122 %
133 %
144 %
155 %
166 %
177 %
188 %
200 %

11.8.5 Self-Tuning [05] and [94]
In that group are the parameters that are related to the motor and can be estimated by the inverter during
the self-tuning routine.

P0408 – Run Self-Tuning
Adjustable
Range:

0 = No
1 = No Rotation
2 = Run for Im
3 = Run for Tm
4 = Estimate Tm

Factory 0
Setting:

Proprieties:

CFG, Vector and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
29 Vector Control

05 SELF-TUNING
or

94 Self-tuning
Description:
By changing from the factory setting to one of the 4 available options, it is possible to estimate the value of the
parameters related to the motor being used. Refer to the next description for more details on each option.
Table 11.6 - Self-tuning options
P0408
0
1
2
3
4

Self-tuning
No
No Rotation
Run for Im
Run for Tm
Estimate Tm

Control Type
Sensorless vector, with encoder or VVW
Sensorless vector or with encoder
Vector with encoder
Vector with encoder

Estimate Parameters
–
P0409, P0410, P0411,
P0412 e P0413
P0413

P0408=1 – No rotation: The motor stands still during the self-tuning. The P0410 value is obtained from a
table, valid for WEG motors up to 12 poles.

11

NOTE!

Therefore P0410 must be equal to zero before initiating the self-tuning. If P0410≠0, the self-tuning
routine will keep the existent value.

11-22

Vector Control

Note: When using another brand of motor P0410 must be adjusted with the adequate value (no load motor
current) before initiating the self-tuning.
P0408=2 Run for Im: The P0410 value is estimated with the motor rotating. It must be executed without load
coupled to the motor. P0409, P0411 to P0413 are estimated with the motor standing still.

ATTENTION!

If the option P0408=2 (Run for Im) is performed with the load coupled to the motor, an incorrect value
of P0410 (Im) may be estimated. This will implicate in estimation error for P0412 (rotor time constant
- Tr) and for P0413 (mechanic time constant – Tm). Overcurrent fault (F071) may also occur during
the inverter operation.
Note: The term “load” includes everything that might be coupled to the motor shaft, for instance,
gearbox, inertia disk, etc.
P0408=3 Run for Tm: The value of P0413 (Mechanic time constant – Tm) is estimated, with the motor
rotating. It must be done, preferably, with the load coupled to the motor. P0409 to P0412 are estimated
with the motor standing still and P0410 is estimated in the same manner as with P0408=1.
P0408=4 – Estimate Tm: it estimates only the P0413 (Mechanic time constant – Tm) value, with the
motor rotating. It must be done, preferably, with the load coupled to the motor.

NOTES!
 Every time that P0408=1 or 2:
The parameter P0413 (Mechanic time constant – Tm) will be adjusted to a value close to the motor
mechanic time constant. Therefore, the motor rotor inertia (table data valid for WEG motors), the
inverter rated voltage and current are taken into consideration.
 Vector mode with encoder (P0202=4):
When using P0408=2 (Run for Im), one must, after finishing the self-tuning routine, couple the load
to the motor and set P0408=4 (Estimate Tm) in order to estimate the value of P0413. In this case
P0413 will also consider the driven load.
 VVW mode – Voltage Vector WEG (P0202=5):
In the VVW control self-tuning routine only the value of the stator resistance (P0409) will be obtained.
Therefore, the self-tuning will always be performed without rotating the motor.
 Better self-tuning results are obtained with the motor warm.

P0409 – Motor Stator Resistance (Rs)
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 9.999 ohm

Proprieties:

CFG, Vector and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
29 Vector Control

Factory
Setting:

0.000 ohm

05 SELF-TUNING
or

11

94 Self-tuning

11-23

Vector Control

Description:
It is the value estimated by the self-tuning.

NOTE!

The P0409 setting determines the value of the current regulator integral gain P0168. The parameter
P0168 is recalculated every time the content of P0409 is modified via keypad (HMI).

P0410 – Motor Magnetizing Current (Im)
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 1.25 x Inom-ND

Factory
Setting:

Inom-ND

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
29 Vector Control

05 SELF-TUNING
or

94 Self-tuning
Description:
It is the motor magnetizing current value.
It can be estimated by the self-tuning routine when P0408=2 (Run for Im) or obtained from an internal table based
in standard WEG motors, when P0408=1 (No rotation).
When a standard WEG motor is not used and it is not possible to run the self-tuning with P0408=2 (Run for Im), then
adjust P0410 with a value equal to the motor no load current, before initiating the self-tuning.
For P0202=4 (vector mode with encoder), the value P0410 determines the motor flux, therefore it must be properly
adjusted. If it is low, the motor will operate with a reduced flux compared to the rated condition, having, consequently,
its torque capability reduced.

P0411 – Motor Flux Leakage Inductance (σls)
Adjustable
Range:

0.00 to 99.99 mH

Proprieties:

CFG and Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
29 Vector Control

Factory
Setting:

0.00 mH

05 SELF-TUNING
or

94 Self-tuning
Description:
It is the value estimated by the self-tuning.
The P0411 setting determines the current regulator proportional gain.

NOTE!

When adjusted via the keypad (HMI), this parameter may change the parameter P0167 automatically.

11

11-24

Vector Control

P0412 – Lr/Rr Constant (Rotor Time Constant – Tr)
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 9.999 s

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

0.000 s

05 Self-tuning

29 Vector Control

or

94 Self-tuning
Description:
The P0412 setting determines the flux regulator gains (P0175 and P0176).
The value of this parameter interferes in the speed accuracy in the sensorless vector control.
Normally the self-tuning is performed with the motor cold. Depending on the motor, the P0412 value may vary
more or less with the motor temperature. Thus, for the sensorless vector control and normal operation with the
motor warm, P0412 must be adjusted until the speed of the motor with load (measured at the motor shaft with a
tachometer) stays equal to that one indicated on the keypad (HMI) (P0001).
This adjustment must be performed with half the rated speed.
For P0202=4 (vector with encoder), if P0412 is incorrect, the motor will loose torque. Thus, one must adjust P0412
so that at half the rated speed, and with stable load, the motor current (P0003) stays the lowest possible.
In the sensorless vector control mode the P0175 gain, provided by the self-tuning, will be limited in the range:
3.0≤P0175≤8.0.
Table 11.7 - Typical rotor constant (Tr) values for WEG motors
Motor Power (hp) / (kW)
2 / 1.5
5 / 3.7
10 / 7.5
15 / 11
20 / 15
30 / 22
50 / 37
100 / 75
150 / 110
200 / 150
300 / 220
350 / 250

2 (50 Hz/60 Hz)
0.19 / 0.14
0.29 / 0.29
- / 0.38
0.52 / 0.36
0.49 / 0.51
0.70 / 0.55
- / 0.84
1.64 / 1.08
1.33 / 1.74
- / 1.92
- / 2.97
-/-

500 / 375

-/-

Tr (s)
Number of Poles
4 (50 Hz/60 Hz)
6 (50 Hz/60 Hz)
0.13 / 0.14
0.1 / 0.1
0.18 / 0.12
- / 0.14
0.32 / 0.25
0.21 / 0.15
0.30 / 0.25
0.20 / 0.22
0.27 / 0.29
0.38 / 0.2
0.37 / 0.34
0.35 / 0.37
0.55 / 0.54
0.62 / 0.57
1.32 / 0.69
0.84 / 0.64
1.05 / 1.01
0.71 / 0.67
- / 0.95
- / 0.65
1.96 / 2.97
1.33 / 1.30
1.86 / 1.85
- / 1.53
- / 1.87

-/-

8 (50 Hz/60 Hz)
0.07 / 0.07
0.14 / 0.11
0.13 / 0.14
0.28 / 0.22
0.21 / 0.24
- / 0.38
0.31 / 0.32
0.70 / 0.56
- / 0.67
- / 1.03
-/-/-/-

NOTE!

When adjusted via the keypad (HMI), this parameter may change automatically the following
parameters: P0175, P0176, P0327 and P0328.

11

11-25

Vector Control

P0413 – Tm Constant (Mechanical Time Constant)
Adjustable
Range:

0.00 to 99.99 s

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
29 Vector Control

Factory
Setting:

0.00 s

05 Self-tuning
or

94 Self-tuning
Description:
The P0413 setting determines the speed regulator gains (P0161 and P0162).
When P0408=1 or 2, it must be observed:
If P0413=0, the time constant Tm will be obtained in function of the inertia of the programmed motor
(table value);
If P0413>0, the value of P0413 will not be changed by the self-tuning.
Sensorless vector control (P0202=3):
When the P0413 value obtained through the self-tuning provides inadequate speed regulator gains (P0161
and P0162), it is possible to change them by setting P0413 via keypad (HMI);
The P0161 gain provided by the self-tuning or through P0413 change, will be limited to the range:
6.0≤P0161≤9.0;
The P0162 value varies in function of the P0161 value;
In case it be necessary to increase even more these gains, they must be adjusted directly at P0161 and
P0162.
Note: Values of P0161>12.0 may turn the torque current (Iq) and the motor speed unstable (oscillating).
Vector control with encoder (P0202=4):
The P0413 value is estimated by the self-tuning when P0408=3 or 4.
The measurement procedure consists in accelerating the motor up to 50% of the rated speed, applying a current
step equal to the motor rated current.
In case that it is not possible to submit the load to this type of request, adjust P0413 via keypad (HMI), refer to the
section 11.8.1.

11.8.6 Torque Current Limitation [95]
The parameters placed in this group define the torque limitation values.

P0169 – Maximum Forward Torque Current
P0170 – Maximum Reverse Torque Current

11

Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 650.0 %

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
29 Vector Control
95 Torque Curr.Limit

11-26

Factory
Setting:

125.0 %

Vector Control

Description:
These parameters limit the motor current component responsible for producing forward torque (P0169) or reverse
(P0170). The setting is expressed in percentage of the motor rated current (P0401).
In case that any Analog Input (AIx) be programmed for the option 2 (Maximum Torque Current), P0169 and P0170
become inactive and the current limitation will be specified by the AIx. In this case the limitation value can be
monitored at the parameter correspondent to the programmed AIx (P0018 … P0021).
In the torque limitation condition the motor current can be calculated by:
2

Imotor=

p0169 or p0170* x P0401 + (P0410)2
100

The maximum torque developed by the motor is given by:
P0401 x P0169(*) or P0170 x K
100
Tmotor(%)=

(P0401)2 - P0410 x P0178

2

x100

100

Where:
Nnom = motor synchronous speed,
N = actual motor speed
1  for  N ≤ P0190 x Nnom
P0400
K=

Nnom x p0190 for N > P0190 x Nnom
N
P0400
P0400

(*) In case that the current limitation be provided by an analog input, replace P0169 or P0170 by P0018 or
P0019, or, P0020 or P0021, according to the programmed AIx. For more details refer to the section 13.1.1.

P0171 – Maximum Forward Torque Current at Maximum Speed
P0172 – Maximum Reverse Torque Current at Maximum Speed
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 650.0 %

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

125.0 %

29 Vector Control
95 Torque Curr.Limit

11

11-27

Vector Control

Description:
Torque current limitation in function of the speed:
Torque current limitation

P0170/P0169

P0173 = 0

P0172/P0171

P0173 = 1
Synchronous speed x p0190
P0400

P0134

n

Figure 11.5 - Torque limitation actuation curve at maximum speed

This function stays inactive when the contents of P0171/P0172 are higher or equal to the contents of P0169/
P0170.
P0171 and P0172 do also act during optimal braking limiting the maximum output current.

P0173 – Maximum Torque Curve Type
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Ramp
1 = Step

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

0

29 Vector Control
95 Torque Curr.Limit

Description:
It defines how the actuation of the torque limitation curve will be at the field weakening region. Refer to the figure
11.5.

11.8.7 DC Link Regulator [96]
For the deceleration of high inertia loads with short deceleration times, the CFW-11 has available the DC Link
Regulation function, which avoids the tripping of the inverter by overvoltage in the DC link (F022).

P0184 – DC Link Regulation Mode

11

Adjustable
Range:

0 = With losses
1 = Without losses
2 = Enable/Disable DIx

Proprieties:

CFG and Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
29 Vector Control
96 DC Link Regulator

11-28

Factory
Setting:

1

Vector Control

Description:
It enables or disables the Optimal Braking function (section 11.6) in the DC voltage regulation, according to the
next table.
Table 11.8 - DC link regulation modes

P0184

Action

0 = With losses
(Optimal Braking)

The Optimal Braking is active as described at P0185. This assures the minimum possible deceleration time without using dynamic or regenerative braking

1 = Without losses

Automatic control of the deceleration ramp. The Optimal Braking is inactive. The deceleration
ramp is automatically adjusted in order to keep the DC link below the level adjusted in P0185.
This procedure avoids the overvoltage fault at the DC link (F022). It can also be used with eccentric loads
DIx = 24 V: Braking actuates as described for P0184=1
DIx = 0 V: The Without Losses Braking stays inactive. The DC link voltage will be controlled by
the parameter P0153 (Dynamic Braking)

2 = Enable/Disable via DIx

P0185 – DC Link Voltage Regulation Level
Adjustable
Range:

339 to 400 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
809 to 1000 V
809 to 1000 V
924 to 1200 V
924 to 1200 V

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory P0296=0: 400 V
Setting: P0296=1: 800 V
P0296=2: 800 V
P0296=3: 800 V
P0296=4: 800 V
P0296=5: 1000 V
P0296=6: 1000 V
P0296=7: 1000 V
P0296=8: 1200 V

29 Vector Control
96 DC Link Regulator

Description:
This parameter defines the DC link voltage regulation level during the braking. During the braking, the time of the
deceleration ramp is automatically extended, thus avoiding an overvoltage fault (F022). The setting of the DC link
regulation can be done in two manners:
1. With loss (optimal break) – set P0184=0.
1.1 - P0404 < 20 (60 hp): In this way the current flux is modulated in a way to increase the losses of the
motor, increasing the break torque. A better operation can be obtained with motors of smaller efficiency
(small motors).
1.2 - P0404>20(60 hp): the current flux will be increased up to the maximum value defined on P0169
or P0170, as the speed is reduced. The break torque in the weakness field area is small.
2. Without losses – set P0184=1. Activates only the DC link voltage regulation.

11

11-29

Vector Control

NOTE!

The factory setting for P0185 is adjusted at the maximum, which disables the DC link voltage
regulation. In order to activate it, set P0185 according to the table 11.9.
Table 11.9 - DC link voltage regulation recommended levels
Inversor
Vnom

200 ...
240 V

380 V

400 /
415 V

440 /
460 V

480 V

500 /
525 V

550 /
575 V

600 V

660 /
690 V

P0296
P0185

0
375 V

1
618 V

2
675 V

3
748 V

4
780 V

5
893 V

6
972 V

7
972 V

8
1174 V

P0186 – DC Link Voltage Regulation Proportional Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 63.9

Factory
Setting:

18.0

Factory
Setting:

0.002

P0187 – DC Link Voltage Regulation Integral Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 9.999

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
29 Vector Control
96 DC Link Regulator

Description:
These parameters adjust the DC link voltage regulator gain.
Normally the factory settings are adequate for the majority of the applications, not being necessary to adjust
them.

11.9 Start-up in the Vector Modes Sensorless and with Encoder
NOTE!

Read the whole CFW-11 User Manual before installing, powering or operating the inverter.

Sequence for installation, verification, powering and start-up:
a) Install the inverter: according to the chapter 3 – Installation and Connection of the CFW-11 User Manual,
wiring all the power and control connections.
b) Prepare the inverter and apply power: according to the section 5.1 of the CFW-11 User Manual.
c) Adjust the password P0000=5: according to the section 5.3 of this manual.
d) Adjust the inverter to operate with the application line and motor: by means of the “Oriented Start-up”
Menu access P0317 and change its content to 1, which makes the inverter initiate the “Oriented Start-up”
routine.

11

11-30

Vector Control
The “Oriented Start-up” routine presents on the keypad (HMI) the main parameters in a logical sequence. The
setting of these parameters prepares the inverter for operation with the application line and motor. Verify the step
by step sequence in the figure 11.6.
The setting of the parameters presented in this operation mode results in the automatic modification of the content
of other inverter parameters and/or internal variables, as indicated in the figure 11.6. In this way one gets a stable
operation of the control circuit with adequate values to obtain the best motor performance.
During the “Oriented Start-up” routine the “Config” (Configuration) status will be indicated on the top left part of
the keypad (HMI).
Parameters related to the motor:
 Program the contents of parameters from P0398, P0400 to P0406 directly with the motor nameplate
data.
 Options for the setting of parameters P0409 to P0412:
- Automatic, with the inverter executing the self-tuning routine as selected in one of the P0408 options.
- From the motor data sheet supplied by its manufacturer. Refer to the procedure in the section 11.7.1
of this manual.
- Manually, copying the contents of the parameters from another CFW-11 inverter, which uses and identical
motor.
e) Setting of specific parameters and functions for the application: set the digital and analog inputs and
outputs, HMI keys, etc., according to the application needs.
For applications:
 That are simple, which can use the factory settings programming for the digital and analog inputs and
outputs, use the Menu “Basic Application”. Refer to the section 5.2.3 of the CFW-11 User Manual.
 That require only the digital and analog inputs and outputs with programming different from the factory
settings, use the Menu “I/O Configuration”.
 That need functions as Flying Start, Ride-Through, DC Braking, Dynamic Braking, etc., access and modify
those function parameters by means of the Menu “Parameter Groups”.

11

11-31

Vector Control

Seq.

Action/Result
- Monitoring Mode.
- Press “Menu”

1

Display Indication
Ready

(right "soft key").

PARAMETERS” is already
2

selected.

PARAMETER GROUPS” is
3

selected.

START-UP” is then selected.
4

- Press “Select”.

00
01
02
03

“Oriented Start-up
5

P0317: No” is already

- The content of “P0317 =
[000] No” is showed.
6

13:48

“P0317 = [001] Yes”
- Press “Save”.

P0201: English” is already

Config

selected.

Language
P0201: English
Type of Control
P0202: V/F 60Hz

- If necessary, change
the language by pressing
“Select”, next

00
01
02
03

ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS
ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS

Select

13:48

then press “Save”.

Select

- Set the content of P0202
pressing “Select”.

Ready
00
01
02
03

-Next press

0rpm

LOC

ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS
ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS

Ready

13:48

Ready

13:48

0rpm

P0317

Ready

press “Save”.
9

Select

LOC

13:48

Encoder". This change resets
the contents of P0410. Then

0rpm

LOC

Return

Sensorless or [004]

Select

Oriented Start-up
P0317: No

Save

- Note that from this moment
on the option “Reset” (left
"soft key") or
are no
longer available.
-There are 3 options to leave
the Oriented Start-up:
1.Executing the Self-Tuning;
2.Setting the parameters
P0409 to P0413
manually;
3.Changing P0202 from
vector to scalar control.

0rpm

LOC

P0317
Oriented Start-up
[001] Yes
13:48

until

selecting the option "[003]

Save

Figure 11.6 - Vector mode Oriented Start-up

11-32

13:48

to select the language and

0rpm

LOC

Return

11

Reset

0rpm

LOC

and
Ready

Return

parameter is changed to

8

Select

Oriented Start-up
[000] No

- The content of the

left part of the keypad (HMI).

0rpm

selected.
- Press “Select”.

7

status is indicated at the top

ALL PARAMETERS
PARAMETER GROUPS
ORIENTED START-UP
CHANGED PARAMETERS

Return

- The parameter

initiated and the “Config”

Menu

LOC

Return

- The group “02 ORIENTED

Display Indication

- The parameter “Language
Ready

Return

- The group “01

Action/Result
- In this moment the
Oriented Start-up routine is

rpm
A
Hz

13:48

- The group “00 ALL

0rpm

LOC

0
0.0
0.0

Seq.

Config

0rpm

LOC

Language
P0201: English
Type of Control
P0202: V/F 60Hz
Reset

13:48

Select

Vector Control

Seq.

Action/Result
- If necessary, change the

Display Indication

Seq.

content of P0296 according

10

This change will affect
P0151, P0153, P0185,

Display Indication

content of P0402 according

to the used line voltage.
Therefore press “Select”.

Action/Result
- If necessary, change the
to the rated motor speed.

Config

0rpm

LOC

Type of Control
P0202: Sensorless
Line Rated Voltage
P0296: 440 - 460 V

P0321, P0322, P0323 and

13:48

Therefore press “Select”.
15

This change will affect
P0122 to P0131, P0133,

Config

P0134, P0182, P0208,

Select

P0400.

LOC

0rpm

Motor Rated Current
P0401:
13.5A
Motor Rated Speed
P0402= 1750rpm
13:48

Select

P0288 and P0289.

- If necessary, change the

11

content of P0298 according

- If necessary, change the

to the inverter application.

content of P0403 according

Config

Therefore press “Select”.

to the rated motor

Motor Rated Speed
P0402:
1750 rpm
Motor Rated Frequency
P0403: 60Hz

This change will affect

Config

P0156, P0157, P0158,

Line Rated Voltage
P0296: 440 - 460 V
Application
P0298: Normal Duty

P0169, P0170, P0401
and P0404. The actuation

13:48

time and level of the IGBTs

0rpm

LOC

16

frequency. Therefore press
“Select”. This change will

13:48

affect P0402.

overload protection will also
17

Config

to the rated motor power.

Motor Rated Frequency
P0403:
60Hz
Motor Rated Power
P0404:
7.5hp

Therefore press “Select”.

Therefore press “Select”.

Config

This change will affect the

Application
P0298: Normal Duty
Motor Service Factor
P0398:
1.15

LOC

13:48

motor overload function.

Select

ENC1 is connected to the
inverter.
- If there is an encoder
18

connected to the motor,
change P0405 according

Config

13

Therefore press “Select”.
This change will affect

LOC

13:48

Motor Service Factor
P0398: 1.15
Motor Rated Voltage
P0400:
440V
13:48

- If necessary, change
the content of P0406

Select

P0156, P0157 and P0158.

Config

motor ventilation. Therefore

Encoder Pulses Number
P0405: 1024 ppr
Motor Ventilation
P0406: Self-Vent.

press “Select”. This change
P0158, P0399 and P0407.

content of P0401 according

This change will affect

according to the type of

will affect P0156, P0157,

- If necessary, change the

Therefore press “Select”.

Select

0rpm

19

14

0rpm

“Select”.
Config

P0190.

to the rated motor current.

LOC

Motor Rated Power
P0404: 7.5hp
Encoder Pulses Number
P0405: 1024 ppr

revolution. Therefore press

If necessary, change the
to the rated motor voltage.

Select

visible if the encoder board

0rpm

to its number of pulses per

content of P0400 according

0rpm

- This parameter will only be

to the motor service factor.

for the actuation of the

LOC

13:48

content of P0398 according

current value and the time

Select

content of P0404 according

- If necessary adjust the

12

0rpm

- If necessary, change the

Select

be affected.

LOC

Config

LOC

LOC

13:48

0rpm

Select

0rpm

Motor Rated Voltage
P0400:
440V
Motor Rated Current
P0401:
13.5 A
13:48

Select

Figure 11.6 - Vector mode Oriented Start-up (cont.)

11

11-33

Vector Control

Seq.

Action/Result
At this point, the keypad

Display Indication

(HMI) presents the option to
run the “Self-Tuning”.
Whenever possible the Self-

20

Tuning must be carried out.

Config

- Thus, press “Select” to

Motor Ventilation
P0406: Self-Vent.
Run Self-Tuning
P0408: No

access P0408 and then
to select the

13:48

desired option. Refer to the

0rpm

LOC

Select

section 11.8.5 for more
details.
- Next press “Save”.
- After doing that the SelfTuning routine is initiated
and “SelfTun” is indicated
on the top left corner of the

SelfTun

keypad (HMI).
21

- If the chosen option had
been the option 1, 2 or

0rpm

LOC

P0409
Estimating Rs
[001] No Rotation
13:48

3 in P0408, the keypad
(HMI) will present “P0409:
Estimating Rs”.
The keypad (HMI) will also
indicate the estimation of
the parameters P0411,
P0410 and P0412 (if the

SelfTun

Estimating σls

option 1, 2 or 3 had been
chosen in P0408).
- When P0408 = 1 or
3 the keypad (HMI) will
not indicate the P0410

13:48
SelfTun

- When P0408 = 3 or 4 the
keypad (HMI) will indicate
the P0413 estimation.
- Wait until the end of the

0rpm

LOC

P0410
Estimating Im

estimation.
22

0rpm

LOC

P0411

13:48
SelfTun

0rpm

LOC

P0412
Estimating Tr

Self-Tuning routine.

13:48
SelfTun

0rpm

LOC

P0413
Estimating Tm
13:48

Once the Self-Tuning
routine has finished, the
23

inverter returns to the
monitoring mode.

Ready

0rpm

LOC

0
4.0
0.0

rpm
A
Hz

13:48

Menu

Figure 11.6 - Vector mode Oriented Start-up (cont.)

11

11-34

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

FUNCTIONS COMMON TO ALL THE CONTROL MODES
This section describes the functions that are common to all the CFW-11 inverter control modes (V/f, VVW,
Sensorless, and Encoder).

12.1 Ramps [20]
The inverter RAMPS functions allow the motor to accelerate and decelerate in a faster or a slower manner.

P0100 – Acceleration Time
P0101 – Deceleration Time
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 999.0 s

Factory 20.0 s
Setting:

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
20 Ramps

Description:
These parameters define the time to accelerate (P0100) lineally from 0 to the maximum speed (defined in P0134)
and decelerate (P0101) lineally from the maximum speed down to 0.
Note: The setting 0.0 s means that the ramp is disabled.

P0102 – Acceleration Time 2
P0103 – Deceleration Time 2
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 999.0 s

Factory 20.0 s
Setting:

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
20 Ramps

Description:
Those parameters allow a second ramp to be configured for the motor acceleration (P0102) or deceleration
(P0103), which is activated via an external digital command (defined by P0105). Once this command is activated,
the inverter ignores the times of the first ramp (P0100 or P0101) and starts obeying the value adjusted at the second
ramp (Refer the example for external command via DIx showed next in the figure 12.1).

12

12-1

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

24V
open

DIx Run/Stop

Time

24V
open

2nd ramp DIx

Time
P0102
P0100

P0103
P0101

Motor Speed
Time

Figure 12.1 - Second ramp actuation

In this example, the commutation to the 2nd ramp (P0102 or P0103) is done by means of one of the digital inputs
from DI1 to DI8, provided that it had been programmed for 2nd ramp function (refer to the section 13.1.3 for more
details).
Note: The setting 0.0 s means that the ramp is disabled.

P0104 – S Ramp
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = 50 %
2 = 100 %

Factory
Setting:

0

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
20 Ramps

Description:
This parameter allows that the acceleration and deceleration ramps have a nonlinear profile, similar to an “S”, as
showed in the figure 12.2 next.
Speed

Linear
50 % S ramp
100 % S ramp
Acceleration
Time(P0100/P0102)

12

t (s)
Deceleration Time
(P0101/P0103)

Figure 12.2 - S or linear ramp

The S ramp reduces mechanic shock during accelerations/decelerations.

12-2

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0105 – 1st/2nd Ramp Selection
Adjustable
Range:

0 = 1st Ramp
1 = 2nd Ramp
2 = DIx
3 = Serial/USB
4 = Anybus-CC
5 = CANopen/DeviceNet
6 = SoftPLC
7 = PLC11

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

2

20 Ramps

Description:
It defines the source of the command that will select between the Ramp 1 and the Ramp 2.
Notes:
“Ramp 1” means that the acceleration and deceleration ramps are following the values programmed in
P0100 and P0101;
“Ramp 2” means that the acceleration and deceleration ramps are following the values programmed in
P0102 and P0103;
It is possible to monitor the set of ramps being used in a defined moment at the parameter P0680 (Logical
status).

12.2 Speed References [21]
This parameter group makes it possible that the reference values for the motor speed and for the functions
JOG, JOG+ and JOG- be established. It is also possible to define if the reference value will be kept when the
inverter is switched off or disabled. For more details refer to the figures 13.8 and 13.9.

P0120 – Speed Reference Backup
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = On

Factory
Setting:

1

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
21 Speed References

Description:
This parameter defines if the speed reference backup function is active or inactive.
If P0120=Off, inactive, then the inverter will not save the speed reference when it is disabled. Thus, when the
inverter is enabled again the speed reference will assume the value of the minimum speed limit (P0133).
This backup function applies to the references via keypad (HMI), E.P., Serial/USB, Anybus-CC, CANopen/DeviceNet,
SoftPLC and PID Setpoint.

12-3

12

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0121 – Keypad Reference
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Factory
Setting:

90 rpm

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
21 Speed References

Description:
When the
and
speed reference.

HMI keys are active (P0221 or P0222=0), this parameter sets the value of the motor

The value of P0121 will be kept with the last adjusted value when the inverter is disabled or powered off, provided
that the parameter P0120 is configured as Active (1).

P0122 – JOG Speed Reference
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Factory 150 rpm
Setting: (125 rpm)

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
21 Speed References

Description:
During the JOG command the motor accelerates up to the value defined in P0122 following the adjusted acceleration
ramp.
The source of the JOG command is defined in the parameters P0225 (Local Situation) or P0228 (Remote
Situation).
If the JOG command source has been defined for the digital inputs (DI1 to DI8), one of these inputs must be
programmed as presented in the table 12.1.
Table 12.1 - JOG command via digital input selection
Digital Input
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8

Parameters
P0263=10 (JOG)
P0264=10 (JOG)
P0265=10 (JOG)
P0266=10 (JOG)
P0267=10 (JOG)
P0268=10 (JOG)
P0269=10 (JOG)
P0270=10 (JOG)

For more details refer to the figure 13.6 (h).
The speed direction is defined by the parameters P0223 or P0226.

12

The JOG command is effective only with the motor stopped.
For the JOG+ refer to the description below.

12-4

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0122 – JOG + Speed Reference
P0123 – JOG - Speed Reference
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

150 rpm
(125 rpm)

21 Speed References

Description:
The JOG+ or JOG- commands are always carried out via digital inputs.
One DIx input must be programmed for JOG+ and another for JOG- as presented in the table 12.2 next:
Table 12.2 - Selection of the JOG+ and JOG- commands via digital inputs
Digital Input
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8

Function
JOG+
P0263=16
P0264=16
P0265=16
P0266=16
P0267=16
P0268=16
P0269=16
P0270=16

JOG P0263=17
P0264=17
P0265=17
P0266=17
P0267=17
P0268=17
P0269=17
P0270=17

During the JOG+ or JOG- commands the values of P0122 and P0123 are, respectively, added or subtracted from
the speed reference to generate the total reference (refer to the figure 13.8).
For the JOG option refer to the previous parameter description.

12.3 Speed Limits [22]
The parameters of this group have the purpose of acting as motor speed limits.

P0132 – Maximum Overspeed Level
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 100 %

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

10 %

22 Speed Limits

Description:
This parameter sets the highest speed allowed for the motor to operate, and must be adjusted as a percentage of
the maximum speed limit (P0134).
When the actual speed exceeds the value of P0134 + P0132 longer than 20 ms, the CFW-11 will disable the PWM
pulses and indicate the fault (F150).
In order to disable this function, set P0132=100 %.

12-5

12

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0133 – Minimum Speed Reference Limit
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Factory
Setting:

90 rpm
(75 rpm)

Factory
Setting:

1800 rpm
(1500 rpm)

P0134 – Maximum Speed Reference Limit
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
22 Speed Limits

Description:
They define the maximum/minimum values for the motor speed reference when the inverter is enabled. They are
valid for any type of reference signal. For details on the actuation of P0133, refer to the parameter P0230 (Dead
Zone of the Analog Inputs).
Output speed
P0134

P0133
Speed Reference

-10 V

+10 V
-P0133

-P0134
Output speed
P0134

P0133
0

Speed Reference

0......................... 100 %
0............................10 V
0.........................20 mA
4 mA.....................20 mA
10 V..............................0
20 mA...........................0
20 mA.....................4 mA

Figure 12.3 - Speed limits considering the “Dead Zone” active (P0230=1)

12.4 Multispeed [36]
The MULTISPEED function is used when one wishes to have up to 8 predefined fixed speeds, which are commanded
through the digital inputs (DI4, DI5 and DI6).

12

12-6

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0124 – Multispeed Reference 1
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Factory
Setting:

90 rpm
(75 rpm)

Factory
Setting:

300 rpm
(250 rpm)

Factory
Setting:

600 rpm
(500 rpm)

Factory
Setting:

900 rpm
(750 rpm)

Factory
Setting:

1200 rpm
(1000 rpm)

Factory
Setting:

1500 rpm
(1250 rpm)

Factory
Setting:

1800 rpm
(1500 rpm)

Factory
Setting:

1650 rpm
(1375 rpm)

P0125 – Multispeed Reference 2
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

P0126 – Multispeed Reference 3
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

P0127 – Multispeed Reference 4
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

P0128 – Multispeed Reference 5
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

P0129 – Multispeed Reference 6
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

P0130 – Multispeed Reference 7
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

P0131 – Multispeed Reference 8
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
36 Multispeed

12

12-7

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

Description:
The Multispeed brings as advantages the stability of the predefined fixed references, and the immunity against
electric noises (isolated digital inputs DIx).
In order to activate the Multispeed function one must configure the parameter P0221=8 and/or P0222=8
(Reference Selection).
In order to use only 2 or 4 speeds, any combination of the DI4, DI5 and DI6 inputs can be used. Verify the Speed
Reference parameters according to the used DI’s.
The input(s) programmed for other function(s) must be considered as 0 V, as presented in the table 12.4.
Table 12.3 - Multispeed function selection via digital inputs
Enabled DIx
DI4
DI5
DI6

Programming
P0266=13
P0267=13
P0268=13

Table 12.4 - Multispeed reference
8 speeds
4 speeds
2 speeds
DI6

DI5

DI4

Speed Reference

0V

0V

0V

P0124

0V

0V

24 V

P0125

0V

24 V

0V

P0126

0V
24 V

24 V
0V

24 V
0V

P0127
P0128

24 V

0V

24 V

P0129

24 V

24 V

0V

P0130

24 V

24 V

24 V

P0131

Output speed
P0130
P0129

P0131

P0128
P0127
P0126

Accelerating ramp

P0125
P0124
Time
24 V

12

DI6

0 V (open)
24 V

DI5

0 V (open)
24 V

DI4

0 V (open)

Figure 12.4 - Multispeed

12-8

Functions Common to All the Control Modes
12.5 Electronic Potentiometer [37]
The ELECTRONIC POTENTIOMETER (E.P.) function allows that the speed reference be adjusted by means of 2
digital inputs (one for incrementing it and another for decrementing it).
In order to enable this function, the speed reference must first be configured to be via E.P., by setting P0221=7
and/or P0222=7. After this function has been enabled, it is only necessary to program two of the digital inputs
(P0263 to P0270) in 11 (Increase E.P.) and 12 (Decrease E.P.).
The operation of this function can be observed in the next figure. It is important to point out that the increase
of the speed reference is done with the application of 24 V at the digital inputs, whereas the decrease is done
with the application of 0 V.
In order to reset the reference, 24 V must be applied at the "INCREASE" input and 0 V at the "DECREASE" input,
simultaneously while the CFW-11 inverter is disabled.
Increase
Digital Inputs

Acceleration
Deceleration

Decrease

Enabling

&

Speed Reference

Reset

Minimum
speed
Output
Speed
Time

24V

DIx Increase
Reset

open
Time

24V

DIx Decrease
Time

24V

open

DIx Run/Stop

Time

Figure 12.5 - Electronic potentiometer function (E.P.)

12.6 Zero Speed Logic [35]
This function allows the configuration of a speed in which the inverter will enter a stop condition (disable
itself).

12

12-9

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0217 – Zero Speed Disable
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = On

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

0

35 Zero Speed Logic

Description:
When ON, it disables the inverter after the speed reference (N*) and the actual speed (N) become lower than the
value adjusted in the parameter P0291.
The inverter is enabled again when one of the conditions defined by the parameter P0218 is satisfied.

DANGER!

Be careful when approaching the motor while it is in the disable condition. It may get back to
operation at any moment because of the process conditions. In case you want to handle or perform
any type of maintenance, remove power from the inverter.

P0218 – Condition to Leave the Zero Speed Disable
Adjustable
Range:

0 = P0001 (N*) > P0291 or P0002 (N) > P0291
1 = P0001 (N*) > P0291

Factory
Setting:

0

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
35 Zero Speed Logic

Description:
It specifies if the condition to leave the zero speed disable will be only the speed reference or also the actual speed.
Table 12.5 - Condition to leave the N=0 disable
P0218
(P0217=1)

Inverter leaves the condition of disable by
N=0

0

P0001 (N*) > P0291 or
P0002 (N) > P0291

1

P0001 (N*) > P0291

When the PID regulator is active (P0203=1) and in Automatic mode, for the inverter to leave the disable condition,
besides the condition programmed in P0218, it is also necessary that the PID error (the difference between the
Setpoint and the process variable) be higher than the value programmed in P0535. Refer to the section 20.6 for
more details.

12

12-10

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0219 – Zero Speed Time
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 999 s

Factory
Setting:

0s

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
35 Zero Speed Logic

Description:
It defines whether or not the Zero Speed Disable function will be timed.
If P0219=0, the function works without timing.
If P0219>0, the function will be configured with timing, and the counting of the time adjusted in this parameter will
be initiated after the Speed Reference and the Actual Motor Speed become lower than the value adjusted in P0291.
When the counting reaches the time defined in P0219, the inverter will be disabled. If during the time counting any
of the conditions that cause the zero speed disable ceases being fulfilled, then the time counting will be reset and
the inverter continues enabled.

P0291 – Zero Speed Zone
Refer to the section 13.1.4 for more details.

12.7 Flying Start/Ride-Through [44]
The FLYING START function allows starting a motor that is spinning freely, accelerating it from the speed it is
found.
The other function, RIDE-THROUGH, allows the recovery of the inverter, without being disabled by undervoltage,
when a failure in the voltage supply occurs.
Since these functions work in different manners depending on the used control mode (V/f or Vector), they will
be described in full detail next, for each one of the modes.

P0320 – Flying Start/Ride-Through
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = Flying Start
2 = Flying Start / Ride-Through
3 = Ride-Through

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

0

44 FlyStart/RideThru

Description:
The parameter P0320 selects the functions Flying Start and Ride-Through use. More details in the subsequent
sections.

12-11

12

Functions Common to All the Control Modes
12.7.1 V/f Flying Start
In the V/f mode, the inverter imposes a fixed frequency at the start, defined by the speed reference, and applies a
voltage ramp defined at the parameter P0331. The Flying Start function will be activated after the time adjusted
in P0332 elapses (to allow the motor demagnetization), every time a “Run” command is driven.

12.7.2 Vector Flying Start
12.7.2.1 P0202=3
In the Sensorless vector mode, the Flying Start initiates soon after the "Run/Stop=Run" command is applied. At
this moment the inverter initiates a sweep (search) using I/f scalar control, where I is constant and f varies from
the P0134 value down to zero. The rate of the frequency change is determined by (P0329 x P0412). When the
motor speed is found the control mode is changed from I/f to vector sensorless, and the motor is driven to the
speed reference indicated in P0001.
The used parameters are P0327 to P0329 and the not used ones are P0182, P0331 and P0332.

NOTE!

When the general enable command is activated, the motor magnetization will not occur.

NOTE!

For a better performance of the function, the activation of the braking without losses is recommended
by setting the parameter P0185 according to the table 11.9.

P0327 – F.S. Current Ramp I/f
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 1.000 s

Factory
Setting:

0.070 s

Description:
It defines the time for the I/f current to change from 0 to the level used in the frequency sweep (f). It is determined
by: P0327=P0412/8.

P0328 – Flying Start Filter
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 1.000 s

Factory
Setting:

0.085 s

Description:
It establishes the time of permanence in the condition that indicates that the speed of the motor was found. It is
defined by: P0328=(P0412/8 + 0.015 s).

P0329 – Frequency Ramp I/f F.S.

12

Adjustable
Range:

2.0 to 50.0

Proprieties:

Sless

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

12-12

44 FlyStart/RideThru

Factory
Setting:

6.0

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

Description:
It defines the rate of frequency variation used in the motor speed search.
P0329 is determined in function of P0404, as showed in the next table:
Table 12.6 - P0329 value in function of P0404

P0404
P0329

0...20
6.0

21...23
7.0

24...26
8.0

27...29
9.0

30...32
10.0

33...37
11.0

P0404
P0329

38...40
12.0

41...44
13.0

45...48
14.0

49
15.0

50
16.0

51...58
17.0

The frequency variation rate is determined by: (P0329 x P0412).
If it is wished to deactivate momentarily the Flying Start function, one can program one of the digital
inputs P0263 to P0270 as 24 (Disab.FlyStart). Refer to the section 13.1.3.

12.7.2.2 P0202=4
During the time period when the motor is being magnetized, the identification of the motor speed occurs. Once
the magnetization is finished, the motor will be operated starting from that speed until reaching the speed
reference indicated in P0001.
The parameters P0327 to P0329, P0331 and P0332 are not used.

12.7.3 V/f Ride-Through
The Ride-Through function in the V/f mode will disable the output pulses (IGBT) of the inverter as soon as the
input voltage reaches a value below the undervoltage level. The undervoltage fault (F021) does not occur and
the DC link voltage will decrease slowly until the line voltage returns.
If the line takes too long to return (more than 2 seconds), the inverter may indicate F021 (DC Link Undervoltage).
If the line voltage returns before a fault, the inverter will enable the pulses again, imposing the speed reference
instantaneously (as in the Flying Start function) and applying a voltage ramp with the time defined by P0331.
Refer to the figures 12.6(a) and (b).

12

12-13

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

Line Returns

Line Returns
DC Link Voltage

DC Link Voltage

F021 Level

F021 Level
Enabled
P0332

Output Pulses

Enabled
Output Pulses

Disabled
P0332

P0331
Output Voltage

Time adjusted in P0332
P0331
Output Voltage

0V
Output Speed
(P0002)

Disabled

0V

Output Speed (P0002)

0 rpm

0 rpm

a) with the line returning before the time adjusted in P0332

b) with the line returning after the time adjusted in P0332, but
before 2 s (for P0332 ≤ 1 s), or before 2 x P0332
(for P0332 > 1 s)

Figure 12.6 - Ride-Through actuation in V/f mode

The actuation of the Ride-Through function can be visualized at the outputs DO1/RL1, DO2/RL2, DO3/RL3,
DO4 and/or DO5 (P0275 to P0279), provided that they have been programmed in “24=Ride-Through”.

P0331 – Voltage Ramp
Adjustable
Range:

0.2 to 60.0 s

Proprieties:

V/f and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

2.0 s

44 FlyStart/RideThru

Description:
This parameter sets the necessary time for the output voltage to reach the rated voltage value.
It is used by the Flying Start function as well as by the Ride-Through function (both in V/f mode), together with the
parameter P0332.

P0332 – Dead Time

12

Adjustable
Range:

0.1 to 10.0 s

Proprieties:

V/f and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

12-14

44 FlyStart/RideThru

Factory
Setting:

1.0 s

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

Description:
The parameter P0332 sets the minimum time that the inverter will wait to activate the motor again, which is
necessary for the motor demagnetization.
In the Ride-Through function case, the time is counted starting from the line drop. However in the Flying Start
function actuation, the counting begins after the “Run/Stop=Run” command is given.
For the correct operation, this time must be adjusted to twice the motor rotor constant (refer to the table available
at P0412 in the section 11.8.5.

12.7.4 Vector Ride-Through
Different from the V/f mode, in the vector mode the Ride-Through function tries to regulate the DC link voltage
during the line failure, without interruption or fault storing. The energy necessary to keep the aggregate working
is obtained from the motor kinetic energy (inertia) by means of its deceleration. Thus, at the line return the motor
is reaccelerated to the speed defined by the reference.
After the line failure (t0), the DC link voltage (Ud) starts diminishing according to a rate depending on the motor
load condition, being able to reach the undervoltage level (t2) if the Ride-Through function is not working. The
typical necessary time for this to occur, with rated load, is from a magnitude of 5 to 15 ms.
With the Ride-Through function active, the line loss is detected when the Ud voltage reaches a value below the
”DC Link Power Loss” value (t1), defined at the parameter P0321. The inverter initiates a controlled deceleration
of the motor immediately, regenerating energy to the DC link in order to keep the motor operating with the Ud
voltage regulated at the value “DC Link Ride-Through” (P0322).
In case that the line does not return, the aggregate remains in this condition the longest possible time (depends
on the energetic balance) until undervoltage (F021 in t5) occurs. If the line returns before the undervoltage
occurrence (t3), the inverter will detect its return when the Ud voltage reaches the “DC Link Power Back” (t4)
level, defined at the parameter P0323. The motor is then reaccelerated, following the adjusted ramp, from the
actual speed value to the value defined by the speed reference (P0001) (refer to the figure 12.7).
Ud

Nominal
Return (P0323)
Loss (P0321)
Ride-Through (P0322)

F021

Undervoltage (75 %)

t0 t1

t2

t3

t4 t5

t
(t)

12

Figure 12.7 - Ride-Through function actuation in vector mode

12-15

Functions Common to All the Control Modes
t0 – Line loss;
t1 – Line loss detection;
t2 – Undervoltage actuation (F021 without Ride-Through);
t3 – Line return;
t4 – Line return detection;
t5 – Undervoltage actuation (F021 with Ride-Through).
If the line voltage produces an Ud voltage between the values adjusted in P0322 and P0323, the fault F0150
may occur, the values of P0321, P0322 and P0323 must be readjusted.

NOTE!

When one of the functions, Ride-Through or Flying Start, is activated, the parameter P0357 (Line
Phase Loss Time) is ignored, regardless of the adjusted time.

NOTE!

Cautions with the application:
It is mandatory the use of a line reactor to limit the inrush current when the line returns;
Use oversized Ultra-Rapid fuses or normal fuses for the same reason.

NOTE!

The Ride-Through function activation occurs when the power supply voltage is lower than the value
(P0321/1.35).
Ud=VAC x 1.35

P0321 – DC Link Power Loss
Adjustable
Range:

178 to 282 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
425 to 737 V
425 to 737 V
486 to 885 V
486 to 885 V

Factory
Setting:

P0296=0: 252 V
P0296=1: 436 V
P0296=2: 459 V
P0296=3: 505 V
P0296=4: 551 V
P0296=5: 602 V
P0296=6: 660 V
P0296=7: 689 V
P0296=8: 792 V

Factory
Setting:

P0296=0: 245 V
P0296=1: 423 V
P0296=2: 446 V
P0296=3: 490 V
P0296=4: 535 V
P0296=5: 585 V
P0296=6: 640 V
P0296=7: 668 V
P0296=8: 768 V

P0322 – DC Link Ride-Through
Adjustable
Range:

12

12-16

178 to 282 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
425 to 737 V
425 to 737 V
486 to 885 V
486 to 885 V

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0323 – DC Link Power Back
Adjustable
Range:

178 to 282 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
308 to 616 V
425 to 737 V
425 to 737 V
486 to 885 V
486 to 885 V

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

P0296=0: 267 V
P0296=1: 462 V
P0296=2: 486 V
P0296=3: 535 V
P0296=4: 583 V
P0296=5: 638 V
P0296=6: 699 V
P0296=7: 729 V
P0296=8: 838 V

44 FlyStart/RideThru

Description:
- P0321 – defines the Ud voltage level under which the line loss will be detected;
- P0322 – defines the Ud voltage level that the inverter will try to keep regulated, so that the motor keeps
operating;
- P0323 – defines the Ud voltage level at which the inverter will identify the return of the line, and from where the
motor must be reaccelerated.

NOTE!

These parameters work together with the parameters P0325 and P0326 for the Ride-Through in
vector control.

P0325 – Ride-Through Proportional Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 63.9

Factory
Setting:

22.8

Factory
Setting:

0.128

P0326 – Ride-Through Integral Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 9.999

Proprieties:

Vector

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
44 FlyStart/RideThru

Description:
These parameters configure the vector mode Ride-Through PI controller, which is responsible for keeping the DC
link voltage at the level set in P0322.

12

12-17

Functions Common to All the Control Modes
R.T. Regulator
Ud Ride-Through
(P0322)

Figure 11.1 and 11.2
Block Diagram Input

P0325, P0326
Ud

Figure 12.8 - Ride-Through PI controller

Normally the factory settings for P0325 and P0326 are adequate for the majority of the applications. Do not
change these parameters.

12.8 DC Braking [47]
NOTE!

DC break on the start and/or stop will not be active if P0202=4 (Vector with Encoder mode).

NOTE!

The DC Braking at start does not act when the Flying Start function is active (P0320=1 or 2).

The DC BRAKING consists in the application of direct current to the motor, allowing its fast stopping.
Table 12.7 - Parameters related to the DC braking
Control Mode
V/f scalar

DC Braking at Starting
P0299 and P0302

DC Braking at Stopping
P0300, P0301 and P0302

VVW

P0302 and P0299

P0300, P0301 and P0302

Sensorless Vector

P0299 and P0372

P0300, P0301 and P0372

P0299 - DC-Braking Start Time
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 15.0 s

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

V/f, VVW and Sless

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
47 DC Braking

Description:
This parameter sets the DC braking time at starting.
INJECTION OF DIRECT
CURRENT AT STARTING

Motor Speed
Time
P0299
DC Braking

12

P0302/P0372
(V/f, VVW)/(Sensorless)
Time

Run
Stop

Figure 12.9 - DC braking operation at starting

12-18

0.0 s

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

P0300 – DC-Braking Stop Time
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 15.0 s

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

V/f, VVW and Sless

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

0.0 s

47 DC Braking

Description:
This parameter sets the DC braking time at stopping.
The figure 12.10 presents the DC braking operation via ramp disabling (refer to P0301).
a) V/f scalar
Motor Speed

P0300

P0301
Time
DEAD TIME
+24 V
DIx – Run/Stop
Open

Figure 12.10 (a) - DC braking operation at the ramp disabling (via ramp disable)

b) VVW and Sensorless Vector

DC Current
Injection
Motor Speed

P0300
P0301
Time

+24 V
DIx – Run/Stop
Open

Figure 12.10 (b) - DC braking operation at the ramp disabling (via ramp disable) (cont.)

The figure 12.11 presents the DC braking operation via general disabling. This condition does only work in the
V/f scalar mode.
P0300

Motor Speed

Time

Dead
Time

12

+24 V
DIx - General
Enable
Open

Figure 12.11 - DC braking operation via general disabling – V/f mode

12-19

Functions Common to All the Control Modes
For the V/f scalar control mode there is a “dead time” (motor rotates free), before starting the DC braking. This time
is necessary to the demagnetization of the motor and it is proportional to its speed.
During the DC braking the inverter indicates the “DCbreak” status at the keypad (HMI) top left corner.
During the braking process, if the inverter is enabled, the braking is interrupted and the inverter will operate normally
again.

		ATTENTION!

The DC Braking may continue active after the motor has already stopped. Be careful with the motor
thermal sizing for short period cyclic braking.

P0301 – DC-Braking Speed
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 450 rpm

Proprieties:

V/f, VVW and Sless

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

30 rpm

47 DC Braking

Description:
This parameter establishes the beginning point for the DC braking application at stopping. Refer to the figures
12.10 (a) and (b).

P0302 – DC-Braking Voltage
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 10.0 %

Proprieties:

V/f and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

2.0 %

47 DC Braking

Description:
This parameter adjusts the DC voltage (braking torque) applied to the motor during the braking.
The adjustment must be done by increasing gradually the P0302 value, which varies from 0 to 10 % of the rated
voltage, until getting the desired braking.
This parameter works only for the V/f scalar and VVW control modes.

P0372 – DC-Braking Current for Sensorless

12

Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 90.0 %

Proprieties:

Sless

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

12-20

47 DC Braking

Factory
Setting:

40.0 %

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

Description:
This parameter adjusts the current level (DC braking torque) applied to the motor during the braking.
The programmed current level is a percentage of the inverter rated current.
This parameter works only in the Sensorless Vector control mode.

12.9 Skip Speed [48]
The parameters of this group prevent the motor from operating permanently at speed values where, for instance,
the mechanic system enters in resonance (causing exaggerated vibration or noise).

P0303 – Skip Speed 1
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Factory
Setting:

600 rpm

Factory
Setting:

900 rpm

Factory
Setting:

1200 rpm

Factory
Setting:

0 rpm

P0304 – Skip Speed 2
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

P0305 – Skip Speed 3
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

P0306 – Skip Band
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 750 rpm

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
48 Skip Speed

Description:
This actuation of these parameters occurs as presented in the figure 12.12 next.
The passage through the avoided speed range (2 x P0306) takes place by means of the acceleration/deceleration
ramps.
The function does not operate properly if two bands of “Skip Speed” overlap.

12

12-21

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

Motor speed

P0305

2 x P0306

P0304

2 x P0306

P0303

P0305

P0304

P0303

Speed Reference

Figure 12.12 - “Skip Speed” actuation curve

12.10 SEARCH OF ZERO OF THE ENCODER
The zero search function attempts to synchronize the minimum counting or the maximum counting visualized in
the parameter P0039. Accountant of the Pulses of Encoder, with the pulse of zero of the encoder.
The function is activated by setting P0191 =1. It will just be executed once, when happening the first zero pulse
after the activation of the function.
Among the actions accomplished are: the parameter P0039 is reduced to zero (or fitting with the value of
4xP0405), and the parameter P0192 starts to indicate P0192= Completed.

P0191 – Encoder Zero Search
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = On

Factory
Setting:

0

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

00 ALL PARAMETERS

Description:
On the inverter initialization, the parameter P0191 starts on zero. By setting to one, it activates the operation of the
zero search function, while the parameter P0192 stays on zero (Inactive).

P0192 – Status Encoder Zero Search

12

Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = Finished

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

00 ALL PARAMETERS

12-22

Factory
Setting:

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

Description:
On the inverter initialization, this parameter starts on zero.
When the value is changed to 1 (Concluded), it indicates that the zero search function was executed, and this
function returns to the state of Inactive, although P0191 continues equal to one (Active).

12

12-23

Functions Common to All the Control Modes

12

12-24

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

DIGITAL AND ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
This section presents the parameters for the configuration of the CFW-11 inputs and outputs, as well as the
parameters for the command of the inverter in the Local or Remote Situations.

13.1 I/O Configuration [07]
13.1.1 Analog Inputs [38]
In the standard CFW-11 configuration 2 analog inputs are available (AI1 and AI2), and as accessories other 2
more inputs can be added (AI3 and AI4). AI4 is available on the IOA-01 accessory and AI3 on the IOB-01.
With those inputs it is possible, for instance, the use of an external speed reference or the connection of a
sensor for the temperature measurement (PTC). The details for those configurations are described in the
following parameters.

P0018 – AI1 Value
P0019 – AI2 Value
P0020 – AI3 Value
P0021 – AI4 Value
Adjustable
Range:

-100.00 to 100.00 %

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION

Factory
Setting:
or

38 Analog Inputs

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
38 Analog Inputs

Description:
These read only parameters indicate the value of the analog inputs AI1 to AI4, as a percentage of the full scale.
The indicated values are the ones obtained after the offset action and the multiplication by the gain. Refer to the
description of the parameters P0230 to P0250.

P0230 – Analog Input Dead Zone
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = On

Factory
Setting:

0

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION
38 Analog Inputs

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
38 Analog Inputs

13

13-1

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Description:
This parameter acts only for the analog inputs (AIx) programmed as speed reference, and it defines if the Dead Zone
at those inputs is On (1) or Off (0).
If the parameter is configured as Off (P0230=0), the signal at the analog input will work on the Speed Reference
starting from the minimum value (0 V / 0 mA / 4 mA or 10 V / 20 mA), and will be directly related to the minimum
speed programmed at P0133. Refer to the figure 13.1 (a).
If the parameter is configured as On (P0230=1), the signal at the analog inputs will have a Dead Zone, where the
Speed Reference remains in the minimum value (P0133), even with the variation of the input signal. Refer to the
figure 13.1 (b).

Reference

Reference

P0134

P0134

P0133

P0133

AIx Signal

0
0.................................... 10 V
0...................................20 mA
4 mA...............................20 mA
10 V................................... 0
20 mA................................ 0
20 mA..............................4 mA

Figure 13.1 (a) - Analog input actuation with
Dead Zone Off

AIx Signal

0
0.................................... 10 V
0...................................20 mA
4 mA...............................20 mA
10 V................................... 0
20 mA................................ 0
20 mA..............................4 mA

Figure 13.1 (b) - Analog input actuation with
Dead Zone On

In case that the analog inputs AI2 and AI4 are programmed for -10 V to +10 V (P0238 and P0248 configured in 4),
there will be curves identical to those of the figure 13.1 above; only when AI2 or AI4 is negative the speed direction
will be inverted.

P0231 – AI1 Signal Function
P0236 – AI2 Signal Function
P0241 – AI3 Signal Function
Adjustable
Range:

13

13-2

0 = Speed Reference
1 = No Ramp Reference
2 = Maximum Torque Current
3 = Process Variable
4 = PTC
5 = Not Used
6 = Not Used
7 = PLC Use

Factory
Setting:

0

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

P0246 – AI4 Signal Function
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Speed Reference
1 = No Ramp Reference
2 = Maximum Torque Current
3 = Process Variable
4 = Not Used
5 = Not Used
6 = Not Used
7 = PLC Use

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION

Factory
Setting:

or

38 Analog Inputs

0

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
38 Analog Inputs

Description:
The functions of the analog inputs are defined in those parameters.
When the option 0 (Speed Reference) is selected, the analog inputs are able to supply the reference for the motor,
subject to the specified limits (P0133 and P0134) and to the ramp action (P0100 to P0103). Therefore, it is also
necessary to configure the parameters P0221 and/or P0222, selecting the use of the desired analog input (For more
details refer to the description of those parameters in the section 13.3 and to the figure 13.8 in this manual).
The option 1 (No Ramp Reference – valid only for the vector mode) is used generally as an additional
reference signal, for instance in applications using a dancer (Refer to the figure 13.8, option without acceleration
and deceleration ramp).
The option 2 (Maximum Torque Current) makes it possible that the forward and reverse torque current limit
control be done by means of the selected analog input. In this case P0169 and P0170 are not used.
The adjustment done at the analog input AI1, AI2, AI3 or AI4 can be monitored via parameters P0018, P0019,
P0020 or P0021 respectively, The value presented at this parameter will be the maximum torque current expressed
as a percentage of the motor rated current (P0401). The indication range will be from 0 to 200 %. When the analog
input is equal to 10 V (maximum), the corresponding monitoring parameter will show 200 %, and the value of the
maximum forward and reverse torque current will be 200 %.
In order that the expressions which determine the total current and the maximum torque developed by the motor
(sections 11.5 and 11.8.6) remain valid, replace P0169, P0170 by P0018 to P0021.
The option 3 (Process Variable) defines the analog input as the PID Regulator feedback signal (E.g.: pressure sensor,
temperature, etc.). Therefore it is also necessary to configure the parameter P0524 (PID Feedback Selection).
When the analog input is at its maximum limit (P0018 to P0021 indicating 100 %), the process variable will also
be at the maximum value (100 %).
The option 4 (PTC – not available for the AI4 input) configures the input for motor temperature monitoring
by means of a PTC type sensor, when it is present in the motor. Therefore it is also necessary to configure one
analog output (AO) as a current source for feeding the PTC. More details of this function are described in the
section 15.2 – Motor Overtemperature Protection.
The option 7 (PLC use) configures the signal at the input to be used by the PLC11 board.

13

P0232 – AI1 Gain
P0237 – AI2 Gain
13-3

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

P0242 – AI3 Gain
P0247 – AI4 Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 9.999

Factory
Setting:

1.000

Factory
Setting:

0.00 %

Factory
Setting:

0.00 s

P0234 – AI1 Offset
P0239 – AI2 Offset
P0244 – AI3 Offset
P0249 – AI4 Offset
Adjustable
Range:

-100.00 to 100.00 %

P0235 – AI1 Filter
P0240 – AI2 Filter
P0245 – AI3 Filter
P0250 – AI4 Filter
Adjustable
Range:

0.00 to 16.00 s

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

38 Analog Inputs

38 Analog Inputs

Description:

AI1 - P0231
AI2 - P0236
AI3 - P0241
AI4 - P0246

AI1 - P0232
AI2 - P0237
AI3 - P0242
AI4 - P0247
GAIN

OFFSET AI1 - P0234
AI2 - P0239
AI3 - P0244
AI4 - P0249

13

AI1’ - P0018
AI2’ - P0019
AI3’ - P0020
AI4’ - P0021

AIx'
Filter AI1 - P0235
AI2 - P0240
AI3 - P0245
AI4 - P0250

Figure 13.2 - Analog input block diagram

13-4

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

The AIx’ internal value is the result of the following equation:
Alx' = Alx + OFFSET x 10 V
100

x Gain

For instance: AIx=5 V, OFFSET=-70 % and Gain=1.000:
Alx' = 5 + (-70) x 10 V
100

x1 = –2 V

AIx’=-2 V means that the motor will rotate in the reverse direction with a reference in module equal to 2 V, provided
that the AIx function is “Speed Reference”. For the AIx function “Maximum Torque Current”, negative values are
clipped at 0.0 %.
For the filter parameters (P0235, P0240, P0245 and P0250), the adjusted value corresponds to the RC constant
used for filtering the signal read at the input.

P0233 – AI1 Signal Type
P0243 – AI3 Signal Type
Adjustable
Range:

0 = 0 to 10 V/20 mA
1 = 4 to 20 mA
2 = 10 V/20 mA to 0
3 = 20 to 4 mA

Factory
Setting:

0

Factory
Setting:

0

P0238 – AI2 Signal Type
P0248 – AI4 Signal Type
Adjustable
Range:

0 = 0 to 10 V/20 mA
1 = 4 to 20 mA
2 = 10 V/20 mA to 0
3 = 20 to 4 mA
4 = –10 V to +10 V

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION

or

38 Analog Inputs

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
38 Analog Inputs

Description:
These parameters configure the signal type (if it is current or voltage) that will be read at each analog input, as well
as its range. Refer to the tables 13.1 and 13.2 for more details on this configuration.
Table 13.1 - DIP Switches related to the analog inputs
Parameter

Input

Switch

Location

P0233
P0238

AI1
AI2

S1.4
S1.3

Control Board

P0243

AI3

S3.1

IOB

P0248

AI4

S3.1

IOA

13

13-5

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Table 13.2 - Configuration of the analog input signals
P0233, P0243
0
1
2
3
–

P0238, P0248
0
1
2
3
4

Input Signal
(0 to 10) V / (0 to 20) mA
(4 to 20) mA
(10 to 0) V / (20 to 0) mA
(20 to 4) mA
(-10 to +10) V

Switch Position
Off/On
On
Off/On
On
Off

When current signals are used at the input, the switch corresponding to the desired input must be set in the “ON”
position.
Inverse reference is obtained with the options 2 and 3, i.e., maximum speed is obtained with minimum reference.

13.1.2 Analog Outputs [39]
In the CFW-11 standard configuration are available 2 analog outputs (AO1 and AO2), and 2 more (AO3 and
AO4) can be added with the IOA-01 accessory. The parameters related to those outputs are described next.

P0014 – AO1 Value
P0015 – AO2 Value
Adjustable
Range:

0.00 to 100.00 %

Factory
Setting:

P0016 – AO3 Value
P0017 – AO4 Value
Adjustable
Range:

-100.00 to 100.00 %

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION
39 Analog Outputs

Factory
Setting:
or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
39 Analog Outputs

Description:
Those read only parameters indicate the value of the analog outputs AO1 to AO4, as a percentage of the full
scale. The indicated values are those obtained after the multiplication by the gain. Refer to the description of the
parameters P0251 to P0261.

P0251 – AO1 Function

13

13-6

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

P0254 – AO2 Function
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Speed Reference
1 = Total Reference
2 = Real Speed
3 = Torque Current Reference
4 = Torque Current
5 = Output Current
6 = Process Variable
7 = Active Current
8 = Output Power
9 = PID Setpoint
10 = Torque Current > 0
11 = Motor Torque
12 = SoftPLC
13 = PTC
14 = Not Used
15 = Not Used
16 = Motor Ixt
17 = Encoder Speed
18 = P0696 Value
19 = P0697 Value
20 = P0698 Value
21 = P0699 Value
22 = PLC11
23 = Id* Current

Factory
Setting:

P0251=2
P0254=5

P0257 – AO3 Function
P0260 – AO4 Function
Adjustable
Range:

Factory
Setting:

0 = Speed Reference
1 = Total Reference
2 = Real Speed
3 = Torque Current Reference
4 = Torque Current
5 = Output Current
6 = Process Variable
7 = Active Current
8 = Output Power
9 = PID Setpoint
10 = Torque Current > 0
11 = Motor Torque
12 = SoftPLC
13 = Not Used
14 = Not Used
15 = Not Used
16 = Motor Ixt
17 = Encoder Speed
18 = P0696 Value
19 = P0697 Value
20 = P0698 Value
21 = P0699 Value
22 = Not Used
23 = Id* Current
24 to 71 = Exclusive WEG Use

P0257=2
P0260=5

13

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION
39 Analog Outputs

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
39 Analog Outputs
13-7

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Description:
These parameters set the functions of the analog outputs, according to the table 13.3.
Table 13.3 - Analog output functions
P0251
(AO1)

P0254
(AO2)

P0257
(AO3)

P0260
(AO4)

0
1
2*
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

0
1
2
3
4
5*
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

0
1
2*
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
-

0
1
2
3
4
5*
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
-

14 and 15

14 and 15

13, 14, 15
and 22

13, 14, 15
and 22

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
-

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
-

16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24 to 71

16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24 to 71

Functions
Speed Reference
Total Reference
Real Speed
Torque Current Reference (Vector Mode)
Torque Current (Vector Mode)
Output Current (with a 0.3 second filter)
PID Process Variable
Active Current (V/f or VVW Mode, with a 0.1 second filter)
Output Power (with a 0.5 second filter)
PID Setpoint
Torque Current > 0 (Vector Mode)
Motor Torque
SoftPLC
PTC
Not Used
Motor Ixt
Encoder Speed
P0696 Value
P0697 Value
P0698 Value
P0699 Value
PLC11
Id* Current
Exclusive WEG Use
* Factory Setting

P0252 – AO1 Gain
P0255 – AO2 Gain
P0258 – AO3 Gain
P0261 – AO4 Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 9.999

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION
39 Analog Outputs

Description:
They adjust the analog output gains. Refer to the figure 13.3.

13

13-8

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
39 Analog Outputs

1.000

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Function
AO1 - P0251
AO2 - P0254
AO3 - P0257
AO4 - P0260
Speed Reference
Total Reference
Real Speed
Torque Current Reference
Torque Current
Output Current
Value
AO1 - P0014
AO2 - P0015
AO3 - P0016
AO4 - P0017

Process Variable (PID)
Active Current
Output Power
PID Setpoint
Torque Current > 0
Motor Torque
SoftPLC

Gain
AO1 - P0252
AO2 - P0255
AO3 - P0258
AO4 - P0261

Signal
AO1 - P0253
AO2 - P0256
AO3 - P0259
AO4 - P0262

AOx

PTC
Not Used
Not Used
Motor Ixt
Encoder Speed
P0696 Value
P0697 Value
P0698 Value
P0699 Value
PLC11

Figure 13.3 - Analog output block diagram

13

13-9

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs
Table 13.4 - Full scale
SCALE OF THE ANALOG OUTPUT INDICATIONS
Variable
Speed Reference
Total Reference
Real Speed
Encoder Speed
Torque Current Reference
Torque Current
Torque Current > 0
Motor Torque

Full Scale (*)

P0134

2.0 x InomHD
2.0 x Inom

Output Current
1.5 x InomHD
Active Current
PID Process Variable
P0528
PID Setpoint
Output Power
1.5 x √3 x P0295 x P0296
Motor Ixt
100 %
SoftPLC
P0696 Value
P0697 Value
32767
P0698 Value
P0699 Value
(*) When the signal is inverse (10 to 0 V, 20 to 0 mA or 20 to 4 mA) the values
in the table become the beginning of the scale.

P0253 – AO1 Signal Type
P0256 – AO2 Signal Type
Adjustable
Range:

0 = 0 to 10 V/20 mA
1 = 4 to 20 mA
2 = 10 V/20 mA to 0
3 = 20 to 4 mA

Factory
Setting:

0

Factory
Setting:

4

P0259 – AO3 Signal Type
P0262 – AO4 Signal Type

13

Adjustable
Range:

0 = 0 to 20 mA
1 = 4 to 20 mA
2 = 20 mA to 0
3 = 20 to 4 mA
4 = 0 to 10 V
5 = 10 to 0 V
6 = -10 to +10 V

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION
39 Analog Outputs

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
39 Analog Outputs

Description:
These parameters configure if the analog output signal will be in current or voltage, with direct or inverse reference.
In order to adjust these parameters, it is also necessary to set the “DIP switches” of the control board or of the IOA
Accessory Board, according to the tables 13.5, 13.6 and 13.7.

13-10

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs
Table 13.5 - DIP switches related to the analog outputs
Parameter
P0253
P0256
P0259
P0262

Output
AO1
AO2
AO3
AO4

Switch
S1.1
S1.2
S2.1
S2.2

Location
Control Board
IOA

Table 13.6 - Configuration of the analog outputs AO1 and AO2 signals
P0253, P0256
0
1
2
3

Output Signal
(0 to 10) V / (0 to 20) mA
(4 to 20) mA
(10 to 0) V / (20 to 0) mA
(20 to 4) mA

Switch Position
Off / On
On
Off / On
On

Table 13.7 - Configuration of the analog outputs AO3 and AO4 signals
P0259, P0262
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

Output Signal
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
20 to 0 mA
20 to 4 mA
0 to 10 V
10 to 0 V
-10 to +10 V

Switch Position
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On

For AO1 and AO2, when current signals are used, the switch corresponding to the desired output must be set in the
“ON” position.
For AO3 and AO4, when current signals are used, the outputs AO3 (I) and AO4 (I) must be used. For voltage signals
use the outputs AO3 (V) and AO4 (V). The switch corresponding to the desired output must be set in “ON” only in
order to use range from -10 V to +10 V .

13.1.3 Digital Inputs [40]
The CFW-11 has 6 digital inputs in the standard version, and 2 more can be added with the IOA-01 and
IOB-01 accessories. The parameters that configure those inputs are presented next.

P0012 – DI8 to DI1 Status
Adjustable
Range:

Bit 0 = DI1
Bit 1 = DI2
Bit 2 = DI3
Bit 3 = DI4
Bit 4 = DI5
Bit 5 = DI6
Bit 6 = DI7
Bit 7 = DI8

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION
40 Digital Inputs

Factory
Setting:

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
40 Digital Inputs

Description:
By means of this parameter it is possible to visualize the status of the 6 control board digital inputs (DI1 to DI6) and
of the 2 accessory digital inputs (DI7 and DI8) as well.

13-11

13

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

The indication is done by means of the numbers 1 and 0, representing respectively the “Active” and “Inactive” states
of the inputs. The state of each input is considered as one digit in the sequence where DI1 represents the least
significant digit.
Example: In case the sequence 10100010 is presented on the keypad (HMI), it will correspond to the following
status of the DIs:
Table 13.8 - Digital inputs status
DI8

DI7

DI6

DI5

DI4

DI3

DI2

DI1

Active
(+24 V)

Inactive
(0 V)

Active
(+24 V)

Inactive
(0 V)

Inactive
(0 V)

Inactive
(0 V)

Active
(+24 V)

Inactive
(0 V)

P0263 – DI1 Function
P0264 – DI2 Function
P0265 – DI3 Function
P0266 – DI4 Function
P0267 – DI5 Function
P0268 – DI6 Function
P0269 – DI7 Function
P0270 - DI8 Function
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 31

Factory
Setting:

P0263=1
P0264=8
P0265=0
P0266=0
P0267=10
P0268=14
P0269=0
P0270=0

Table 13.9 - Digital input functions
Functions

13

Not used
Run/Stop
General Enable
Fast Stop
FWD Run
REV Run
3-Wire Start
3-Wire Stop
FWD/REV
LOC/REM
JOG
Increase E.P.
Decrease E.P.
Multispeed
Ramp 2

13-12

P0263
(DI1)
0, 13 and 23
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14

P0264
(DI2)

P0265
(DI3)

P0266
(DI4)

0, 13 and 23 0*, 13 and 23 0* and 23
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8*
8
8
9
9
9
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
12
13
14
14
14

P0267
(DI5)

P0268
(DI6)

0 and 23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10*
11
12
13
14

0 and 23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14*

P0269
(DI7)

P0270
(DI8)

0*, 13 and 23 0*, 13 and 23
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
14
14

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Functions
Speed/Torque
JOG+
JOGNo Ext. Alarm
No Ext. Fault
Reset
PLC Use
Manual/Auto
Disable FlyStart
DC Link Regul.
Program. Off
Load User 1/2
Load User 3
DO2 Timer
DO3 Timer
Trace Function
* Factory setting

P0263
(DI1)

P0264
(DI2)

P0265
(DI3)

P0266
(DI4)

P0267
(DI5)

P0268
(DI6)

P0269
(DI7)

P0270
(DI8)

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

40 Digital Input

40 Digital Input

Description:
Those parameters make it possible to configure the functions of the digital inputs, according to the listed range.
Some notes regarding the Digital Input functions are presented next.
- Run/Stop: In order to assure the correct operation of this function, it is necessary to program P0224 and/or
P0227 in 1.
- Increase E.P. and Decrease E.P. (Electronic Potentiometer): They are active when +24 V is applied (for Increasing
E.P.) or 0 V (for Decreasing E.P.) at the respective input programmed for that function. It is also necessary to
program P0221 and/or P0222 in 7. Refer to the section 12.5.
- Local/Remote: When programmed, this function activates “Local” when 0 V is applied to the input, and “Remote”
when +24 V are applied. It is also necessary to program P0220=4 (DIx).
- Speed/Torque: This function is valid for P0202=3 or 4 (Sensorless Vector Control or Vector with Encoder), and
“Speed” is selected with 0 V applied to the input, whereas “Torque” by applying 24 V.
When Torque is selected, the speed regulator parameters P0161 and P0162 become inactive (*). Thus the Total
Reference becomes the Torque Regulator input. Refer to the figures 11.1 and 11.2.
(*) The speed regulator of the PID type is converted into a P type, with proportional gain 1.00 and a null integral
gain.
When Speed is selected, the gains of the speed regulator become again defined by P0161 and P0162. In the
applications with torque control it is recommended to follow the method described at the parameter P0160.
-

DC Link Regulation: it must be used when P0184=2. For more details, refer to this parameter description in
the section 11.8.7 of this manual.

-

JOG+ and JOG-: those are functions valid only for P0202=3 or 4.

13-13

13

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

- Disables Flying-Start: it is valid for P0202≠4. By applying +24 V to the digital input programmed for this
purpose, the Flying-Start function is disabled. By applying 0 V, the Flying-Start function is enabled again,
provided that P0320 be equal to 1 or 2. Refer to the section 12.7.
-

Load User 1/2: this function allows the selection of the user memory 1 or 2, in a similar process than
P0204=7 or 8, with the difference that the user memory is loaded from a transition of the DIx programmed for
this function.
When the state of the DIx changes from low level to high level (transition from 0 V to 24 V), the user memory
1 is loaded, provided that the contents of the inverter actual parameters had been previously transferred to the
parameter memory 1 (P0204=10).
When the sate of the DIx changes from high level to low level (transition from 24 V to 0 V), the user memory 2
is loaded, provided that the contents of the inverter actual parameters had been previously transferred to the
parameter memory 2 (P0204=11).
Inverter
Parameters
P0263 to P0270
(DIx)=27
P0204=7
P0204=8

User 1

DIx=24 V

DIx=24 V
DIx=0 V

DIx=0 V
User 2

P0263 to P0270 (DIx)=27

Figure 13.4 - Details on the working of the Load User 1/2 function

-

Load User 3: this function allows the selection of the user memory 3, in a similar process than P0204=9, with
the difference that the user memory is loaded from a transition of the DIx programmed for this function.

When the DIx state changes from low level to high level (transition from 0 V to 24 V), the user memory 3 is loaded,
provided that the contents of the inverter actual parameters had been previously transferred to the parameter
memory 3 (P0204=12).

NOTES!

Make sure that when using those functions the parameter sets (user memory 1, 2 or 3) be totally
compatible with the application (motors, Run/Stop commands, etc.).

It will not be possible to load the user memory with the inverter enabled.
If two or three parameter sets from different motors were saved in the user memories 1, 2 and/or
3, the correct current values must be adjusted at the parameters P0156, P0157 and P0158 for
each user memory.

13

-

Programming Off: when this function is programmed and the digital input is with +24 V, parameter changes
will not be allowed, regardless of the values set at P0000 and P0200. When the DIx input is with 0 V, the
parameter changes will be conditioned to the P0000 and P0200 settings.

-

DO2 and DO3 Timer: this function acts as a timer to activate and deactivate the relays 2 and 3 (DO2 and
DO3).

When the timer function for the relay 2 or 3 is programmed at any DIx, and a transition from 0 V to +24 V occurs,
the programmed relay will be activated with the delay set in P0283 (DO2) or P0285 (DO3). When a transition from
+24 V to 0 V occurs, the programmed relay will be deactivated with the delay adjusted in P0284 (DO2) or P0286
(DO3).

13-14

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

After the transition of the DIx, either for activating or deactivating the programmed relay, it is necessary that the DIx
remains in ON or OFF during at least the time set in P0283/P0285 or P0284/P0286. Otherwise the timer will be
reset. Refer to the figure 13.5.
Note: In order to enable that function it is also necessary to program P0276 and/or P0277=29 (Timer).
+24 V
DIx

0V
ON

DO2 (RL2)
DO3 (RL3)

OFF

P0283/P0285

P0284/P0286

P0283/P0285

P0284/P0286

Figure 13.5 - Operation of the timer function DO2 (RL2) and DO3 (RL3)

-

Multispeed: the setting of the parameters P0266 and/or P0267 and/or P0268=13 requires that the parameters
P0221 and/or P0222 be programmed in 8. Refer to the description of the parameters P0124 to P0131 in the
section 12.4.

-

Trace Function: it triggers the data acquisition at the channels selected with that function, when the three
following conditions were fulfilled:
- If the DIx is with 24 V;
- Trigger condition set in P0552=6 “DIx”;
- Function waiting for the trigger, P0576=1 “Waiting”.
For more details refer to the section 19, Trace Function.

-

No External Alarm: This function will indicate “External Alarm” (A090) on the keypad (HMI) display when the
programmed digital input is open (0 V). If +24 V is applied to the input, the alarm message will disappear
automatically from the keypad (HMI) display. The motor keeps working normally, regardless of the state of that
input.

-

Manual/Automatic: it allows selecting the CFW-11 speed reference between the reference defined by
P0221/P0222 (Manual mode – DIx open) and the reference defined by the PID regulator (Automatic mode
– DIx with 24 V). Refer to the section 20 – PID Regulator, for more details.

-

PLC use: When this option is selected it will not take any action for the CFW-11. It can be used as a remote
input for the PLC11 board or for communication networks.

13

13-15

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

a) RUN/STOP

b) GENERAL ENABLE

Acceleration ramp

Motor speed

Motor runs free (coasts)

Acceleration ramp

Deceleration
ramp

Motor speed
Time

Open

DIx

Time

24 V

24 V

Open

DIx
Time

Note: All the digital inputs programmed for General Enable,
Fast Stop, Forward Run or Reverse Run must be in the ON
state, so that the CFW-11 operates as described above.

Time
Note: All the digital inputs programmed for Run/Stop, Fast
Stop, Forward Run or Reverse Run must be in the ON state,
so that the CFW-11 operates as described above.

d) FWD/REV

c) NO EXTERNAL FAULT
Motor runs free (coasts)

Forward

Motor
speed

Time

Motor speed
Reverse

Time
24 V

24 V
DIx
Open

Time

DIx

Open
Time

e) RAMP 2

f) FAST STOP
24 V

DIx Run/Stop

Open
Time
Motor speed

Motor decelerates
with ramp zero

24 V
DIx – ramp 2

Time

Open
Time

P0102

24 V

P0103
P0101

P0100

DIx – Fast Stop

Motor speed

Open

Time

Time

g) LOAD USER VIA DIx
24 V

13

DIx

24 V

Load user 1

Open

Load user 3
Time
24 V

DIx

Load user 2
Open

Open
Time

Time

13-16

Figure 13.6 a) to g) - Details on the operation of the digital input functions

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs
h) JOG
JOG Speed (P0122)
Motor speed
Acceleration ramp
Deceleration ramp
Time

24 V
Run/Stop
Open

Time

24 V
DIx - JOG
Open

Time

24 V
General enable

Open
Time

i) JOG + and JOG -

JOG+ (P0122), JOG- (P0123) Speed

Motor speed
Time

24 V

DIx - JOG ±

Open
24 V

Time
General enable

General enable
Run/Stop

Run/Stop

Open

Open
Time

j) RESET
With Fault
Inverter
status

Without fault

(*)
Time

24 V
DIx - Reset

Open
Time
24 V

Reset
(*) The condition that caused the error persists

13

Time

Figure 13.6 h) to j) - Details on the operation of the digital input functions (cont.)

13-17

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs
k) 3-WIRE START / STOP
24 V

DIx - Start
Open

Time

24 V

Time

DIx - Stop

Open
Time

Motor speed
Time

l) FWD Run / REV Run
24 V
DIx - Forward

Open
Time
24 V

DIx - Reverse

Open
Time

Motor speed

Forward
Time

Reverse

m) ELECTRONIC POTENTIOMETER (E.P.)

Increase
Digital Inputs

Acceleration
Deceleration

Decrease

&

Enabling

Motor
speed

Speed Reference

Reset to
zero

Minimum
speed
Time
24 V

DIx Increase

13

Reset

Open
Time

24 V

Decrease

Time

24 V
DIx - Run/Stop

Open

Time

Figure 13.6 k) to m) - Details on the operation of the digital input functions (cont.)

13-18

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs
13.1.4 Digital Outputs / Relays [41]
The CFW-11 has 3 relay digital outputs as standard on its control board, and 2 more digital outputs of the
open collector type that can be added with the accessories IOA-01 or IOB-01. The next parameters configure
the functions related to those outputs.

P0013 – DO5 to DO1 Status
Adjustable
Range:

Bit 0 = DO1
Bit 1 = DO2
Bit 2 = DO3
Bit 3 = DO4
Bit 4 = DO5

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs

41 Digital Outputs

Description:
By means of this parameter it is possible to visualize the status of the control board 3 digital outputs (DO1 to DO3)
and the 2 digital outputs of the optional board (DO4 and DO5).
The indication is done by means of the numbers "1" and "0", representing respectively the “Active” and “Inactive”
states of the outputs. The state of each output is considered as one digit in the sequence where DO1 represents the
least significant digit.
Example: In case the sequence 00010010 is presented on the keypad (HMI), it will correspond to the following
status of the DOs:
Table 13.10 - Digital outputs status
DO5

DO4

DO3

DO2

DO1

Active
(+24 V)

Inactive
(0 V)

Inactive
(0 V)

Active
(+24 V)

Inactive
(0 V)

P0275 – DO1 Function (RL1)
P0276 – DO2 Function (RL2)
P0277 – DO3 Function (RL3)
P0278 – DO4 Function
P0279 – DO5 Function
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 37

Factory
Setting:

P0275=13
P0276=2
P0277=1
P0278=0
P0279=0

13-19

13

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs
Table 13.11 - Digital output functions
Functions
Not Used
N* > Nx
N > Nx
N < Ny
N = N*
Zero Speed
Is > Ix
Is < Ix
Torque > Tx
Torque < Tx
Remote
Run
Ready
No Fault
No F070
No F071
No F006/021/022
No F051/054/057
No F072
4-20mA Ok
Value P0695
Forward
Process V. > PVx
Process V. < PVy
Ride-Through
Pre-Charge OK
Fault
Time Enabled > Hx
SoftPLC
Timer
N>Nx and Nt>Nx
F>Fx(1)
F>Fx(2)
STO
No F160
No Alarm
No Fault and No Alarm
PLC11
(*) Factory setting

P0275
(DO1)

P0276
(DO2)

P0277
(DO3)

P0278
(DO4)

P0279
(DO5)

0 and 29
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13*
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

0
1
2*
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

0
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

0*, 29 and 37
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
-

0*, 29 and 37
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
-

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION
41 Digital Outputs

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
41 Digital Outputs

Description:
They program the functions of the digital outputs, according to the options presented previously.
When the condition declared by the function is true, the digital output will be activated.

13

Example: Is>Ix function – when Is>Ix then DOx=saturated transistor and/or relay with the coil energized, and when
Is≤Ix then DOx=open transistor and/or relay with the coil not energized.
Some notes regarding the Digital Outputs are presented next.
- Not Used: it means that the digital outputs will remain always in a resting state, i.e., DOx=open transistor and/
or relay with the coil not energized.
13-20

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs
- Zero Speed: it means that the motor speed is below the value adjusted in P0291 (Zero Speed Zone).
- Torque > Tx and Torque < Tx: they are valid only for P0203=3 or 4 (Vector Control). In those functions
“Torque” corresponds to the motor torque as indicated at parameter P0009.
- Remote: it means that the inverter is operating in Remote situation.
- Run: it corresponds to enabled inverter. In this moment the IGBTs are commutating, and the motor may be at any
speed, inclusive zero.
- Ready: it corresponds to the inverter disabled, without fault and without undervoltage.
- No Fault: it means that the inverter is not disabled by any type of fault.
- No F070: it means that the inverter is not disabled by the F070 fault (Overcurrent or Short-circuit).
- No F071: it means that the inverter is not disabled by the F071 fault (Output Overcurrent).
- No F006+F021+F022: it means that the inverter is not disabled by the F006 fault (Line unbalance or phase
loss), neither by F021 (DC Link Undervoltage), nor by F022 (DC Link Overvoltage).
- No F051+F054+F057: it means that the inverter is not disabled by the F051 fault (Overtemperature U Phase
IGBTs), neither by F054 (Overtemperature V Phase IGBTs), nor by F057 (Overtemperature W Phase IGBTs).
- No F072: it means that the inverter is not disabled by the F072 fault (Motor Overload).
- 4 - 20 mA OK: it means that the current reference (4 to 20 mA) at the analog inputs AIx is inside the 4 to 20 mA
range.
- P0695 Value: it means that the state of the digital output will be controlled by P0695, which is written via the
network. Refer to the CFW-11 Serial Communication Manual for more details on this parameter.
- Forward: it means that when the motor is rotating in the forward direction the DOx=saturated transistor and/
or relay with the coil energized, and when the motor is rotating in the reverse direction, the DOx=open transistor
and/or relay with the coil not energized.
- Ride-Through: it means that the inverter is executing the Ride-Through function.
- Pre-charge OK: It means that the DC Link voltage is above the pre-charge voltage level.
- Fault: it means that the inverter is disabled by any type of fault.
- Timer: those timers activate or deactivate the relay outputs 2 and 3 (Refer to the parameters P0283 to P0286 next).
- N > Nx and Nt > Nx: (valid only for P0202=4 – Vector with Encoder) it means that both the conditions must be
satisfied so that DOx=saturated transistor and/or relay with the coil energized. In other words, it is enough that the
condition N>Nx be not satisfied (regardless of the Nt>Nx condition) so that DOx=open transistor and/or relay
with the coil not energized.
- SoftPLC: it means that the digital output state will be controlled by the programming done in the memory area
reserved to the SoftPLC function. Refer to the SoftPLC manual for more details.
- STO: it signalizes the STO state (Safety Stop active).

13

- No F160: It signalizes that the inverter is not disabled by F160 fault (Safety Stop Relay);
- No Alarm: it means that the inverter in not in the alarm condition.
- No Fault and No Alarm: it means that the inverter is not disabled by any type of fault and it is not in alarm
condition.
13-21

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs
- PLC11: This option configures the signal at the DO1 (RL1), DO2 (RL2) and DO3 (RL3) outputs to be used by the
PLC11.
Definitions of the symbols used in the function:
N = P0002 (Motor Speed);
N* = P0001 (Speed Reference);
Nx = P0288 (Nx Speed) – It is a reference point of the speed selected by the user;
Ny = P0289 (Ny Speed) – It is a reference point of the speed selected by the user;
Ix = P0290 (Ix Current) – It is a reference point of the current selected by the user;
Is = P0003 (Motor Current);
Torque = P0009 (Motor Torque);
Tx = P0293 (Tx Torque) – It is a reference point of the torque selected by the user;
PVx = P0533 (PVx Process Variable) – It is a reference point selected by the user;
PVy = P0534 (PVy Process Variable) – It is a reference point selected by the user;
Nt = Total Reference (refer to the figure 13.8);
Hx = P0294 (Hx Time);
F = P0005 (Motor Frequency);
Fx = P0281 (Fx Frequency) – It is a reference point of the motor frequency selected by the user;
PLC = Refer to the PLC accessory manual.
b) N > Nx

a) N* > Nx
N*

P0287

N
Nx (P0288)

Nx (P0288)

ON

ON

Relay/
Transistor
OFF

Relay/
Transistor OFF

OFF

c) N < Ny
P0287

Time

P0287

Time

OFF

d) N = N*
N
Ny (P0289)

N

N*

Time

P0287

Time

13

Relay/
Transistor ON

ON
ON
OFF

Relay/
Transistor

OFF

Figure 13.7 a) to d) - Details on the operation of the digital output functions

13-22

OFF

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs
e) N = 0 (Zero) Speed

f) Is > Ix
Is

Speed

P0291

Ix (P0290)
Time
ON

Relay/
Transistor

Relay/
Transistor OFF
OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

h) Torque > Tx

g) Is < Ix
Is

Motor Torque
(P0009)

Ix (P0290)

Tx (P0293)

Time
ON

Time

ON

Relay/
Transistor

ON
Relay/
Transistor OFF

OFF

OFF

j (a)) No fault

i) Torque < Tx

No fault

Motor torque
(P0009)
Tx (P0293)

Fault
Time

ON
Relay/
Transistor

Time
Relay/
Transistor
ON

ON

OFF

OFF

k) 4-20 mA Reference OK
j (b)) Fault
No fault
Reference

2 mA
Time

Fault
ON

Time
Relay/
Transistor

Relay/
Transistor
OFF
Time

ON

OFF

13

ON

Figure 13.7 e) to k) - Details on the operation of the digital output functions (cont.)

13-23

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

m) Process Variable < PVy

l) Process Variable > PVx

VPx (P0533)

VPy (P0534)

Time
Process
Variable

ON
Relay/
Transistor
OFF

Time

Process
Variable
ON

ON
Relay/
Transistor

OFF

OFF

o) Time enabled > Hx
n) Pre-Charge Ok

6553 h
N

DC Link

Hx (P0294)

Pre-charge
Level

Time

Time
0
Relay/
Transistor
ON

OFF

Enabled
Hours.
(P0043)

ON

Relay/
Transistor
ON

OFF

q) F > Fx

OFF

(1)

p) N > Nx and Nt > Nx

N
Nx (P0288)

Nt

P0281 + P0282
Fx (P0281)
P0281 - P0282

Time
ON
Relay/Transistor
OFF

r) F > Fx

N

ON
OFF

Relay

(2)

OFF

s) No Alarm

Fx (P0281)
P0281 - P0282

No Alarm
Alarm

ON

13

Time

N
Relay/Transistor
ON

Relay/
Transistor OFF

OFF

Figure 13.7 l) to s) - Details on the operation of the digital output functions (cont.)

13-24

OFF

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

P0281 – Fx Frequency
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 300.0 Hz

Factory
Setting:

4.0 Hz

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION

or

41 Digital Outputs

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
41 Digital Outputs

Description:
It is used in the digital output and relay functions:
F>Fx(1) and F>Fx(2)

P0282 – Fx Hysteresis
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 15.0 Hz

Factory
Setting:

2.0 Hz

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION

or

41 Digital Outputs

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
41 Digital Outputs

Description:
It is used in the digital output and relay functions:
F > Fx(1) and F>Fx(2)

P0283 – DO2 On Time
P0284 – DO2 Off Time
P0285 – DO3 On Time
P0286 – DO3 Off Time
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 300.0 s

Factory
Setting:

0.0 s

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION
41 Digital Outputs

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
41 Digital Outputs

Description:
Those parameters are used in relay outputs 2 and 3 Timer functions, they adjust the time for the activation or
deactivation of the relay after a transition of the digital input programmed for this function, as detailed in the
parameters of the previous section.
Thus, after a DIx transition for activating or deactivating the programmed relay, it is necessary that this DIx remains
in On/Off for at least the time adjusted in the parameters P0283/P0285 and P0284/P0286. Otherwise the timer
will be reset. Refer to the figure 13.5.
13-25

13

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs
P0287 – Hysteresis for Nx and Ny
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 900 rpm

Factory
Setting:

18 rpm
(15 rpm)

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs

41 Digital Outputs

Description:
It is used in the N > Nx and N < Ny functions of the digital and relay outputs.

P0288 – Nx Speed
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Factory
Setting:

120 rpm
(100 rpm)

Factory
Setting:

1800 rpm
(1500 rpm)

P0289 – Ny Speed
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs

41 Digital Outputs

Description:
They are used in the N* > Nx, N > Nx, and N < Ny functions of the digital and relay outputs.

P0290 – Ix Current
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 2 x Inom-ND

Factory
Setting:

1.0 x Inom-ND

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

41 Digital Outputs

41 Digital Outputs

Description:
It is used in the Is > Ix and Ix < Ix functions of the digital and relay outputs.

P0291 – Zero Speed Zone
Adjustable
Range:

13

0 to 18000 rpm

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

13-26

07 I/O CONFIGURATION
35 Zero Speed Logic

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
41 Digital Outputs

18 rpm
(15 rpm)

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Description:
It specifies the value in rpm where the Actual Speed will be considered null for the actuation of the Zero Speed Disable
function.
This parameter is also used for the functions: Digital and relay outputs, and by the PID regulator.

P0292 – N = N* Band
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Factory
Setting:

18 rpm
(15 rpm)

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION

or

41 Digital Outputs

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
41 Digital Outputs

Description:
It is used in the N = N* function of the digital and relay outputs.

P0293 – Tx Torque
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 200 %

Factory
Setting:

100 %

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION

or

41 Digital Outputs

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
41 Digital Outputs

Description:
It is used in the Torque > Tx and Torque < Tx functions of the digital and relay outputs.
In those functions the motor torque indicated in P0009 is compared with the value adjusted in P0293.
The setting of this parameter is expressed as a percentage of the motor rated current (P0401=100 %).

P0294 – Hx Time
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 6553 h

Factory
Setting:

4320 h

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

07 I/O CONFIGURATION
41 Digital Outputs

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
41 Digital Outputs

Description:
It is used in the Enabled Hours > Hx function of the digital and relay outputs.

13

13-27

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs
13.2 Local Command [31]
13.3 Remote Command [32]
In those parameter groups one can configure the origin of the main inverter commands when in the LOCAL or
in the REMOTE situation, as the Speed Reference, Speed Direction, Run/Stop and JOG.

P0220 – LOCAL/REMOTE Selection Source
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Always LOCAL
1 = Always REMOTE
2 = Local/Remote Key LOCAL
3 = Local/Remote Key REMOTE
4 = DIx
5 = Serial/USB LOCAL
6 = Serial/USB REMOTE
7 = Anybus-CC LOCAL
8 = Anybus-CC REMOTE
9 = CANopen/DeviceNet LOCAL
10 = CANopen/DeviceNet REMOTE
11 = SoftPLC LOCAL
12 = SoftPLC REMOTE
13 = PLC11 LOCAL
14 = PLC11 REMOTE

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

or

2

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

31 Local Command

32 Remote Command

Description:
It defines the origin of the command that will select between the LOCAL situation and the REMOTE situation,
where:
LOCAL: Means Local Default situation.
REMOTE: Means Remote Default situation.
DIx: Refer to the section 13.1.3.

P0221 – Speed Reference Selection – LOCAL Situation
P0222 – Speed Reference Selection – REMOTE Situation
Adjustable
Range:

13

13-28

0 = Keypad
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = AI3
4 = AI4
5 = AI1 + AI2 > 0 (Sum AIs > 0)
6 = AI1 + AI2 (Sum AIs)
7 = E.P.
8 = Multispeed
9 = Serial/USB
10 = Anybus-CC
11 = CANopen/DeviceNet
12 = SoftPLC
13 = PLC11

Factory
Setting:

P0221=0
P0222=1

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

31 Local Command

32 Local Command

Description:
They define the origin of the Speed Reference in the LOCAL situation and in the REMOTE situation.
Some notes about the options for those parameters:
The AIx’ designation refers to the analog signal obtained after the addition of the AIx input to the offset and its
multiplication by the applied gain (refer to the section 13.1.1).
The value of the reference adjusted with the
and
is contained in the parameter P0121.
When the option 7 is selected (E.P.), one of the digital inputs must be programmed at 11 (Increase E.P.) and
another at 12 (Decrease E.P.). Refer to the section 12.5 for more details.
When the option 8 is selected, P0266 and/or P0267 and/or P0268 must be programmed at 13 (Multispeed).
Refer to the section 12.4.
When P0203=1 (PID Regulator), do not use the reference via E.P.
When P0203=1, the value programmed in P0221/P022 becomes the PID Setpoint.

P0223 – FORWARD/REVERSE Selection - LOCAL Situation
P0226 – FORWARD/REVERSE Selection - REMOTE Situation
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Always FORWARD
1 = Always REVERSE
2 = Forward/Reverse Key (FWD)
3 = Forward/Reverse Key (REV)
4 = DIx
5 = Serial/USB (FWD)
6 = Serial/USB (REV)
7 = Anybus-CC (FWD)
8 = Anybus-CC (REV)
9 = CANopen/DeviceNet (FWD)
10 = CANopen/DeviceNet (REV)
11 = AI4 Polarity
12 = SoftPLC (FWD)
13 = SoftPLC (REV)
14 = AI2 Polarity
15 = PLC11 FORWARD
16 = PLC11 REVERSE

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
31 Local Command

Factory
Setting:

or

P0223=2
P0226=4

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
32 Remote Command

Description:
They define the origin of the “Speed Direction” command in the LOCAL situation and in the REMOTE situation,
where:
FWD: Means Forward Default situation.
REV: Means Reverse Default situation.
DIx: Refer to the section 13.1.3.
13-29

13

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

P0224 – Run/Stop Selection – LOCAL Situation
P0227 – Run/Stop Selection - REMOTE Situation
Adjustable
Range:

Factory
Setting:

0 = Keys
,
1 = DIx
2 = Serial/USB
3 = Anybus-CC
4 = CANopen/DeviceNet
5 = SoftPLC
6 = PLC11

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

or

31 Local Command

P0224=0
P0227=1

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
32 Remote Command

Description:
They define the origin of the Run/Stop command in the LOCAL situation and in the REMOTE situation.

P0225 – JOG Selection – LOCAL Situation
P0228 – JOG Selection - REMOTE Situation
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Disabled
1 = JOG Key
2 = DIx
3 = Serial/USB
4 = Anybus-CC
5 = CANopen/DeviceNet
6 = SoftPLC
7 = PLC11

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

or

31 Local Command

P0225=1
P0228=2

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
32 Remote Command

Description:
They define the origin of the JOG command in the LOCAL situation and in the REMOTE situation.

P0229 – Stop Mode Selection

13

Adjustable
Range:

0 = Ramp to Stop
1 = Coast to Stop
2 = Fast Stop

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

13-30

31 Local Command

Factory
Setting:

or

0

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
32 Remote Command

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Description:
It defines the motor stop mode when the inverter receives the “Stop” command. The table 13.12 describes the
options of this parameter.
Table 13.12 - Stop mode selection
P0229
0 = Ramp to Stop
1 = Coast to Stop

Description
The inverter will apply the ramp programmed in P0101 and/or P0103.
The motor will run free until stopping

2 = Fast Stop

The inverter will apply a null ramp (time = 0.0 second), in order to stop the motor in
the shortest possible time

NOTE!

When the control modes V/f or VVW are selected, the use of the option 2 (Fast Stop) is not
recommended.

NOTE!

When the Coast to Stop, stop mode, is programmed and the Flying-Start function is not enabled,
then start the motor again only if it is standing still.

13

13-31

13

13-32

Commands and
Reference.
Refer to the
figure 13.9

P0249

P0244

P0239

P0247

P0242

P0237

P0232

Run/Stop

Reference

JOG

Reference Limits

P0133 P0001
P0134

P0134 = Maximum
OFFSET
Reference
P0163 – LOCAL
P0164 – REMOTE P0133 = Minimum
Reference
P0134
P0133

FWD/REV
(Speed direction)

AI4

AI3

AI2

AI1

P0234

P0122

JOG

-1

(*) Valid only for P0202=3 and 4.

Figure 13.8 - Speed Reference block diagram
P0123

P0122

P0100-Acceleration
P0101-Deceleration

Acceleration/
Deceleration Time 2
Acceleration/
Deceleration Time

2a

P0102-Acceleration
P0103-Deceleration

JOG- (*)

JOG+ (*)

Fast Stop

+

+ +

P0246 = 1 - Ref. after Ramp (P0246 = No Ramp Reference)(*)

-

+

P0241 = 1 Ref. after Ramp (P0241 = No Ramp Reference)(*)

P0236 = 1 Ref. after Ramp (P0236 = No Ramp Reference)(*)

+

P0231 = 1 - Ref. after Ramp (P0231 = No Ramp Reference)(*)

Command via digital inputs (DIx)

P0021

P0020

P0019

P0018

Total
Reference

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

LOCAL
REFERENCE (P0221)
(P0220)
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection

FORWARD/REVERSE
(P0223)
LOCAL

RUN/STOP (P0224)

REFERENCE
JOG (P0225)
REMOTE

REFERENCE

REFERENCE

REFERENCE

LOCAL
COMMANDS
REMOTE

COMMANDS

COMMANDS

REMOTE
COMMANDS

REFERENCE (P0222)
FORWARD/REVERSE
(P0226)

RUN/STOP (P0227)
JOG (P0228)

Figure 13.9 - Local/Remote situation block diagram

13.4 3-Wire Command [33]
The group defined as “3-Wire Command” refers to the function Run/Stop programmed via digital inputs.
With this function it is possible to activate or deactivate the motor by means of pulses at the digital inputs
configured as Run (DIx=6) and Stop (DIx=7). It is important to notice that the Stop pulse is inverted, i.e., a
transition from +24 V to 0 V.
For a better understanding of this function it is recommended to verify the figure 13.6 (k).

13.5 Forward Run/Reverse Run Commands [34]
The FWD Run/REV Run function can be used to command the motor in the forward direction and in the reverse
direction by means of digital inputs.
With the application of +24 V to the input programmed for FWD Run (DIx=4), the motor accelerates in the forward
direction until reaching the speed reference. Once the FWD Run input has been released (0 V) and +24 V has
been applied at the input programmed for REV Run (DIx=5), the CFW-11 will activate the motor in the reverse
direction until it reaches the speed reference. Refer to the figure 13.6 (l).
13-33

13

Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs

13

13-34

Dynamic Braking

Dynamic Braking
The braking torque that can be obtained through the application of frequency inverters without dynamic braking
resistors varies from 10 % to 35 % of the motor rated torque.
In order to obtain higher braking torques, resistors for dynamic braking are used. In this case the regenerated
energy is dissipated on the resistor mounted externally to the inverter.
This type of braking is used in the cases when short deceleration times are wished or when high inertia loads
are driven.
For the vector control mode there is the possibility of the use of the “Optimal Braking”, eliminating in many
cases the need of the dynamic braking.

14.1 Dynamic Braking [28]
The Dynamic Braking function can only be used if a braking resistor has been connected to the CFW-11, and
if the parameters related to it have been adjusted properly.
See next the description of the parameters in order to know how to program each one.

P0153 – Dynamic Braking Level
Adjustable
Range:

339 to 400 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
585 to 800 V
809 to 1000 V
809 to 1000 V
924 to 1200 V
924 to 1200 V

Factory P0296=0: 375 V
Setting: P0296=1: 618 V
P0296=2: 675 V
P0296=3: 748 V
P0296=4: 780 V
P0296=5: 893 V
P0296=6: 972 V
P0296=7: 972 V
P0296=8: 1174 V

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
28 Dynamic Braking

Description:
The parameter P0153 defines the voltage level for the braking IGBT actuation, and it must be compatible with the
power supply voltage.
If P0153 is adjusted at a level very close to the overvoltage (F022) actuation level, the fault may occur before the
Braking resistor is able to dissipate the regenerated energy.

14

14-1

Dynamic Braking

The next table presents the overvoltage trip level.
Table 14.1 - Overvoltage (F022) trip levels
Inverter Vnom

P0296

F022

220/230 V
380 V
400/415 V
440/460 V
480 V
500/525 V
550/575 V
600 V
660/690 V

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

> 400 V

DC Link Voltage (Ud) (P0004)
P0153
Rated Ud

> 800 V

> 1000 V
> 1200 V

F022 - Overvoltage
Dynamic braking actuation

Time
Ud
Braking Resistor
Voltage (DB)

Ud

Time

Figure 14.1 - Dynamic Braking actuation curve

Steps to enable the dynamic braking:
Connect the braking resistor (Refer to the section 3.2.3.2 of the User Manual);
Set P0154 and P0155 according to the used braking resistor;
Set P0151 at the maximum value: 400 V (P0296=0), 800 V (P0296=1, 2, 3 or 4), 1000 V (P0296=5,
6 or 7) or 1200 V (P0296=8), according to the case, in order to prevent the activation of the DC voltage
regulation before the dynamic braking.

P0154 – Dynamic Braking Resistor
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 500.0 ohm

Factory
Setting:

0.0 ohm

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
28 Dynamic Braking

Description:
Adjust this parameter with the ohmic value of the used braking resistor.

14

If P0154=0, the braking resistor overload protection is disabled. It must be programmed in zero if no braking
resistor is used.

14-2

Dynamic Braking

P0155 – Dynamic Braking Resistor Power
Adjustable
Range:

0.02 to 650.00 kW

Factory
Setting:

2.60 kW

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
28 Dynamic Braking

Description:
This parameter adjusts the trip level of the braking resistor overload protection.
It must be set according to the used braking resistor rated power (in kW).
Operation: if the average power dissipated on the braking resistor exceeds the value adjusted in P0155 for 2
minutes, the inverter will be disabled with F077 – DB Resistor Overload.
In order to get more details on the selection of the braking resistor, refer to the section 3.2.3.2 of the User
Manual.

14

14-3

Dynamic Braking

14

14-4

Faults and Alarms

FAULTS AND ALARMS
The troubleshooting structure of the inverter is based on the indication of faults and alarms.
In a fault event the IGBTs firing pulses are disabled and the motor coasts to stop.
The alarm works as a warning to the user that critical operation conditions are occurring and a fault may occur
if the situation does not change.
Refer to the CFW-11 User Manual chapter 6 and chapter 0 - Quick Parameter Reference, Faults and Alarms
of this manual to obtain more information regarding the Faults and Alarms.

15.1 Motor Overload Protection
The Motor Overload protection is based on the use of curves that simulate the heating and cooling of the motor
in overload events, according to IEC 60947-4-2 and UL 508C standards. The fault and alarm codes for the
motor overload protection are F072 and A046, respectively.
The motor overload is given in function of the reference value In x SF (motor rated current multiplied by the
service factor), which is the maximum value at which the protection must not actuate because the motor is able
to operate indefinitely with this current value without suffering damages.
However, for that protection to act in an appropriate manner, the thermal image of the motor, which corresponds
to the heating up and cooling down times of the motor, is estimated.
The thermal image, in its turn, depends on the motor thermal constant, which is estimated based on the motor
power and number of poles.
The thermal image is important to allow that a derating in the fault actuation time be given, so that shorter
actuation times be obtained when the motor is hot.
This function applies a derating in the fault actuation time depending on the output frequency supplied to the
motor, because for the self-ventilated ones there will be less ventilation on the frame at lower speeds, and the
motor will be subject to more heating. Thus, it becomes necessary to reduce the fault actuation time in order
to prevent the motor from burning.
In order to assure more protection in case of restart, this function keeps the information regarding the motor
thermal image in the CFW-11 nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). Therefore, after the inverter restart, the function
will use the value saved in the thermal memory to perform a new overload evaluation.
The parameter P0348 configures the desired protection level for the motor overload function. The possible
options are: Fault and Alarm, only Fault, only Alarm, and disabled motor overload protection. The actuation
level for the motor overload alarm (A046) is adjusted via P0349.
In order to get more information, refer to the parameters P0156, P0159, P0348 and P0349 in the section
15.3.

15-1

15

Faults and Alarms
NOTE!

In order to assure the conformity of the CFW-11 motor overload protection with the UL508C standard,
observe the following:
“Trip” current equal to 1.25 times the motor nominal current (P0401) adjusted in the “Guided
Start-up” menu.
The maximum allowed value for the parameter P0159 (Motor Trip Class) is 3 (Trip Class 20).
The maximum allowed value for P0398 (Motor Service Factor) is 1.15.

15.2 Motor Overtemperature Protection
ATTENTION!

The PTC must have a reinforced insulation against the live parts of the motor and of the
installation.
This protection performs the motor overtemperature protection by means of the alarm (A110) and the fault
(F078) indication.
The motor must have a PTC type temperature sensor.
An analog output supplies constant current for the PTC (2 mA), while an inverter analog input reads the voltage
across the PTC and compares it with the limit values for fault and alarm. Refer to the table 15.1. When those
values are exceeded, the alarm or fault indication occurs.
The analog outputs AO1 and AO2 of the control module, as well as the analog outputs existent on the accessory
modules AO1-B and AO2-B (IOB) can be used to supply the constant current for the PTC. Therefore it is necessary
to configure the DIP switches of the output for current and to set the output function parameter for 13=PTC.
The analog inputs AI1 and AI2 of the control module, as well as the analog inputs existent on the accessory
modules AI3 (IOB) and AI4 (IOA) can be used to read the PTC voltage. Therefore it is necessary to configure
the input DIP switch for voltage and to set the input function parameter for 4=PTC. Refer to the parameter
P0351 on the section 15.3.

NOTE!

In order that this function works properly, it is important to keep gains and offset of the analog input
and output in the default values.
Table 15.1 - A110 and F078 trip levels

15

15-2

Action

PTC

AI voltage

A110 occurs during the temperature increase

RPTC>3.51 kΩ

VAI>7.0 V

F078 trips during the temperature increase

RPTC>3.9 kΩ

VAI>7.8 V

Resets A110 alarm

150 Ω < RPTC<1.6 kΩ

0.3 0.125 x P0401.

P0343 – Ground Fault Detection
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = On

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

1

45 Protections

Description:
This parameter enables the Ground Fault Detection, which will be responsible for the F074 (Ground Fault)
actuation.
Thus if wished, it is possible to inhibit the Ground Fault (F074) occurrence by setting P0343=Off.

P0348 – Motor Overload Protection
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = Fault/Alarm
2 = Fault
3 = Alarm

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

1

15

45 Protections
15-9

Faults and Alarms
Description:
This parameter allows the desired protection level for the motor overload function to be configured. Refer to the
table below for details on the actuation of each one of the available options.
Table 15.2 - Actions for the parameter P0348 options
P0348

Action

0 = Off

The overload protection is disabled. Faults or alarms will not be generated for the motor operation
in overload conditions

1 = Fault/Alarm

The inverter will show an alarm (A046) when the motor reaches the level programmed in P0349,
and a fault (F072) when the motor reaches the overload actuation value. Once the fault is
generated, the inverter will be disabled

2 = Fault

Only the fault (F072) will be generated when the motor reaches the overload protection trip level,
and the inverter will be disabled

3 = Alarm

Only the alarm (A046) will be generated when the motor reaches the level programmed in P0349,
and the motor continues operating

The trip level of the overload protection is calculated internally by the CFW-11, taking into account the motor
current, its thermal class and its service factor. Refer to the parameter P0159 in this section.

P0349 – Motor Overload Alarm Level
Adjustable
Range:

70 to 100 %

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

85 %

45 Protections

Description:
This parameter defines the level for the motor overload protection alarm actuation (A046), it is expressed as a
percentage of the trip level of the overload integrator.
It will only be effective if P0348 is programmed in 1 (Fault/Alarm) or 3 (Alarm).

P0350 – Inverter Overload Protection (IGBTs)
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Fault is active, with switching frequency reduction
1 = Fault and alarm are active, with switching frequency
reduction
2 = Fault is active, without switching frequency reduction
3 = Fault and alarm are active, without switching frequency
reduction

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

1

45 Protections

Description:

15

The inverter overload function operates separately from the motor overload protection, and it has the purpose
of protecting the IGBTs and rectifiers in case of overload, avoiding that damage due to overtemperature at their
junctions occurs.
Thus, the parameter P0350 allows configuring the desired protection level for this function, even with the automatic
reduction of the switching frequency, in order to avoid the fault occurrence. The next table describes each of the
available options.
15-10

Faults and Alarms
Table 15.3 - Actions for the parameter P0350 options
P0350

Action

0

It enables F048 – IGBT Overload Fault. In order to avoid the occurrence of the fault, the switching frequency is reduced automatically to 2.5 kHz (*)

1

It enables the fault F048 and the alarm A047 – IGBT Overload Alarm. In order to avoid the occurrence of the fault,
the switching frequency is reduced automatically to 2.5 kHz (*)

2

It enables F048. Without the reduction of the switching frequency

3

It enables the alarm A047 and the fault F048. Without the reduction of the switching frequency

(*) It reduces the switching frequency when:
- The output current exceeds 1.5 x InomHD (1.1 x InomND); or
- The temperature at the IGBT case is less than 10°C from the maximum temperature; and
- P0297=2 (5 kHz).

P0351 – Motor Overtemperature Protection
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = Fault/Alarm
2 = Fault
3 = Alarm

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

1

45 Protections

Description:
This parameter is useful when the motor is equipped with PTC type temperature sensors, allowing the configuration
of the protection level for the motor overtemperature function. The details on the actuation of the available options
are in the table 15.4. Refer also to the section 15.2.
Table 15.4 - Actions for the parameter P0351 options
P0351
0 = Off

Action
The overtemperature protection is disabled. Faults or alarms for the motor operation in the
overtemperature condition will not be generated

1 = Fault / Alarm

The inverter will show an alarm (A110) and will generate a fault (F078) when the motor reaches
the overtemperature actuation values. Once a fault is generated, the inverter will be disabled

2 = Fault

Only the fault (F078) will be generated when the motor reaches the overtemperature protection
trip level, and the inverter will be disabled

3 = Alarm

Only the alarm (A110) will be generated when the motor reaches the protection actuation level,
and the inverter remains operating

15

15-11

Faults and Alarms

P0352 – Fan Control
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Heatsink fan and internal fan are OFF
1 = Heatsink fan and internal fan are ON
2 = Heatsink fan and internal fan are controlled via software
3 = Heatsink fan is controlled via software and internal fan is OFF
4 = Heatsink fan is controlled via software and internal fan is ON
5 = Heatsink fan is ON and internal fan is OFF
6 = Heatsink fan is ON and internal fan is controlled via software
7 = Heatsink fan is OFF and internal fan is ON
8 = Heatsink fan is OFF and internal fan is controlled via software

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

2

45 Protections

Description:
The CFW-11 is equipped with two fans: an internal fan and a heatsink fan, and the activation of both will be
controlled via software by means of the inverter programming.
The options available for the setting of this parameter are the following:
Table 15.5 - Options of the parameter P0352
P0352
0 = HS-OFF, Int-OFF
1 = HS-ON, Int-ON

Heatsink fan is always ON.
Internal fan is always ON.

2 = HS-CT, Int-CT

Heatsink fan is controlled via software.
Internal fan is controlled via software.

3 = HS-CT, Int-OFF

Heatsink fan is controlled via software.
Internal fan is always OFF.

4 = HS-CT, Int-ON

Heatsink fan is controlled via software.
Internal fan is always ON.

5 = HS-ON, Int-OFF

15

15-12

Action
Heatsink fan is always OFF.
Internal fan is always OFF.

Heatsink fan is always ON.
Internal fan is always OFF.

6 = HS-ON, Int-CT

Heatsink fan is always ON.
Internal fan is controlled via software.

7 = HS-OFF, Int-ON

Heatsink fan is always OFF.
Internal fan is always ON.

8 = HS-OFF, Int-CT

Heatsink fan is always OFF.
Internal fan is controlled via software.

Faults and Alarms

P0353 – IGBTs and Internal Air Overtemperature Protection
Adjustable
Range:

0 = IGBTs: fault and alarm, Internal air: fault and alarm
1 = IGBTs: fault and alarm, Internal air: fault
2 = IGBTs: fault, Internal air: fault and alarm
3 = IGBTs: fault, Internal air: fault

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

0

45 Protections

Description:
The overtemperature protection is carried out by means of the measurement of the temperature with the IGBTs and
power board internal air NTCs, being able to generate alarms and faults.
In order to configure the desired protection, set P0353 according to the table below.
Table 15.6 - Options of the parameter P0353
P0353

Action
Enables fault (F051) – IGBT Overtemperature and alarm (A050) – IGBT High Temperature
Enables fault (F153) – Internal Air Overtemperature and alarm (A152) – Internal Air High
Temperature

0 = HS-F/A, Air-F/A
1 = HS-F/A, Air-F

Enables fault (F051) and alarm (A050) for IGBTs overtemperature
Enables only fault (F153) for internal air overtemperature

2 = HS-F, Air-F/A

Enables only fault (F051)for IGBT overtemperature
Enables fault (F153) and alarm (A152) for internal air overtemperature

3 = HS-F, Air-F

Enables only fault (F051)for IGBT overtemperature
Enables only fault (F153) for internal air overtemperature

P0354 – Heatsink Fan Protection
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = Fault

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

1

45 Protections

Description:
When the heatsink fan speed reaches a value below ¼ of the rated speed the fault F179 (Heatsink Fan Speed Fault)
will be generated. This parameter makes it possible that the generation of this fault be disabled, as presented in
the next table.
Table 15.7 - Actions for the parameter P0354 options
P0354
0 = Off
1 = Fault

Action
The heatsink fan speed fault protection is disabled.
It enables the fault (F179). The inverter will be disabled if the fault occurs.

P0356 – Dead Time Compensation
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = On

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

15

1

45 Protections
15-13

Faults and Alarms

Description:
This parameter must be kept always in 1 (On). Only in special maintenance cases the value 0 (Off) can be used.

P0357 – Line Phase Loss Time
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 60 s

Factory
Setting:

3s

Factory
Setting:

0

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
45 Protections

Description:
It configures the time for the line phase loss indication (F006).
If P0357=0, the function remains disabled.

P0359 – Motor Current Stabilization
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = On

Proprieties:

V/f and VVW

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
45 Protections

Description:
The parameter P0359 allows enabling the motor current stabilizing function.
This function eliminates oscillations in the motor current caused by operation at low speeds with little load.

P0800 - Phase U Book 1 Temperature
P0801 - Phase V Book 1 Temperature
P0802 - Phase W Book 1 Temperature
P0803 - Phase U Book 2 Temperature
P0804 - Phase V Book 2 Temperature
P0805 - Phase W Book 2 Temperature
P0806 - Phase U Book 3 Temperature

15

P0807 - Phase V Book 3 Temperature
P0808 - Phase W Book 3 Temperature

15-14

Faults and Alarms

P0809 - Phase U Book 4 Temperature
P0810 - Phase V Book 4 Temperature
P0811 - Phase W Book 4 Temperature
P0812 - Phase U Book 5 Temperature
P0813 - Phase V Book 5 Temperature
P0814 - Phase W Book 5 Temperature
Adjustable
Range:

-20.0 °C to 150.0 °C

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:
or

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

45 Protections

Description:
These read only parameters indicate, in Celsius degrees (°C), the internal temperature of the IGBTs of each phase of
each book. The indication resolution is 0.1 °C. Refer to the CFW-11M User Manual to obtain more information.

P0832 - Digital Input DIM1 Function
P0833 - Digital Input DIM2 Function
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Not Used
1 = External Fault
2 = Refrigeration Fault
3 = Braking Resistor Overtemperature
4 = Rectifier Overtemperature
5 = Rectifier High Temperature

Factory
Setting:

0

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
45 Protections

or

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
40 Digital Inputs

Description:
These parameters allow configuring the digital inputs DIM1 and DIM2 with the type of fault (0 to 4) or alarm (5) that
must be recognized by the control, signalized on the keypad (HMI), and for the options 0 to 4, cause the disabling
of the inverter.

15

15-15

Faults and Alarms

P0834 - DIM1 and DIM2 Status
Adjustable
Range:

Bit 0 = DIM1
Bit 1 = DIM2

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:
or

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

40 Digital Inputs

Description:
Through this parameter it is possible to visualize the status of the 2 digital inputs of the Modular Drive interface
board.
The indication is done by means of the numbers 1 and 0, representing respectively the states No Fault/Alarm or
With Fault/Alarm at the inputs.
The state of each input is considered as one digit in the sequence where DIM1 represents the least significant
digit.
Refer to the CFW-11M User Manual to obtain more information.

15

15-16

Read Only Parameters [09]

READ ONLY PARAMETERS [09]
In order to facilitate the visualization of the main reading variables of the inverter, the group [09] - “Read Only
Parameters” can be accessed directly.
It is important to point out that all the parameters of that group can only be visualized on the keypad (HMI)
display, and that they do not allow changes by the user.

P0001 – Speed Reference
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
This parameter presents, regardless of the origin source, the value of the speed reference in rpm (factory setting).
The indication unit can be modified from rpm to another unit through P0209, P0210 and P0211, as well as the
scale by means of P0208 and P0212.
It is also possible to change the speed reference (P0121) through this parameter, when P0221 or P0222=0.

P0002 – Motor Speed
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
This parameter indicates the motor actual speed value in rpm (factory setting), with a 0.5 second filter.
The indication unit can be modified from rpm to another unit through P0209, P0210 and P0211, as well as the
scale by means of P0208 and P0212.
It is also possible to change the speed reference (P0121) through this parameter, when P0221 or P0222=0

16

16-1

Read Only Parameters [09]

P0003 – Motor Current
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 4500.0 A

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It indicates the inverter output current in Amps (A).

P0004 – DC Link Voltage (Ud)
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 2000 V

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It indicates the DC Link actual dc voltage in volts (V).

P0005 – Motor Frequency
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 300.0 Hz

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It indicates the inverter output frequency in Hertz (Hz).

P0006 – Inverter Status

16

Adjustable
Range:

0 = Ready
1 = Run
2 = Undervoltage
3 = Fault
4 = Self-Tuning
5 = Configuration
6 = DC-Braking
7 = STO

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

16-2

Factory
Setting:

Read Only Parameters [09]

Description:
It indicates one of the 8 possible inverter states. The description of each state is presented in the next table.
In order to facilitate the visualization, the inverter status is also showed on the top left corner of the keypad (HMI)
(figure 5.3 – section 5.6). The states 2 to 6 are presented in an abbreviated form, as follows:
Table 16.1 - Description of the inverter status
State

Abbreviated form on the
keypad (HMI) top left corner

Ready
Run

Ready
Run

Undervoltage

Sub

Fault

Fxxx, where xxx is the number
of the occurred fault

Self-Tuning

SelfTun

Configuration

Config

DC-Braking

DCbreak

STO

STO

Description
It indicates that the inverter is ready to be enabled
It indicates that the inverter is enabled
It indicates that the inverter is with insufficient line voltage for operation
(undervoltage), and does not accept enabling commands
It indicates that the inverter is in the fault state
It indicates that the inverter is executing the self-tuning routine
It indicates that the inverter is in the Oriented Start-up routine or with
incompatible parameter programming. Refer to the parameter incompatibility table (attachment)
It indicates that the inverter is applying DC braking to stop the motor
It indicates that the Safety Stop is active (the 24Vdc voltage from the
safety relays coils has been removed)

P0007 – Motor Voltage
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 2000 V

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It indicates the output line voltage, in Volts (V).

P0009 – Motor Torque
Adjustable
Range:

-1000.0 to 1000.0 %

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It indicates the torque developed by the motor, calculated as follows:

16

16-3

Read Only Parameters [09]

P0009 = Tm x 100 x Y
ITM
ITM = P04012 -

Y = 1 for N ≤

Y=

Nnom
N

x

P0410 x P0178 2 1/2
100

P0190 x Nnom

P0190
P0400

P0400

for N >

P0190 x Nnom
P0400

Where:
Nnom = Motor synchronous speed;
N = Motor actual speed;
Tm = Motor torque current;
ITM = Rated motor torque current.

P0010 – Output Power
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 6553.5 kW

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It indicates the inverter instantaneous output power, in kilowatt (kW).

NOTE!

The value indicated in this parameter is calculated indirectly, and must not be used to measure the
energy consumption.

P0012 – DI8 to DI1 Status
Refer to the section 13.1.3

P0013 – DO5 to DO1 Status
Refer to the section 13.1.4

P0014 – AO1 Value
P0015 – AO2 Value
P0016 – AO3 Value

16

P0017 – AO4 Value
Refer to the section 13.1.2.

16-4

Read Only Parameters [09]

P0018 – AI1 Value
P0019 – AI2 Value
P0020 – AI3 Value
P0021 – AI4 Value
Refer to the section 13.1.1.

P0023 – Software Version
Refer to the section 6.1 for more details.

P0027 – Accessories Configuration 1
P0028 – Accessories Configuration 2
P0029 – Power Hardware Configuration
Refer to the section 6.1.

P0030 – U Arm IGBT Temperature
P0031 – V Arm IGBT Temperature
P0032 – W Arm IGBT Temperature
P0033 – Rectifier Temperature
P0034 – Internal Air Temperature
Refer to the section 15.3.

P0036 – Heatsink Fan Speed
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 15000 rpm

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It indicates the fan actual speed, in revolutions per minute (rpm).

P0037 – Motor Overload Status
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 100 %

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

16

16-5

Read Only Parameters [09]

Description:
It indicates the actual overload percentage of the motor. When this parameter reaches 100% the fault “Motor
Overload” (F072) will occur.

P0038 – Encoder Speed
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 65535 rpm

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It indicates the encoder actual speed, in revolutions per minute (rpm), through a 0.5 second filter.

P0039 – Encoder Pulses Count
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 40000

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
This parameter shows the counting of the pulses of the encoder. The counting can be increased from 0 to 40000
(Hourly turn) or decreased from 40000 to 0 (rotate Counterclockwise). This parameter can be visualized in the
analogical exits when P0257=49 or P0260 =49. Consult section 12 -10.

P0040 – PID Process Variable
P0041 – PID Setpoint Value
Refer to the section 20.6.

P0042 – Time Powered
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 65535 h

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Description:

16

It indicates the total number of hours that the inverter remained powered.
This value is kept even when power is removed from the inverter.

16-6

Factory
Setting:

Read Only Parameters [09]

P0043 – Time Enabled
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 6553.5 h

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It indicates the total number of hours that the inverter remained enabled.
It indicates up to 6553.5 hours, and then it gets back to zero.
By setting P0204=3, the value of the parameter P0043 is reset to zero.
This value is kept even when power is removed from the inverter.

P0044 – kWh Counter
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 65535 kWh

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It indicates the energy consumed by the motor.
It indicates up to 65535 kWh, and then it gets back to zero.
By setting P0204=4, the value of the parameter P0044 is reset to zero.
This value is kept even when power is removed from the inverter.

NOTE!

The value indicated in this parameter is calculated indirectly, and must not be used to measure the
energy consumption.

P0045 – Fan Enabled Time
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 65535 h

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

16

16-7

Read Only Parameters [09]

Description:
It indicates the total number of hours that the heatsink fan remained enabled.
It indicates up to 65535 hours, and then it gets back to zero.
By setting P0204=2, the value of the parameter P0045 is reset to zero.
This value is kept even when power is removed from the inverter.

P0048 – Present Alarm
P0049 – Present Fault
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 999

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS

Factory
Setting:

Description:
They indicate the alarm (P0048) or fault (P0049) number that occasionally be present at the inverter.
In order to understand the meaning of the codes used for faults and alarms, refer to the section 15 in this manual
and the chapter 6 of the User Manual.

16.1 Fault History [08]
In this group are described the parameters that record the last faults occurred in the inverter, together with other
relevant information for the fault interpretation, as date, hour, motor speed, etc.

NOTE!

If the fault occurs simultaneously with the CFW-11 power up or reset, the parameters regarding this
fault, as date, hour, motor speed, etc., may contain invalid information.

P0050 – Last Fault
P0054 – Second Fault
P0058 – Third Fault
P0062 – Fourth Fault
P0066 – Fifth Fault
P0070 – Sixth Fault

16

P0074 – Seventh Fault
P0078 – Eighth Fault

16-8

Read Only Parameters [09]

P0082 – Ninth Fault
P0086 – Tenth Fault
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 999

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Factory
Setting:

Description:
They indicate the codes from the last to the tenth fault that have occurred.
The recording system is the following:
Fxxx → P0050 → P0054 → P0058 → P0062 → P0066 → P0070 → P0074 → P0078 → P0082 → P0086

P0051 – Last Fault Day/Month
P0055 – Second Fault Day/Month
P0059 – Third Fault Day/Month
P0063 – Fourth Fault Day/Month
P0067 – Fifth Fault Day/Month
P0071 – Sixth Fault Day/Month
P0075 – Seventh Fault Day/Month
P0079 – Eighth Fault Day/Month
P0083 – Ninth Fault Day/Month
P0087 – Tenth Fault Day/Month
Adjustable
Range:

00/00 to 31/12

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Factory
Setting:

Description:

16

They indicate the day and the month of the last to the tenth fault occurrence.

16-9

Read Only Parameters [09]

P0052 – Last Fault Year
P0056 – Second Fault Year
P0060 – Third Fault Year
P0064 – Fourth Fault Year
P0068 – Fifth Fault Year
P0072 – Sixth Fault Year
P0076 – Seventh Fault Year
P0080 – Eighth Fault Year
P0084 – Ninth Fault Year
P0088 – Tenth Fault Year
Adjustable
Range:

00 to 99

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Description:
They indicate the year of the last to the tenth fault occurrence.

P0053 – Last Fault Time
P0057 – Second Fault Time
P0061 – Third Fault Time
P0065 – Fourth Fault Time
P0069 – Fifth Fault Time
P0073 – Sixth Fault Time
P0077 – Seventh Fault Time

16

P0081 – Eighth Fault Time
P0085 – Ninth Fault Time

16-10

Factory
Setting:

Read Only Parameters [09]

P0089 – Tenth Fault Time
Adjustable
Range:

00:00 to 23:59

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Factory
Setting:

Description:
They indicate the time of the last to the tenth fault occurrence.

P0090 – Current at the Moment of the Last Fault
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 4000.0 A

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It is the record of the current supplied by the inverter at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

P0091 – DC Link Voltage at the Moment of the Last Fault
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 2000 V

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It is the record of the inverter DC link voltage at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

P0092 – Speed at the Moment of the Last Fault
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Factory
Setting:

16

Description:
It is the record of the motor speed at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

16-11

Read Only Parameters [09]

P0093 – Reference at the Moment of the Last Fault
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 18000 rpm

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It is the record of the speed reference at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

P0094 – Frequency at the Moment of the Last Fault
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 300.0 Hz

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It is the record of the inverter output frequency at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

P0095 – Motor Voltage at the Moment of the Last Fault
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 2000 V

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Factory
Setting:

Description:
It is the record of the motor voltage at the moment of the last fault occurrence.

P0096 – DIx Status at the Moment of the Last Fault

16

Adjustable
Range:

Bit 0 = DI1
Bit 1 = DI2
Bit 2 = DI3
Bit 3 = DI4
Bit 4 = DI5
Bit 5 = DI6
Bit 6 = DI7
Bit 7 = DI8

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

16-12

Factory
Setting:

Read Only Parameters [09]

Description:
It indicates the state of the digital inputs at the moment of the last fault occurrence.
The indication is done by means of an hexadecimal code, which when converted to binary will indicate the states
“active” and “inactive” of the inputs through numbers 1 and 0.
Example: If the code presented for the parameter P0096 on the keypad (HMI) is 00A5, it will correspond to the
sequence 10100101, indicating that the inputs 8, 6, 3 and 1 were active at the moment of the last fault
occurrence.
Table 16.2 - Example of correspondence between the P0096 hexadecimal code and the DIx states
0
0

0

0
0

0

0

0

A
0

0

No relation with the DIx
(always zero)

5

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

DI8
Active
(+24 V)

DI7
Inactive
(0 V)

DI6
Active
(+24 V)

DI5
Inactive
(0 V)

DI4
Inactive
(0 V)

DI3
Active
(+24 V)

DI2
Inactive
(0 V)

DI1
Active
(+24 V)

P0097 – DOx Status at the Moment of the Last Fault
Adjustable
Range:

Bit 0 = DO1
Bit 1 = DO2
Bit 2 = DO3
Bit 3 = DO4
Bit 4 = DO5

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

08 FAULT HISTORY

Description:
It indicates the state of the digital outputs at the moment of the last fault occurrence.
The indication is done by means of an hexadecimal code, which when converted to binary will indicate the states
“active” and “inactive” of the outputs through numbers 1 and 0.
Example: If the code presented for the parameter P0097 on the keypad (HMI) is 001C, it will correspond to the
sequence 00011100, indicating that the outputs 5, 4, and 3 were active at the moment of the last fault
occurrence.
Table 16.3 - Example of correspondence between the P0097 hexadecimal code and the DOx states
0
0

0

0
0

0

0

0

No relation with the DOx
(always zero)

1
0

0

0

0

C
0

No relation with the DOx
(always zero)

1

1

1

0

0

DO5
Active
(+24 V)

DO4
Active
(+24 V)

DO3
Active
(+24 V)

DO2
Inactive
(0 V)

DO1
Inactive
(0 V)

P0800 - Phase U Book 1 Temperature
P0801 - Phase V Book 1 Temperature

16

P0802 - Phase W Book 1 Temperature
P0803 - Phase U Book 2 Temperature

16-13

Read Only Parameters [09]

P0804 - Phase V Book 2 Temperature
P0805 - Phase W Book 2 Temperature
P0806 - Phase U Book 3 Temperature
P0807 - Phase V Book 3 Temperature
P0808 - Phase W Book 3 Temperature
P0809 - Phase U Book 4 Temperature
P0810 - Phase V Book 4 Temperature
P0811 - Phase W Book 4 Temperature
P0812 - Phase U Book 5 Temperature
P0813 - Phase V Book 5 Temperature
P0814 - Phase W Book 5 Temperature
P0834 - DIM1 and DIM2 Status
Refer to the section 15.3 for more details.

16

16-14

Communication [49]

COMMUNICATION [49]
For the exchange of information through communication networks, the CFW-11 has several standardized
communication protocols, like MODBUS, CANopen, DeviceNet, and Ethernet/IP.
For more details regarding the inverter configuration for operating with those protocols, refer to the CFW-11
Communication Manuals. The parameters regarding the communication are explained next.

17.1 RS-232 and RS-485 Serial Interface
P0308 – Serial Address
P0310 – Serial Baud Rate
P0311 – Serial Interface Byte Configuration
P0312 – Serial Protocol
P0314 – Serial Watchdog
P0316 – Serial Interface Status
P0682 – Serial / USB Control Word
P0683 – Serial / USB Speed Reference
Those are parameters for the configuration and operation of the RS-232 and RS-485 serial interfaces. For a detailed
description, refer to the RS-232/RS-485 Communication Manual, supplied in electronic format on the CD-ROM that
comes with the product.

17.2 CAN Interface – CANopen/DeviceNet
P0684 – CANopen/DeviceNet Control Word
P0685 – CANopen/DeviceNet Speed Reference
P0700 – CAN Protocol
P0701 – CAN Address
P0702 – CAN Baud Rate
P0703 – Bus Off Reset
P0705 – CAN Controller Status

17

P0706 – Received CAN Telegram Counter

17-1

Communication [49]

P0707 – Transmitted CAN Telegram Counter
P0708 – Buss Off Error Counter
P0709 – Lost CAN Message Counter
P0710 – DeviceNet I/O Instances
P0711 – DeviceNet Reading Word #3
P0712 – DeviceNet Reading Word #4
P0713 – DeviceNet Reading Word #5
P0714 – DeviceNet Reading Word #6
P0715 – DeviceNet Writing Word #3
P0716 – DeviceNet Writing Word #4
P0717 – DeviceNet Writing Word #5
P0718 – DeviceNet Writing Word #6
P0719 – DeviceNet Network Status
P0720 – DeviceNet Master Status
P0721 – CANopen Communication Status
P0722 – CANopen Node Status
Those are parameters for the configuration and operation of the CAN interface. For a detailed description, refer to
the CANopen Communication Manual or to the DeviceNet Communication Manual, supplied in electronic format on
the CD-ROM that comes with the product.

17.3 Anybus-CC Interface
P0686 – Anybus-CC Control Word
P0687 – Anybus-CC Speed Reference
P0723 – Anybus Identification

17

P0724 – Anybus Communication Status
P0725 – Anybus Address
P0726 – Anybus Baud Rate
17-2

Communication [49]

P0727 – Anybus I/O Words
P0728 – Anybus Reading Word #3
P0729 – Anybus Reading Word #4
P0730 – Anybus Reading Word #5
P0731 – Anybus Reading Word #6
P0732 – Anybus Reading Word #7
P0733 – Anybus Reading Word #8
P0734 – Anybus Writing Word #3
P0735 – Anybus Writing Word #4
P0736 – Anybus Writing Word #5
P0737 –Anybus Writing Word #6
P0738 – Anybus Writing Word #7
P0739 – Anybus Writing Word #8
Those are parameters for the configuration and operation of the Anybus-CC interface. For a detailed description, refer to
the Anybus-CC Communication Manual, supplied in electronic format on the CD-ROM that comes with the product.

17.4 Communication States and Commands
P0313 – Communication Error Action
P0680 – Logical Status
P0681 – Motor Speed in 13 bits
P0692 – Operation Mode Status
P0693 – Operation Mode Commands
P0695 – Digital Output Setting
P0696 – Analog Outputs Value 1

17

P0697 – Analog Outputs Value 2
P0698 – Analog Outputs Value 3

17-3

Communication [49]

P0699 – Analog Outputs Value 4
Those parameters are used for monitoring and controlling the CFW-11 inverter by means of communication interfaces.
For a detailed description, refer to the Communication Manual of the used interface. These manuals are supplied in
electronic format on the CD-ROM that comes with the product.

17

17-4

SoftPLC [50]

SoftPLC [50]
18.1 SOFTPLC
The SoftPLC function allows the frequency inverter to assume PLC (Programmable Logical Controller) functions.
For more details regarding the programming of those functions in the CFW-11, refer to the CFW-11 SoftPLC
Manual. The parameters related to the SoftPLC are described next.

P1000 – SoftPLC Status
P1001 – SoftPLC Command
P1002 – Scan Cycle Time
P1010 to P1049 – SoftPLC Parameters

18

18-1

SoftPLC [50]

18

18-2

Trace Function [52]

TRACE FUNCTION [52]
19.1 TRACE FUNTION
The trace function is used to record variables of interest from the CFW-11 (as current, voltage, speed) when a
particular event occurs in the system (e.g.: alarm/fault, high current, etc.). This system event, for starting the data
recording process, is called "trigger". The stored variables can be visualized as graphs through the SuperDrive
G2 executed by a PC connected via USB or Serial to the CFW-11.
The parameters related to this function are presented next.

P0550 – Trigger Signal Source
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Not selected
1 = Speed Reference
2 = Motor Speed
3 = Motor Current
4 = DC Link Voltage
5 = Motor Frequency
6 = Motor Voltage
7 = Motor Torque
8 = Process Variable
9 = PID Setpoint
10 = AI1
11 = AI2
12 = AI3
13 = AI4

Factory
Setting:

0

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
52 Trace Function

Description:
It selects the variable that will be used as the trigger source for the Trace Function.
This parameter has no effect when P0552=“Alarm”, “Fault” or “DIx”.
Those same variables can also be used as signals to be acquired, through the parameters from P0561 up to
P0564.

P0551 – Trigger Level for Trace
Adjustable
Range:

-100.0 to 340.0 %

Factory
Setting:

0.0 %

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
52 Trace Function

19

19-1

Trace Function [52]

Description:
It defines the value for comparison with the variable selected in P0550.
The full range of the variables selectable as trigger is presented in the next table.
Table 19.1 - Full scale of the variables selectable as trigger
Variable
Speed Reference
Motor Speed

Full Scale
100 % = P0134
100 % = P0134

Motor Current

200 % = 2.0 x InomHD

DC Link Voltage
Motor Frequency
Motor Voltage

100 % = Max. Lim. P0151
340 % = 3.4 x P0403
100 % =1.0 x P0400

Motor Torque

200 % = 2.0 x Inom Motor

Process Variable
PID Setpoint
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4

100 % = 1.0 x P0528
100 % = 1.0 x P0528
100 % = 10 V/20 mA
100 % = 10 V/20 mA
100 % = 10 V/20 mA
100 % = 10 V/20 mA

This parameter has no effect when P0552=“Alarm”, “Fault” or “DIx”.

P0552 – Trigger Condition for Trace
Adjustable
Range:

0: P0550* = P0551
1: P0550* ≠ P0551
2: P0550* > P0551
3: P0550* < P0551
4: Alarm
5: Fault
6: DIx

Factory
Setting:

5

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
52 Trace Function

Description:
It defines the condition for starting the signal acquisition. The table 19.2 details the available options.
Table 19.2 - Parameter P0552 option description
P0552 Options
P0550* = P0551
P0550* ≠ P0551
P0550* > P0551
P0550* < P0551
Alarm
Fault
DIx

19

Description
The variable selected in P0550 is equal to the value adjusted in P0551
The variable selected in P0550 is different from the value adjusted in P0551
The variable selected in P0550 is bigger than the value adjusted in P0551
The variable selected in P0550 is smaller than the value adjusted in P0551
Inverter with an active alarm
Inverter in fault state
Digital input (selected via P0263 – P0270)

For P0552=6 (“DIx” option), it is necessary to select the option “Trace Function” at one of the parameters from P0263
to P0270. For more details, refer to the section 13.1.3.

19-2

Trace Function [52]
Notes:
- If P0552=6 and no DI is configured for “Trace Function”, the trigger will not occur;
- If P0552=6 and several DIs were configured for “Trace Function”, only one has to be active for the trigger
occurrence;
- If P0552≠6 and any DI is configured for “Trace Function”, the trigger will never occur as a result of the DI
activation;
- These three programming options do not prevent the inverter from being enabled.

P0553 – Trace Sampling Period
Adjustable
Range:

1 to 65535

Factory
Setting:

1

Factory
Setting:

0%

Factory
Setting:

0%

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
52 Trace Function

Description:
It defines the sampling period (time between two sampling points) as a 200 µs multiple.
For P0297=1.25 kHz, it defines the sampling period as a 400 µs multiple

P0554 – Trace Pre-Trigger
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 100 %

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
52 Trace Function

Description:
It is the data percentage that will be recorded before the occurrence of the trigger event.

P0559 – Trace Maximum Memory
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 100 %

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
52 Trace Function

Description:
It defines the maximum of memory that the user wished to reserve for the Trace Function points. The setting range,
from 0 to 100 %, corresponds to a reserve request of 0 to 15 KB for the Trace Function.
Each point stored by the Trace Function takes 2 bytes of memory. This parameter defines indirectly the number of
points that the user wishes to store with the Trace Function.

19-3

19

Trace Function [52]

The memory area used by the Trace Function is shared with the memory for the SoftPLC applicative. When there is a
SoftPLC applicative in the inverter, the amount of memory actually available for the Trace Function may be smaller
than the value adjusted in P0559. The indication of the memory amount actually available is done by the read only
parameter P0560. For more details refer to the parameter P0560 description.
As the factory setting, P0559=0 %. In this case, there is no memory available for the Trace Function, because the
available 15 KB are reserved for the SoftPLC applicative.

P0560 – Trace Available Memory
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 100 %

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

52 Trace Function

Description:
It shows the amount of memory available for storing Trace Function points. The range from 0 to 100 % indicates that
from 0 to 15 KB are available for the Trace Function.
Sharing of memory with the SoftPLC:
The memory for the Trace Function is shared with the memory for the SoftPLC applicative.
- If P1000=0 (there is no SoftPLC applicative), it is possible to use all the memory area for the Trace Function. In
this case, P0559=P0560.
- If P1000>0 (there is SoftPLC applicative in the inverter), P0560 will show the smallest value between P0559 and
0the actual available memory (that will be 100 % minus the memory used by the SoftPLC applicative).
In order to be able to use the Trace Function, the user must adjust P0559 to a value different from 0 %, and verify if
the value indicated in P0560 is enough. If P0559 > P0560 and the user wishes to use more memory for the Trace
Function, then the SoftPLC applicative must be erased by means of the parameter P1001.

P0561 – CH1: Trace channel 1
P0562 – CH2: Trace channel 2
P0563 – CH3: Trace channel 3
P0564 – CH4: Trace channel 4
Adjustable
Range:

19

19-4

0 = Not selected
1 = Speed Reference
2 = Motor Speed
3 = Motor Current
4 = DC Link Voltage
5 = Motor Frequency
6 = Motor Voltage
7 = Motor Torque
8 = Process Variable
9 = PID Setpoint
10 = AI1
11 = AI2
12 = AI3
13 = AI4

Factory
Setting:

P0561=1
P0562=2
P0563=3
P0564=0

Trace Function [52]

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
52 Trace Function

Description:
They select the signals that will be recorded at the channels 1 to 4 of the Trace Function.
The options are the same that are available at P0550. By selecting the “Not Selected” option, the total memory
available for the Trace function is distributed between the active channels.

P0571 – Start Trace Function
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = On

Factory
Setting:

0

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
52 Trace Function

Description:
It initiates the waiting for the Trace Function trigger.
Since it is a parameter that can be changed with the motor running, it is not necessary to press “Save” on the keypad
(HMI) for the “trigger” waiting to initiate.
This parameter does not have effect if there is no active channel or if there is no memory available for the Trace
Function (P0560 = 0).
P0571 returns automatically to 0, for safety reasons, if any of the parameters between P0550 and P0564 is
changed.

P0572 – Day/Month Trace Triggered
Adjustable
Range:

00/00 to 31/12

Factory
Setting:

P0573 – Year Trace Triggered
Adjustable
Range:

00 to 99

Factory
Setting:

P0574 – Hour Trace Triggered
Adjustable
Range:

00:00 to 23:59

Factory
Setting:

P0575 – Second Trace Triggered
Adjustable
Range:

00 to 59

19
Factory
Setting:

19-5

Trace Function [52]

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
52 Trace Function

Description:
P0572 to P0575 record the date and hour of the trigger occurrence. These parameters and the points acquired by
the Trace Function are not saved when the inverter is powered off.
There are two possibilities for P0572 to P0575 being null:
- No acquisition was performed after the inverter power on, or
- Trace happened without keypad (HMI) connected to the inverter (no RTC).

P0576 – Trace Function Status
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = Waiting
2 = Triggered
3 = Concluded

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

52 Trace Function

Description:
It indicates if the Trace function has been initiated, if there has been already a trigger and if the signals have already
been completely acquired.

19

19-6

PID Regulator [46]

PID REGULATOR [46]
20.1 Description and Definitions
The CFW-11 has the special function PID REGULATOR, which can be used to control a closed loop process.
This function places a proportional, integral and derivative regulator, superposed to the normal CFW-11 speed
control. Refer to the block diagram in the figure 20.1.
The process control is done by means of the motor speed variation, keeping the value of the process variable
(the one to be controlled) at the desired value.
Application examples: the control of flow or pressure in a piping, of the temperature in a furnace or in a
greenhouse, or of the chemicals dosage in tanks.
In order to define the terms used by a PID control, we are going to use a simple example.
An electro-pump is used in a water pumping system where the pressure in the pump output pipe has to be
controlled. A pressure transducer is installed in the pipe and supplies an analog feedback signal to the
CFW-11, which is proportional to the water pressure. This signal is called the process variable, and can be
visualized at the parameter P0040. A setpoint is programmed in the CFW-11 via the keypad (HMI) (P0525)
or adjusted through an analog input (as a 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal). The setpoint is the desired water
pressure value that the pump is supposed to produce, regardless of the consumption variations at the pump
output at any time.
The CFW-11 will compare the setpoint with the process variable and control the motor speed trying to eliminate
any error and keeping the process variable equal to the setpoint. The setting of the P, I and D gains determines
how fast the inverter will respond to eliminate this error.

20

20-1

20

20-2

P0221 / P0222=0

P0524=2

P0524=1

P0524=3

P0524=0

Feedback P0524
(Refer to the figures 13.1 and 13.2)

AI4'

AI3'

AI2'

AI1'

P0526

Setpoint Reference
P0221 / P0222>0
(Refer to the figure 13.8)

P0525

Setpoint Definition
(reference of the process variable)

Academic
PID

-

P0528
P0529

P0040

P0523

P0520

Enable

+

Enable

Academic
PID

P0521

P0522

+

Figure 20.1 - PID Regulator function block diagram
+

+

P0133, P0134

P0527

PID Regulator
Action Type

1 = Reverse

0 = Direct

Manual
(Open DIx)

DI3
(P0265=22)

Automatic
(Closed DIx)

Reference
(Refer to the figure 13.8)

Speed
Reference
(Refer to the
figure 13.8)

PID Regulator [46]

PID Regulator [46]
20.2 Commissioning
Before doing a detailed description of the parameters related to this function, a step by step guide for putting
the PID into operation will be presented.

NOTE!
In order that the PID function works properly, it is fundamental to verify if the inverter is configured
correctly to drive the motor at the desired speed. Therefore, verify the following settings:
Torque boost (P0136 and P0137) and slip compensation (P0138), if it were in the V/f control
mode;
Having run the self-tuning if it were in the vector mode;
Acceleration and deceleration ramps (P0100 to P0103) and current limit (P0135 for V/f and VVW
control, or P0169/P0170 for vector control).
Configuring the PID Function
1) To select the especial function: PID Regulator (P0203=1)
When the PID function is enabled, by setting P0203=1, the following parameters are changed automatically:
P0205=10 (Reading Parameter Selection 1: Setpoint PID #);
P0206=9 (Reading Parameter Selection 2: Process Var. #);
P0207=2 (Reading Parameter Selection 3: Motor Speed #);
P0223=0 (FORWARD/REVERSE Selection - LOCAL Situation: Always FORWARD);
P0225=0 (JOG Selection – LOCAL Situation: Disabled);
P0226=0 (FORWARD/REVERSE Selection - REMOTE Situation: Always FORWARD);
P0228=0 (JOG Selection - REMOTE Situation: Disabled);
P0236=3 (AI2 Signal Function: Process Variable);
P0265=22 (DI3 Function: Manual/Automatic).
The DI3 function, defined by the parameter P0265, works in the following manner:
Table 20.1 - DI3 operation mode for P0265=22
DI3
0 (0 V)
1 (24 V)

Operation
Manual
Automatic

2) To define the type of PID action that the process requires: direct or reverse. The control action must be
direct (P0527=0) when it is necessary that the speed increases for the process variable to increase. Otherwise,
select reverse (P0527=1).
Examples:
a) Direct: A pump driven by an inverter filling up a reservoir, with the PID controlling its level. In order that the
level (process variable) increases, it is necessary that the flow increases, which is obtained with the increase
of the motor speed.
b) Reverse: A fan driven by an inverter doing the refrigeration of a cooling tower, with the PID controlling its
temperature. In order that the temperature (process variable) increases, it is necessary that the ventilation be
reduced, by means of the reduction of the motor speed.

20-3

20

PID Regulator [46]
3) To define the feedback input: the feedback (process variable measurement) is always done via one of
the analog inputs (selected at P0524). In order to make this guide easier, the AI2 input will be selected
(P0524=1).
4) To adjust the process variable scale: the transducer (sensor) to be used for the process variable feedback
must have a full scale of at least 1.1 times the highest value to be controlled.
Example: If a 20 bar pressure has to be controlled, a sensor with a full scale of at least 22 bar (1.1 x 20) must
be chosen.
Once the sensor has been defined, the type of signal to be read at the input (if current or voltage) must be
selected and the corresponding switch (S1 or S2) be set for that selection.
In this guide it will be assumed that the sensor signal will be 4 to 20 mA (configuring P0238 = 1 and
S1.3=ON).
Afterwards, the gain (P0237) and the offset (P0239) of the feedback signal can be adjusted so that the process
variable be read at the analog input with the highest possible resolution without saturation. In this case, adjust
the parameters P0237 and P0239, according to the following example.

NOTE!

In order to avoid the saturation of the feedback analog input during regulation overshoots, the signal
must range from 0 to 90 % (0 to 9 V / 4 to 18 mA). This adaptation can be done by changing the
gain of the analog input selected as feedback.
Example:
- Full scale of the transducer (maximum output value)=25 bar (FS = 25);
- Operation range (range of interest) = 0 to 15 bar (OR = 15).
Opting to maintain P0237 = 1.000 and P0239 = 0 (factory setting), which is the most common for most
of the applications:
- P0525 = 50 % (Keypad PID setpoint) will be equivalent to the used sensor full scale value, i.e., 0.5 x FS =
12.5 bar. Thus, the operation range (0 to 15 bar) represents 60 % of the setpoint.
If it is necessary to adjust P0237:
- Considering a gap of 10 % for the process variable measurement range (MR = 1.1 x OR = 16.5), it must
be adjusted at 0 to 16.5 bar. Therefore, the parameter P0237 must be set:

P0237 =

FS
MR

=

25
16.5

= 1.52

Thus, a setpoint of 100 % represents 16.5 bar, i.e., the operation range in percentage stays from 0 to 90.9 %
(OR=15/16.5).

20

If offset adjustment is necessary, the parameter P0239 must be configured according to the detailed description
of the section 13.1.1.

20-4

PID Regulator [46]
If it is wished to change the indication of the process variable on the keypad (HMI), the parameters P0528 and
P0529 must be adjusted according to the transducer full scale and to the defined P0237 value (Refer to the
description of those parameters at the section 20.6). The parameters P0530 to P0532 can be configured to
set the process variable engineering unit.
Example: If a reading of “25.0 bar” is wished for the motor maximum speed, set:
–
–
–
–
–

P0528=250;
P0529=1 (wxy.z);
P0530=“b”;
P0531=“a”;
P0532=“r”.

5) To set the reference (setpoint): to define the operation mode (local/remote) at the parameter P0220 and
the reference source at parameters P0221 and P0222, according to the desired situation.
In case the setpoint is defined via keypad (HMI), set P0525 according to the equation below:

Setpoint (%) =

Desired value (process variable)
Sensor full scale value

x

feedback
gain

x 100 %

Example: Given a pressure transducer with a 4 to 20 mA output and a full scale of 25 bar (i.e., 4 mA=0 bar
and 20 mA=25 bar) and P0237=2.000. If it is wished to control 10 bar, the following setpoint must
be entered:
Setpoint (%) =

10
x 2 x 100 % = 80 %
25

In case the setpoint is defined via analog input (AI1 for instance), P0231 must be configured=0 (AI1 Signal
Function: Speed reference) and P0233 (AI1 Signal Type) according to the type of signal to be read by the input
(if current or voltage).
Do not program P0221 and/or P0222=7 (E.P.).
6) To set the speed limits: Adjust P0133 and P0134 according to the application.
The readings exhibited automatically when the inverter is powered are:
- Reading 1 – P0041 “PID Setpoint”;
- Reading 2 – P0040 “Process Variable”;
- Reading 3 – P0002 “Motor Speed”.
7) Indication: Refer to the section 5 in this manual.
Those variables can also be visualized at the analog outputs (AOx), provided that the parameters that define
the function of those outputs be programmed accordingly.

20-5

20

PID Regulator [46]
Starting up
1) Manual Operation (open DI3): keeping the DI3 open (Manual), check the process variable indication on the
keypad (HMI) (P0040) based on an external measurement of the feedback signal value (transducer) at AI2.
Next, vary the speed reference until reaching the desired value of the process variable. Only then pass it to
the automatic mode.

NOTE!

If the setpoint is defined by P0525, the inverter will set P0525 automatically with the instantaneous
value of P0040 when the mode is changed from manual to automatic (provided that P0536=1).
In this case, the commutation from manual to automatic is smooth (there is no abrupt speed
change).
2) Automatic Operation (closed DI3): close DI3 and perform the PID regulator dynamic adjustment, i.e., of
the proportional (P0520), integral (P0521) and differential (P0522), verifying if the regulation is being done
correctly. Therefore, it is only necessary to compare the setpoint to the process variable checking if the values
are close. Observe also how fast the motor responds to oscillations in the process variable.
It is important to point out that the PID gain setting is a step that requires attempt and error in order to
get the desired response time. If the system responds rapidly and oscillates close to the setpoint, then the
proportional gain is too high. If the system responds slowly and takes time to reach the setpoint, then the
proportional gain is too low and must be increased. And in case that the process variable does not reach
the required value (setpoint), then the integral gain must be adjusted.
As a summary of this guide, a schematic of the connections of the CFW-11 for the PID regulator application,
as well as the setting of the parameters used in this example, are presented next.
4-20 mA
15 DI1
17 DI3
18 DI4
12 COM

Setpoint
via AI1
≥5 kW

0-25 bar

Setpoint
via keypad

13 24VCC
CFW-11
off
11 DGND
1
1 +REF
2
2 AI1+
3
3 AI14
4 -REF
5 AI2+
6 AI2PE R S T U V W PE

on

DI1 – Run /Stop
DI3 – Manual / Automatic
DI4 – General Enable

S1

Process

PE W V U

XC1
PE
Shield
R
S

20

T
Line

Isolating switch

Fuses

Figure 20.2 - Example of a CFW-11 application as a PID regulator

20-6

Pressure
Transducer

PID Regulator [46]
Table 20.2 - Parameter setting for the presented example
Parameter
P0203=1
P0527=0(1)
P0524=1(1)
P0238=1
P0237=1.000(1)
P0239=0(1)
P0528=250
P0529=1(1)
P0220=1
P0222=0
P0525=80%
P0230=1
P0205=10(2)
P0206=9(2)
P0207=2(2)
P0536=1(1)
P0227=1(1)
P0263=1(1)
P0265=22(2)
P0266=2
P0236=3(2)
P0520=1.000(1)
P0521=1.000
P0522=0.000(1)
(1)
(2)

Description
Selection of the PID regulator function
PID action type (Direct)
AI2 feedback input
AI2 signal type (4 to 20 mA)
AI2 input gain
AI2 input offset
Process variable scale factor
Process variable decimal point (wxy.z)
Operation in remote situation
Reference selection (HMI)
PID Setpoint
Dead zone (On)
Reading Parameter Selection 1 (Process variable)
Reading Parameter Selection 2 (PID setpoint)
Reading Parameter Selection 3 (Motor Speed)
P0525 automatic setting (On)
Remote Run/Stop selection (DIx)
DI1 function (Run/Stop)
DI3 function: Manual/Automatic
DI4 function (General Enable)
AI2 input function (Process Variable)
PID proportional gain
PID integral gain
PID differential gain

Parameters already in the factory default.
Parameter configured automatically by the inverter.

20.3 Sleep Mode
The sleep mode is a useful resource for saving energy when using the PID regulator.
In many PID applications energy is wasted by keeping the motor turning at the minimum speed when, for
instance, the pressure or the tank level keeps increasing.
The sleep mode works together with the zero speed disable function.
In order to activate the sleep mode, enable the zero speed disable by programming P0217=1 (On). The disable
condition is the same as for the zero speed disable without PID. Refer to the section 12.6.
For leaving the zero speed disable mode, when in the automatic PID mode, besides the condition programmed
in P0218, it is also necessary that the PID error (the difference between the setpoint and the process variable)
be higher than the value programmed in P0535.

DANGER!

While in the sleep mode, the motor may turn at any moment because of the process conditions. If
it is wished to handle the motor or to perform any type of maintenance, remove the power from the
inverter.

20

20.4 Monitoring Mode Screens
When the PID regulator is used, the monitoring mode screen can be configured to show the main variables in
a numerical form or as a bar graph, with the respective engineering units.

20-7

PID Regulator [46]
An example of the keypad (HMI) with that configuration can be seen in the figure 20.3, where the process
variable and the setpoint, both in BAR, and the motor speed in rpm are showed. Refer to the section 5.

Run
bar

LOC
15%

bar

5%

rpm

45%
16:56

90rpm

Run

LOC

5.0
5.0
990
Menu

90rpm

bar
bar
rpm

16:54

Menu

Figure 20.3 - Example of the keypad (HMI) in the monitoring mode for the PID Regulator function

20.5 Connection of a 2-Wire Transducer
In the 2-wire configuration the transducer signal and its supply share the same wires. The figure 20.5 illustrates
this type of connection.
15 DI1
17 DI3
18 DI4
12 COM

Process

Pressure
Transducer

13
11
1
2
3
4
5
6

24VCC
DGND
+REF
AI1+
AI1-REF
AI2+
AI2-

Setpoint
via keypad

CFW-11

off
1
2
3
4

PE R S T U V W PE

Figure 20.4 - Connection of a 2-wire transducer to the CFW-11

20.6 Parameters
The parameters related to the PID Regulator [46] are now described in a detail form.

P0040 – PID Process Variable
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 100.0 %

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

46 PID Regulator

Description:
It is a read only parameter that presents, in percentage, the PID Regulator process variable value.

P0041 – PID Setpoint Value

20

Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 100.0 %

Proprieties:

RO

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

20-8

46 PID Regulator

Factory
Setting:

on

S1

PID Regulator [46]

Description:
It is a read only parameter that presents, in percentage, the value of the PID Regulator setpoint (reference).

P0203 – Special Function Selection
Adjustable
Range:

0 = None
1 = PID Regulator

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

Factory
Setting:

0

46 Regulador PID

Description:
It enables the use of the PID Regulator special function, when set to 1.
When P0203 is changed to 1, the following parameters are changed automatically:
P0205=10 (Reading Parameter Selection 1);
P0206=9 (Reading Parameter Selection 2);
P0207=2 (Reading Parameter Selection 3);
P0223=0 (FORWARD/REVERSE Selection - LOCAL Situation: Always FORWARD);
P0225=0 (JOG Selection – LOCAL Situation: Disabled);
P0226=0 (FORWARD/REVERSE Selection - REMOTE Situation: Always FORWARD);
P0228=0 (JOG Selection – REMOTE Situation: Disabled);
P0236=3 (AI2 Signal Function: Process Variable);
- P0265=22 (DI3 Function: Manual/Automatic).
Once the PID Regulator function is enabled, the JOG and FWD/REV functions become inactive. The enabling and
Run/Stop commands are defined at P0220, P0224 and P0227.

P0520 – PID Proportional Gain
P0521 – PID Integral Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 7.999

Factory
Setting:

P0520=1.000
P0521=0.043

P0522 – PID Differential Gain
Adjustable
Range:

0.000 to 3.499

Factory
Setting:

0.000

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
46 PID Regulator

20

Description:
These parameters define the gains of the PID Regulator function, and must be adjusted according to the application
that is being controlled.
Examples of initial settings for some applications are presented in the table 20.3
20-9

PID Regulator [46]
Table 20.3 - Suggestions for PID regulator gain settings
Gains
Quantity
Pneumatic system pressure
Pneumatic system flow
Hydraulic system pressure
Hydraulic system flow
Temperature
Level

Proportional
P0520

Integral
P0521

Differential
P0522

1
1
1
1
2
1

0.043
0.037
0.043
0.037
0.004
See note

0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000

NOTE!

In the level control case, the setting of the integral gain will depend on the time that it takes for
the reservoir to pass from the minimum acceptable level to the desired level, in the following
conditions:
1. For the direct action the time must be measured with the maximum input flow and the minimum
output flow;
2. For the reverse action the time must be measured with the minimum input flow and the maximum
output flow.

A formula for calculating the P0521 initial value in function of the system response time is presented next:
P0521=0.02 / t
Where t=time (in seconds).

P0523 – PID Ramp Time
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 999.0 s

Factory
Setting:

3.0 s

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
46 PID Regulator

Description:
This parameter adjusts the ramp time used by the PID regulator function, which will act when it is necessary to
correct the difference between the process variable and the setpoint.
The factory setting time (3.0 s) is normally adequate for the majority of the applications, as those listed in the table
20.3.

P0524 – PID Feedback Selection

20

Adjustable
Range:

0 = AI1
1 = AI2
2 = AI3
3 = AI4

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

20-10

46 PID Regulator

Factory
Setting:

1

PID Regulator [46]

Description:
It selects the regulator feedback input (process variable).
After choosing the feedback input, the function of the selected input must be programmed at P0231 (for AI1),
P0236 (for AI2), P0241 (for AI3) or P0246 (for AI4).

P0525 – Keypad PID Setpoint
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 100.0 %

Factory
Setting:

0.0 %

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
46 PID Regulator

Description:
This parameter allows the setting of the PID Regulator setpoint through the HMI keys, provided that P0221=0
or P0222=0, and if it is operating in Automatic mode. In case it is operating in Manual mode, the reference via
keypad (HMI) is adjusted at the parameter P0121.
The value of P0525 is kept at the last adjusted value (backup) even disabling or removing power from the inverter
(with P0120=1 – Active).

P0527 – PID Action Type
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Direct
1 = Reverse

Factory
Setting:

0

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
46 PID Regulator

Description:
The type of PID action must be selected as “Direct” when it is necessary that the motor speed be increased so that
the process variable be increased. Otherwise, “Reverse” must be selected.
Table 20.4 - PID action selection
Motor Speed
Increases

Process Variable
Increases
Diminishes

Select
Direct
Reverse

That characteristic varies according to the process, but the direct action is more used.
In temperature or level control processes, the setting of the type of action will depend on the configuration. For
instance: at the level control, if the inverter acts on the motor that extracts fluid from the reservoir, the action will be
reverse, because when the level increases, the inverter must increase the motor speed so that it diminishes. In case the
inverter acts on the motor that puts fluid into the reservoir, the action will be direct.

P0528 – Process Variable Scale Factor
Adjustable
Range:

1 to 9999

20
Factory
Setting:

1000

20-11

PID Regulator [46]

P0529 – Process Variable Decimal Point
Adjustable
Range:

0 = wxyz
1 = wxy.z
2 = wx.yz
3 = w.xyz

Factory
Setting:

1

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
46 PID Regulator

Description:
Those parameters define how the process variable (P0040) and the PID Setpoint (P0041) will be shown.
The parameter P0529 defines the number of decimal places after the dot.
However the parameter P0528 must be adjusted in the following manner:
P0528 =

Process V. FS Indication x (10)P0529
,
Analog input Gain

Where: Process V. F. S. Indication = Process Variable Full Scale value, which corresponds to 10 V/20 mA at the
analog input used as feedback.
Example 1 (0 to 25 bar Pressure Transducer – 4 to 20 mA output):
- Desired indication: 0 to 25 bar (F.S.);
- Feedback input: AI3;
- AI3 gain: P0242=1.000;
- AI3 signal: P0243=1 (4 to 20 mA);
- P0529=0 (without decimal place after the dot).
P0528 =

-

25 x (10)0
= 25
1.000

Example 2 (Factory settings):
Desired indication: 0.0 % to 100.0 % (F.S.);
Feedback input: AI2;
AI2 gain: P0237=1.000;
P0529=1 (one decimal place after the dot).
P0528 =

100.0 x (10)1
= 1000
1.000

P0530 – Process Variable Engineering Unit 1
Adjustable
Range:

20

32 to 127

P0531 – Process Variable Engineering Unit 2

20-12

Factory
Setting:

37

PID Regulator [46]

P0532 – Process Variable Engineering Unit 3
Adjustable
Range:

32 to 127

Factory
Setting:

P0531=32
P0532=32

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
46 PID Regulator

Description:
The process variable engineering unit is composed of three characters, which will be applied to the indication of
the parameters P0040 and P0041. The parameter P0530 defines the left most character, P0531 the center and
P0532 the right most.
The characters that can be chosen correspond to the ASCII code 32 to 127.
Examples:
A, B,

...,

Y,

−To indicate “bar”:
P0530=”b” (98)
P0531=”a” (97)
P0532=”r” (114)

Z,

a,

b,

...,

y,

z,

0,

1,

...,

9,

#,

$,

%,

(,

),

*,

+,

...

−To indicate “%”:
P0530=”%” (37)
P0531=” ” (32)
P0532=” ” (32)

P0533 – PVx Process Variable
P0534 – PVy Process Variable
Adjustable
Range:

0.0 to 100.0 %

Factory P0533=90.0 %
Setting: P0534=10.0 %

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
46 PID Regulator

Description:
Those parameters are used in the functions of the digital/relay outputs, with the purpose of signalizing/alarm, and
they will indicate:
Process Variable > VPx and
Process Variable < VPy
The values are in percentage of the process variable full scale:
P0040 =

(10)P0529
P0528

x 100 %

P0535 – Wake Up Band
Adjustable
Range:

0 to 100 %

Factory
Setting:

20

0%

20-13

PID Regulator [46]

Proprieties:
Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS
46 PID Regulator

Description:
The parameter P0535 works together with the parameter P0218 (Condition to Leave the Zero Speed Disable),
giving the additional condition for leaving the Zero Speed Disable. Therefore, it is necessary that the PID error (the
difference between the setpoint and the process variable) be higher than the value programmed in P0535 so that
the inverter runs the motor again.

P0536 – P0525 Automatic Setting
Adjustable
Range:

0 = Off
1 = On

Factory
Setting:

Proprieties:

CFG

Access groups
via HMI:

01 PARAMETER GROUPS

1

46 PID Regulator

Description:
When the PID regulator setpoint is via keypad (HMI) (P0221/P0222=0) and P0536=1 (On), by commutating from
manual to automatic the value of the process variable (P0040) will be loaded into P0525. Therefore PID oscillations
during the commutation from manual to automatic are avoided.

20.7 Academic PID
The controller implemented in the CFW-11 is of the academic type. The equations that characterize the Academic
PID, which is the base of this function algorithm, are presented next.
The transfer function in the Academic PID regulator frequency dominion is:
y(s) = Kp x e(s) x [ 1 +

1
sTi

+ sTd]

By replacing the integrator by a sum and the derivative by the incremental quotient, one gets an approximation for
the discrete transfer equation (recursive) presented next:
y(kTa) = y(k-1)Ta + Kp[(e(KTa) - e(k-1)Ta) + Kie(k-1)Ta + Kd(e(kTa) - 2e(k-1)Ta + e(k-2)Ta)]

20

Being:
Kp (Proportional gain): Kp = P0520 x 4096;
Ki (Integral gain): Ki = P0521 x 4096 = [Ta/Ti x 4096];
Kd (Differential gain): Kd = P0522 x 4096 = [Td/Ta x 4096];
Ta = 0.02sec (PID regulator sampling time);
SP*: reference, it has 13 bits (0 to 8191) maximum;
X: process variable (or controlled), read by means of one of the analog inputs (AIx), it has 13 bits maximum;
y(kTa): PID actual output, it has 13 bits maximum;
y(k-1)Ta: PID previous output;
e(kTa): actual error [SP*(k) – X(k)];
e(k-1)Ta: previous error [SP*(k-1) – X(k-1)];
e(k-2)Ta: error two samples before [SP*(k-2) – X(k-2)].
20-14
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-701
Create Date                     : 2008:05:13 13:49:19-03:00
Metadata Date                   : 2008:05:14 16:37:08-03:00
Modify Date                     : 2008:05:14 16:37:08-03:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe InDesign CS3 (5.0.2)
Thumbnail Format                : JPEG
Thumbnail Width                 : 256
Thumbnail Height                : 256
Thumbnail Image                 : (Binary data 13040 bytes, use -b option to extract)
Instance ID                     : uuid:4e48d37b-957f-43b4-b8d9-cd3636c83543
Document ID                     : adobe:docid:indd:6cc7d238-1dda-11dd-be8b-c6c35e82e7d2
Rendition Class                 : proof:pdf
Derived From Instance ID        : 6cc7d237-1dda-11dd-be8b-c6c35e82e7d2
Derived From Document ID        : adobe:docid:indd:1c2def53-1d60-11dd-84e3-a2decf83365b
Manifest Link Form              : ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream, ReferenceStream
Manifest Placed X Resolution    : 72.00, 72.00, 254.00, 299.99, 72.00, 300.00, 254.00, 254.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 300.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 72.00, 200.00, 72.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 96.00, 96.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 300.00, 72.00, 300.00, 398.99, 398.99, 72.00, 449.99, 449.99, 300.00, 72.00, 300.00, 72.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 72.00, 72.00, 200.00, 300.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 300.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 300.00, 72.00, 72.00, 250.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 250.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 200.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 72.00, 72.00, 300.00, 600.00, 600.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 250.00, 72.00, 200.00, 200.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 254.00, 72.00
Manifest Placed Y Resolution    : 72.00, 72.00, 254.00, 299.99, 72.00, 300.00, 254.00, 254.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 300.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 72.00, 200.00, 72.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 200.00, 96.00, 96.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 300.00, 72.00, 300.00, 398.99, 398.99, 72.00, 449.99, 449.99, 300.00, 72.00, 300.00, 72.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 72.00, 72.00, 200.00, 300.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 300.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 300.00, 72.00, 72.00, 250.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 250.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 200.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 72.00, 72.00, 300.00, 600.00, 600.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 250.00, 72.00, 200.00, 200.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 72.00, 254.00, 72.00
Manifest Placed Resolution Unit : Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches, Inches
Manifest Reference Instance ID  : uuid:45184AB46EE4DC119CB5E35612C62F0E, uuid:45184AB46EE4DC119CB5E35612C62F0E, uuid:29A88ED79957DB11B4CAA0BFE3E09AFC, uuid:09BEA15EA8BADA11ABCB96293535C901, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:C0CB6A8E774EDB11A6E6F21A5E438E85, uuid:29A88ED79957DB11B4CAA0BFE3E09AFC, uuid:29A88ED79957DB11B4CAA0BFE3E09AFC, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:412A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:5F878D749CDBDB119413F9E620A04CD4, uuid:62878D749CDBDB119413F9E620A04CD4, uuid:5F878D749CDBDB119413F9E620A04CD4, uuid:62878D749CDBDB119413F9E620A04CD4, uuid:6E031EE2CB62DB119352EBF88E22647A, uuid:6E031EE2CB62DB119352EBF88E22647A, uuid:4C2264A3CF62DB119829F1F4459FCAF4, uuid:67D0327AB841DB11B195C76BD12F3F88, uuid:9B64B0329A84DB11B358CA8C7F0491D2, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:6A031EE2CB62DB119352EBF88E22647A, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:5F878D749CDBDB119413F9E620A04CD4, uuid:62878D749CDBDB119413F9E620A04CD4, uuid:5F878D749CDBDB119413F9E620A04CD4, uuid:62878D749CDBDB119413F9E620A04CD4, uuid:3DF69D237A18DD11AE7E96CF4B5FB301, uuid:37C745D47F1CDD11AC81813E74F740BB, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:412A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:412A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:11a8af67-7c5d-11d8-a6a3-96816f464842, uuid:350BD47755A5DB11B2CD92C6FDADD915, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:6ac3a1e6-ada0-11d9-8736-e6ab4e86b3bf, uuid:41afde4b-945d-11d8-ac37-b401effdd627, uuid:412A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:412A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:412A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:412A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:62878D749CDBDB119413F9E620A04CD4, uuid:412A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:412A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:412A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:ADB8CA381A3CDB1193A5C087FF2CB2F8, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:ADB8CA381A3CDB1193A5C087FF2CB2F8, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:412A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:412A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:62878D749CDBDB119413F9E620A04CD4, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3C5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:412A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:CAB2193998D1DB11B6CBB968E22526E7, uuid:05FB81C19BD1DB11AD54FD308163575A, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:ADB8CA381A3CDB1193A5C087FF2CB2F8, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:5F878D749CDBDB119413F9E620A04CD4, uuid:62878D749CDBDB119413F9E620A04CD4, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:29A88ED79957DB11B4CAA0BFE3E09AFC, uuid:CBB48F43797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29
Manifest Reference Document ID  : uuid:5F21D89E193CDB1193A5C087FF2CB2F8, uuid:08BEA15EA8BADA11ABCB96293535C901, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:A6260758774EDB11A6E6F21A5E438E85, uuid:5F21D89E193CDB1193A5C087FF2CB2F8, uuid:5F21D89E193CDB1193A5C087FF2CB2F8, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:402A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:B195470A9CDBDB118730D8D5889714B6, uuid:77234F3F9CDBDB118730D8D5889714B6, uuid:B195470A9CDBDB118730D8D5889714B6, uuid:77234F3F9CDBDB118730D8D5889714B6, uuid:6D031EE2CB62DB119352EBF88E22647A, uuid:6D031EE2CB62DB119352EBF88E22647A, uuid:4B2264A3CF62DB119829F1F4459FCAF4, uuid:66D0327AB841DB11B195C76BD12F3F88, uuid:9A64B0329A84DB11B358CA8C7F0491D2, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:67031EE2CB62DB119352EBF88E22647A, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:B195470A9CDBDB118730D8D5889714B6, uuid:77234F3F9CDBDB118730D8D5889714B6, uuid:B195470A9CDBDB118730D8D5889714B6, uuid:77234F3F9CDBDB118730D8D5889714B6, uuid:08E1452F5F1CDD11B80FCEB1D1F6224A, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:402A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:402A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, adobe:docid:photoshop:11a8af66-7c5d-11d8-a6a3-96816f464842, adobe:docid:photoshop:ee87deae-7cc1-11d8-bdeb-db8128494bd0, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, adobe:docid:photoshop:6ac3a1e5-ada0-11d9-8736-e6ab4e86b3bf, adobe:docid:photoshop:41afde4a-945d-11d8-ac37-b401effdd627, uuid:402A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:402A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:402A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:402A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:77234F3F9CDBDB118730D8D5889714B6, uuid:402A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:402A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:402A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:ACB8CA381A3CDB1193A5C087FF2CB2F8, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:ACB8CA381A3CDB1193A5C087FF2CB2F8, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:402A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:402A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:77234F3F9CDBDB118730D8D5889714B6, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:3B5EFF300D52DB11B4D3982991889DCD, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:402A6F8F0ED6DB118A319428026FA30F, uuid:C9B2193998D1DB11B6CBB968E22526E7, uuid:04FB81C19BD1DB11AD54FD308163575A, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:ACB8CA381A3CDB1193A5C087FF2CB2F8, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:B195470A9CDBDB118730D8D5889714B6, uuid:77234F3F9CDBDB118730D8D5889714B6, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29, uuid:5F21D89E193CDB1193A5C087FF2CB2F8, uuid:E6CCDA3F797EDC119862AD8FC1209D29
Format                          : application/pdf
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 8.0
Trapped                         : False
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 254
Creator                         : Adobe InDesign CS3 (5.0.2)
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu